Fisher R FIELDVUE™ DVC6000 Digital Valve Controllers Instruction Manual (Supported)

Supported Product DVC6000 Digital Valve Controllers

D102794X012 October 2013

Fisherr FIELDVUE™ DVC6000 Digital Valve

Controllers Instruction Manual
(Supported)
Supported products may not be manufactured again in any Emerson Process Management location under any
conditions. Spare parts availability is 7 years of best effort. Technical support is available.
Post‐sale documents (such as instruction manuals and quick start guides) are available on the CD and FishWeb. Many
are also available at www.fisher.com.
Instruction manuals for supported products may be updated, if required, to support products in the field.
Pre‐sale documents (such as bulletins) for supported products are included on FishWeb for internal use. They are not
included on the CD.
Neither Emerson, Emerson Process Management, nor any of their affiliated entities assumes responsibility for the selection, use or maintenance
of any product. Responsibility for proper selection, use, and maintenance of any product remains solely with the purchaser and end user.
Fisher and FIELDVUE are marks owned by one of the companies in the Emerson Process Management business unit of Emerson Electric Co. Emerson Process
Management, Emerson, and the Emerson logo are trademarks and service marks of Emerson Electric Co. All other marks are the property of their respective
owners.
The contents of this publication are presented for informational purposes only, and while every effort has been made to ensure their accuracy, they are not
to be construed as warranties or guarantees, express or implied, regarding the products or services described herein or their use or applicability. All sales are
governed by our terms and conditions, which are available upon request. We reserve the right to modify or improve the designs or specifications of such
products at any time without notice.
Emerson Process Management
Marshalltown, Iowa 50158 USA
Sorocaba, 18087 Brazil
Chatham, Kent ME4 4QZ UK
Dubai, United Arab Emirates
Singapore 128461 Singapore
www.Fisher.com
E 2013 Fisher Controls International LLC. All rights reserved.

Instruction Manual
D102794X012
DVC6000 Digital Valve Controllers September 2013
Fisherr FIELDVUEt DVC6000

Digital Valve Controllers
This manual applies to:
Introduction and Specifications 1
Instrument Level AC, HC, AD, PD HC, AD, PD, ODV AC Installation 2
Device Type 03 03 07
Device Revision 1 2 2 Basic Setup 3
Hardware Revision 1 1 1
Firmware Revision 2−6 7, 9, 10, 11 7, 9, 10, 11 Detailed Setup 4
DD Revision 4 8 1
Calibration 5
Viewing Device Variables and Diagnostics 6
Maintenance and Troubleshooting 7
Parts 8
9
Appendices A
Principle of Operation A
Loop Schematics/Nameplates B
Glossary C
Glossary
Index 14
Index
Refer to Related Documents on page 1-3 for other documents containing

information related to DVC6000 digital valve controllers
www.Fisher.com
DVC6000 Digital Valve Controllers
Fast Key Sequence for Instrument Level HC, AD, PD, and ODV
Fast-Key Fast-Key
Function/Variable Coordinates(1) Function/Variable Coordinates(1)
Sequence Sequence
A Minus B 3-5-3 4-G End Point Pressure Control(3) 1-2-2-2-4 8-D
Actuator Style 1-2-6-4 3-D 1-2-3-6-5-1
Failure Group Enable 11-I
Alert Conditions 2-1 2-F 1-2-3-7-5-1
1-2-3-6-2 Firmware Revision 3-7-6 2-H
Alert Record Full Enable 10-H
1-2-3-7-2 Flash ROM Shutdown 1-2-3-1-3-5 12-C
1-2-3-6-1 Hardware Revision 3-7-7 2-H
Alert Record Has Entries Enable 10-H
1-2-3-7-1 1-2-5-1-1 6-F
HART Tag
Analog Input 3-1 2-G 3-7-1 2-H
Analog Input Calibration 1-3-2-3 4-E HART Universal Revision 3-7-9 2-H
Analog Input Range Hi 1-2-5-3-1 6-H Input Characterization 1-2-2-3 4-C
Analog Input Range Lo 1-2-5-3-2 6-H 1-2-4-1-2 8-G
Instrument Date and Time
Analog Input Units 1-2-5-2-3 6-G 1-2-5-8 4-G
Auto Calibration 1-3-1-1 4-E Instrument Level 3-7-8 2-H
Autocalibration in Progress Enable 1-2-4-2-2 8-H Hot Key-1 1-A
Instrument Mode
3-6-1 4-H 1-2-1-1 4-B
Auxiliary Input
1-2-3-3-1-2 12-D Instrument Serial Number 1-2-5-1-6 6-G
1-2-3-3-1-3 12-E Instrument Time Invalid Enable 1-2-4-1-1 8-G
Auxiliary Terminal Action
1-2-5-7 4-G 1-2-4-4-4 8-I
Integral Dead Zone
Auxiliary Terminal Alert Enable 1-2-3-3-1-1 12-E 1-2-2-1-2-1 8-B
Burst Command 1-2-1-4-3 6-B Integral Enable (Travel Tuning) 1-2-2-1-1-2 8-A
Burst Enable 1-2-1-4-1 6-B Integral Enable (Pressure Tuning) 1-2-2-1-3-2 8-C
Calibration in Progress Enable 1-2-4-2-1 8-G Integral Gain (Travel Tuning) 1-2-2-1-1-3 8-A
1-2-3-6-4 Integral Gain (Pressure Tuning) 1-2-2-1-3-3 8-C
Clear ALL Records 10-H
1-2-3-7-4 1-2-4-4-3 8-I
Integral Limit
Command 3 Configured Pressure 1-2-1-4-5 6−B 1-2-2-1-2-2 8-B
Hot Key-2 1-A Integrator Saturated Hi Enable 1-2-4-4-1 8-I
Control Mode
1-2-1-2 4-B Integrator Saturated Lo Enable 1-2-4-4-2 8-I
Critical NVM Shutdown 1-2-3-1-3-4 12-C Last AutoCalibration Status 1-2-5-9-1 6-H
Custom Characterization Table 1-2-2-4 4-C Last Calibration Type 1-2-5-9-2 6-H
1-2-3-4-7-3 12-G Loop Current Validation Enable(6) 1-2-3-3-3 9-E
Cutoff Hi
1-2-2-2-2-1 10-B Low Power Write Fail Enable(6) 1-2-3-1-3-2 12-B
1-2-3-4-7-4 12-G Manual Calibration 1-3-1-2 4-E
Cutoff Lo
1-2-2-2-2-2 10-B Manufacturer (Actuator) 1-2-6-1 3-D
1-2-3-5-1-2 12-H Manufacturer (Instrument) 3-7-3 2-H
Cycle Counter
3-6-5 4-H 3-6-3 4-H
Maximum Recorded Temperature
Cycle Counter Alert Enable 1-2-3-5-1-1 12-G 2-3-1 3-F
Cycle Count Alert Point 1-2-3-5-1-3 12-H Maximum Supply Pressure 1-2-5-6 4-G
Date 1-2-5-1-4 6-G Message 1-2-5-1-2 6-F
Dead Band (Cycle Count / Travel
1-2-3-5-2-1 12-H 2-3-2 3-F
Accumulator) Minimum Recorded Temperature
Descriptor 1-2-5-1-3 6-F 3-6-4 4-H
Device Description Information 3-8 2-G 1-2-3-6-5-3
Miscellaneous Group Enable 11-I
Device ID 3-7-2 2-H 1-2-3-7-5-3
Device Revision 3-7-5 2-H Model (Device) 3-7-4 2-H
Diagnostic Data Available Enable 1-2-4-2-4 8-H Multi-Drop Alert Enable 1-2-4-3-2 8-H
Diagnostic in Progress Enable 1-2-4-2-3 8-H No Free Time Shutdown 1-2-3-1-3-6 12-C
Drive Current Shutdown 1-2-3-1-1 8-D Non-Critical NVM Alert Enable 1-2-3-1-3-3 12-C
Drive Signal Alert Enable 1-2-3-1-2-1 10-D 2-3-4 3-G
Number of Power Ups
3-4 2-G 3-6-9 4-H
Drive Signal
1-2-3-1-2-2 10-D Offline/Failed Alert Enable 1-2-3-1-3-1 12-B
NOTE: Italicized Fast-Key Sequence indicates fast-key sequence is applicable only for instrument level ODV.
1. Coordinates are to help locate the item on the menu tree on the following pages.
3. Instrument level ODV only.
5. Instrument level HC, AD, and PD only.
6. Firmware 9 and 10 only.
i
Fast Key Sequence for Instrument Level HC, AD, PD, and ODV
Fast-Key Fast-Key
Sequence Sequence
Partial Stroke Test(3) 2-5 2-F 3-3 2-G
Travel
Partial Stroke Test Enable(3) 1-2-7-1 3-D 1-2-3-4-1 9-E
Partial Stroke Test Pressure Limit(3) 1-2-3-6-1 10-G Travel / Pressure Select 1-2-2-2-1 6-C
Partial Stroke Test Start Point(3) 1-2-2-2-4-2 8-D 3-6-6 4-H
Partial Stroke Test Variables Travel Accumulatorv
1-2-7-2 3-D 1-2-3-5-3-2 12-H
View/Edit(3)
1-1-2 2-B Travel Accumulator Alert Enable 1-2-3-5-3-1 12-H
Performance Tuner(2)
1-2-2-1-1-5 8-A Travel Accumulator Alert Point 1-2-3-5-3-3 12-I
Polling Address 1-2-5-1-7 6-G Travel Alert Dead Band 1-2-3-4-3 9-E
Pressure A 3-5-1 4-G Travel Alert Hi Enable 1-2-3-4-6-1 10-F
Pressure B 3-5-2 4-G Travel Alert Hi Hi Enable 1-2-3-4-5-1 12-E
Pressure Control Active Enable 1-2-4-3-1 8-H Travel Alert Hi Hi Point 1-2-3-4-5-3 12-F
Pressure Deviation Alert Enable(3) 1-2-3-6-2 10-G Travel Alert Hi Point 1-2-3-4-6-3 10-F
Pressure Deviation Alert Point(3) 1-2-3-6-3 10-G Travel Alert Lo Enable 1-2-3-4-6-2 10-F
Pressure Deviation Time(3) 1-2-3-6-4 10-G Travel Alert Lo Lo Enable 1-2-3-4-5-2 12-E
Pressure Range Hi 1-2-2-2-3-1 10-D Travel Alert Lo Lo Point 1-2-3-4-5-4 12-F
Pressure Range Lo 1-2-2-2-3-2 10-D Travel Alert Lo Point 1-2-3-4-6-4 10-F
Pressure Sensor Shutdown(2) 1-2-3-2-3 12-D Travel Deviation Alert Enable 1-2-3-4-4-1 10-E
Pressure Sensors—Calibration 1-3-2-1 4-E Travel Deviation Alert Point 1-2-3-4-4-2 10-E
Pressure Tuning Set 1-2-2-1-3-1 8-B Travel Deviation Time 1-2-3-4-4-3 10-E
Pressure Units 1-2-5-2-1 6-G Travel Limit / Cutoff Hi Enable 1-2-3-4-7-1 12-F
Hot Key-3 1-A Travel Limit / Cutoff Lo Enable 1-2-3-4-7-2 12-F
Protection
1-2-1-5 4-B 1-2-3-4-7-6 12-G
Travel Limit Hi
Raw Travel Input 3-6-7 4-H 1-2-2-2-2-4 10-C
Reference Voltage Shutdown 1-2-3-1-3-7 12-C 1-2-3-4-7-7 12-G
Travel Limit Lo
Relay Adjust 1-3-3 3-E 1-2-2-2-2-5 10-C
Relay Type 1-2-5-4 4-F Travel Sensor Adjust 1−3−2−2 4−E
Restart Control Mode 1-2-1-3 4-B Travel Sensor Motion 1-2-6-5 3-E
Restore Factory Settings 1-3-4 3-E Travel Sensor Shutdown 1-2-3-2-1 12-C
Set Point Rate Close 1-2-2-5-2 5-D 1-2-3-4-2 9-E
Travel Setpoint
Set Point Rate Open 1-2-2-5-1 5-D 3-2 2-G
Setup Wizard 1-1-1 2-B Travel Tuning Set 1-2-2-1-1-1 8-A
Hot Key-4 1-A 1-2-3-6-5-2
Valve Group Enable 10-H
Stabilize/Optimize 1-1-2(4) 2-B 1-2-3-7-5-2
1-2-2-1-1-4 8-A 1-2-5-1-5 6-F
Valve Serial Number
Status 2-2 2-F 1-2-6-2 3-D
Stroke Valve 2-4 2-F Valve Style 1-2-6-3 3-D
3-5-4 4-G 1-2-3-6-3
Supply Pressure(2) View Alert Records 10-H
1-2-3-3-2-2 12-E 1-2-3-7-3
Supply Pressure Lo Alert Enable(5) 1-2-3-3-2-1 12-E View/Edit Feedback Connection 1-2-6-6 3-E
Supply Pressure Lo Alert Point(5) 1-2-3-3-2-3 12-E View/Edit Lag Time(5) 1-2-2-5-3 5-D
Temperature 3-6-2 4-H View/Edit Lead/Lag(3) 1-2-2-5-3 5-D
Temperature Sensor Shutdown 1-2-3-2-2 12-D 2-3-3 3-F
View Number of Days Powered Up
Temperature Units 1-2-5-2-2 6-G 3-6-8 4-H
Zero Power Condition 1-2-5-5 4-G
NOTE: Italicized Fast-Key Sequence indicates fast-key sequence is applicable only for instrument level ODV.
1. Coordinates are to help locate the item on the menu tree on the following pages.
2. Not available in instrument level HC.
3. Instrument level ODV only.
4. Instrument level HC only.
5. Instrument level HC, AD, and PD only.6
7. Firmware 7 only.
ii
Field Communicator Menu Tree for
Hot Key
Instrument Level HC, AD, PD, and ODV
1‐2‐1‐4
Burst Mode
1 Instrument Mode
2 Control Mode 1‐2‐1 1 Burst Enable
Mode and Protection
3 Protection 2 Change Burst Enable
4 Stabilize/Optimize 1 Instrument Mode 3 Burst Command
1‐1 2 Control Mode 4 Change Burst Command
Guided Setup 3 Restart Control Mode 5 Cmd 3 Configured Pressure
1 Setup Wizard 4 Burst Mode
2 Performance Tuner 2 5 Protection 1‐2‐2‐1
2 Stabilize/Optimize 4 Tuning
1 Travel Tuning
2 Integral Settings
1-2 3 Pressure Tuning
Detailed Setup
1 Mode and Protection 1‐2‐2‐2
1‐2‐2 Travel/Pressure Control
2 Response Control Response Control
3 Alert Setup 1 Travel/Pressure Select
1 Tuning 2 Cutoffs and Limits
4 Status 2 Travel/Pressure Control
5 Instrument 3 Pressure Control
3 Input Characterization 4 End Point Pressure Control
6 Valve and Actuator 4 Custom Characterization Table
7 SIS/Partial Stroke 5 Dynamic Response
1‐2‐7 1‐2‐2‐5
3 Partial Stroke Dynamic Response
1 1 PST Enable 1 SP Rate Open
Configure 2 PST Enable 2 SP Rate Close
3 PST Vars View/Edit 3 View/Edit Lag Time 5
1 Guided Setup
1‐2‐6 3 View/Edit Lead/Lag 3
2 Detailed Setup Valve & Actuator
3 Calibrate 1‐2‐3
1 Manufacturer Alert Setup
2 Valve Serial Number
3 Valve Style 1 Electronics Alerts
4 Actuator Style 2 Sensor Alerts
5 Travel Sensor Motion 1‐3‐1 3 Environment Alerts
6 View/ Edit Feedback 4 Travel Alerts
Travel Calibration
Connection 5 Travel History Alerts
7 Assembly Specification Sheet 1 Auto Calibration 6 SIS Alerts 3
1‐3 2 Manual Calibration 6 Alert Record 6
Calibrate
1‐3‐2 1‐2‐4
1 Travel Calibration Status
2 Sensor Calibration Sensor Calibration
3 Relay Adjust 1 Pressure Sensors 1 Instrument Time
Online 4 Restore Factory Settings 2 Travel Sensor 2 Calibration and Diagnostics
5 PST Calibration 3 3 Analog In 3 Operational
1 Configure 2 4 Integrator Saturation
2 Service Tools Service Tools
3 Overview 1 Alert Conditions 1‐2‐5
2 Status Instrument
2‐3
3 Device Record Device Record 1‐2‐5‐1
4 Stroke Valve 1 General General
5 Partial Stroke Test 3 1 Maximum Recorded 2 Units
Temperature 3 Analog Input Range 1 HART Tag
3 2 Mininum Recorded 4 Relay Type 2 Message
Overview 3 Descriptor
Temperature 5 Zero Power Condition
1 Analog In 3 View Number of Days 6 Maximum Supply Pressure 4 Date
2 Setpoint Powered Up 7 Auxiliary Terminal Action 5 Valve Serial Number
3 Travel 4 Number of Power Ups 8 Instrument Date and Time 6 Instrument Serial Number
HART Application 1 4 Drive Signal 9 Calib Status and Type 7 Polling Address
3‐5
1 Offline 5 Pressure Pressure 1‐2‐5‐2
2 Online 6 Variables Units
3 Utility 7 Device Information 1 Pressure A
2 Pressure B 1 Pressure Units
4 HART Diagnostics 8 DD Information
3 A Minus B 2 Temperature Units
Device Information 3‐7 4 Supply 2 3 Analog In Units
Notes: 1‐2‐5‐3
1 HART Tag 3‐6 Analog Input Range
Variables
1-1-1 indicates fast-key sequence to reach menu 2 Device ID
3 Manufacturer 1 Auxiliary Input 1 Input Range Hi
4 Model 2 Temperature 2 Input Range Lo
1 This menu is available by pressing the left
arrow key from the previous menu. 5 Device Revision 3 Maximum Recorded Temperature 1‐2‐5‐9
6 Firmware Revision 4 Mininum Recorded Temperature Calib Status and Type
2 Not available in instrument level HC 7 Hardware Revision 5 Cycle Counter 1 Last AutoCal Status
8 Instrument Level 6 Travel Accumulator 2 Last Calibration Type
3 Instrument level ODV only. 9 HART Universal Revision 7 Raw Travel Input
4 Instrument level HC only. 8 View Number of Days Powered Up
9 Number of Power Ups
5 Instrument level HC, AD, and PD only.
6 Fast key sequence for Alert Record with instrument level ODV is 1-2-3-7.
7 This menu item reads Power Starvation Alrt Enab in firmware 7 and below.
8 Only available in firmware 9, 10, and 11.
1 2 3 4 5 6
iii
1‐2‐2‐1‐1
Travel Tuning
A
1 Travel Tuning Set
2 Integral Enable
3 Integral Gain
4 Stabilize / Optimize
5 Performance Tuner 2
1‐2‐2‐1‐2
Integral Settings
1 Integral Dead Zone
2 Integral Limit B
1‐2‐2‐1‐3 1‐2‐3‐1‐3
1‐2‐2‐2‐2 Processor Impaired Alerts
Pressure Tuning Cutoffs and Limits
1 Offline/Failed Alert Enable
1 Pressure Tuning Set 1 Cutoff Hi 2 Low Power Write Fail Enable 7
2 Integral Enable 2 Cutoff Lo 3 Non-Critical NVM Alert Enable
3 Integral Gain 3 Change Cutoffs 4 Critical NVM Shutdown
4 Travel Limit Hi 5 Flash ROM Shutdown
5 Travel Limit Lo 6 No Free Time Shutdown
6 Change Travel Limits 7 Reference Voltage Shutdown
End Point Pressure Control 1‐2‐3‐2 C
3 1‐2‐2‐2‐4 1‐2‐2‐2‐3 Sensor Alerts
1 End Pt Control Enab Pressure Control
2 PST Start Point 1 Travel Sensor Shutdown
1 Pressure Range Hi 2 Temp Sensor Shutdown
3 EPPC Setup Point
2 Pressure Range Lo 3 Pressure Sensor Shutdown
4 EPPC Saturation Time
1‐2‐3‐1‐2
Drive Signal Alert 1‐2‐3‐3‐1
Electronics Alerts Auxiliary Terminal Alert
1‐2‐3‐1 1 Drive Signal Alert Enable
1 Drive Current Shutdown 2 Drive Signal 1 Auxiliary Terminal Alert Enable
2 Drive Signal Alert 2 Auxiliary Input D
3 Processor Impaired Alerts 3 Auxiliary Terminal Action
1‐2‐3‐3‐2
1-2-3-3 Supply Press Lo Alert
Environment Alerts
1 Supply Pressure Lo Alert Enable
1 Auxiliary Terminal Alert 2 Supply
2 Supply Pressure Lo Alert 3 Supply Pressure Lo Alert Point
3 Loop Current Validation 1‐2‐3‐4‐4
Travel Deviation Alert
Enable 8
1-2-3-4 1 Travel Deviation Alert Enable
Travel Alerts 2 Travel Deviation Alert Point
E
3 Travel Deviation Time 1-2-3-4-5
1 Travel
2 Setpoint Travel Limit Alerts
3 Travel Alert DB 1‐2‐3‐4‐6
Travel Limit Hi/Lo Alerts 1 Travel Alert Hi Hi Enable
4 Travel Deviation Alert 2 Travel Alert Lo Lo Enable
5 Travel Limit Alerts 1 Travel Alert Hi Enable 3 Travel Alert Hi Hi Point
6 Travel Limit Hi/Lo Alerts 2 Travel Alert Lo Enable 4 Travel Alert Lo Lo Point
7 Travel Limit/Cutoff Alerts 3 Travel Alert Hi Point
4 Travel Alert Lo Point
1‐2‐3‐4‐7 Travel Limit/Cutoff Alerts
F
1‐2‐3‐5
Travel History Alerts 1 Travel Limit/Cutoff Hi Enable
2 Travel Limit/Cutoff Lo Enable
1 Cycle Counter 3 Cutoff Hi
2 Cycle Count/Travel Accumulator 4 Cutoff Lo
Deadband 5 Change Cutoffs
3 Travel Accumulator 6 Travel Limit Hi
1‐2‐4‐1 ODV
Instrument Time 1‐2‐3‐6 7 Travel Limit Lo
SIS Alerts 3 8 Change Travel Limits
1 Inst Time Invalid Enable
2 Instrument Date and Time 1 PST Pressure Limit G
2 Pressure Deviation Alert Enable 1‐2‐3‐5‐1
1‐2‐4‐2 3 Pressure Deviation Alert Point Cycle Counter
Calibration and Diagnostics
4 Pressure Deviation Time 1 Cycle Counter Alert Enable
HC, AD, PD
1 Calibration in Progress Enable 2 Cycle Counter
2 Autocal in Progress Enable 1‐2‐3‐6
3 Cycle Count Alert Point
3 Diagnostic in Progress Enable Alert Record
ODV
4 Diagnostic Data Avail Enable 1 Alert Record Has Entries Enable Cycle Count/Travel Accumulator
1‐2‐3‐7 1‐2‐3‐5‐2
1‐2‐4‐3 2 Alert Record Full Enable Deadband
Operational 3 View Alert Records
4 Clear ALL Records 1 Deadband H
1 Pressure Control Active Enable 1‐2‐3‐5‐3
2 Multi-Drop Enable 5 Alert Groups Travel Accumulator
1 Travel Accumulator Alert Enable
1‐2‐4‐4 2 Travel Accumulator
Integrator Saturation HC, AD, PD
1‐2‐3‐6‐5
3 Travel Accumulator Alert Point
1 Integrator Sat Hi Enable Alert Groups
2 Integrator Sat Lo Enable ODV 1 Failure Group Enable
3 Integral Limit 1‐2‐3‐7‐5 2 Valve Group Enable
4 Integral Dead Zone 3 Miscellaneous Group Enable I
7 8 9 10 11 12
iv
Fast Key Sequence for Instrument Level AC
Fast-Key Fast-Key
Sequence Sequence
Actuator Style 1-1-2-2-4 4-C 1-1-2-3-2-2 6-D
Pressure Proportional Gain
Analog Input Calibration 1-3-1 3-F 1-2-3-4-1-2 5-H
Analog Input Range Hi 1-2-2-2 4-E Pressure Range Hi 1-2-3-5-1 4-G
Analog Input Range Lo 1-2-2-3 4-E Pressure Range Lo 1-2-3-5-2 4-G
Analog Input Units 1-2-2-1 4-E 1-1-2-3-2-1 6-D
Pressure Tuning Set
1-1-2-3-4 4-D 1-2-3-4-1-1 6-G
Auto Travel Calibration 1-3-2 3-F 1-1-2-2-2 4-C
Pressure Units
1-1-1-3 3-C 1-2-2-4 4-E
Calibration Location 1-3-5 3-G Protection Hot Key-2 1-B
Date 1-2-1-4 3-D 1-1-1-2 3-B
Descriptor 1-2-1-3 3-D Relay Adjust 1-1-2-3-3 4-D
Device Description Revision 2-2 2-F 1-3-6 3-G
Device Identification 2-1-6 3-H Relay Type 1-2-4 3-E
Device Revision 2-1-2 3-G Restore Factory Settings 1-3-4 3-F
Feedback Connection 1-1-2-2-5 4-C Setup Wizard 1-1-1-1 3-D
Firmware Revision 2-1-3 3-G Travel Integral Gain 1-2-3-2-3 6-F
Hardware Revision 2-1-4 3-G Travel Integral Enable 1-2-3-2-2 6-F
HART Tag 1-2-1-1 3-D 1-1-2-3-1-4 6-C
Travel MLFB Gain
HART Universal Revision 2-1-1 3-G 1-2-3-2-1-4 6-E
Input Characterization 1-2-3-6 4-F 1-1-2-2-1 4-C
Travel / Pressure Select
Instrument Level 2-1-5 3-H 1-2-3-1 4-F
Hot Key-1 1-B 1-1-2-3-1-2 6-C
Instrument Mode Travel Proportional Gain
1-1-2-1 3-C 1-2-3-2-1-2 6-E
Instrument Serial Number 1-2-1-6 3-D Travel Sensor Adjust 1-3-7 3-G
Integral Dead Zone 1-2-3-3-1 6-F Travel Sensor Motion 1-1-2-2-6 4-C
Integral Limit 1-2-3-3-2 6-F 1-1-2-3-1-1 6-C
Travel Tuning Set
Manual Travel Calibration 1-3-3 3-F 1-2-3-2-1-1 6-E
Maximum Supply Pressure 1-1-2-2-3 4-C 1-1-2-3-1-3 6-C
Travel Velocity Gain
Message 1-2-1-2 3-D 1-2-3-2-1-3 6-E
Polling Address 1-2-1-7 3-E Valve Serial Number 1-2-1-5 3-D
Pressure Integral Control Enable 1-2-3-4-2 6-G Valve Style 1-1-2-2-7 4-C
Pressure Integral Gain 1-2-3-4-3 6-G Zero Power Condition 1-1-2-2-8 4-C
1-1-2-3-2-3 6-D
Pressure MLFB Gain
1-2-3-4-1-3 5-H
1. Coordinates are to help locate the item on the menu tree on the facing page.
v
Field Communicator Menu Tree for A
Instrument Level AC
Hot Key
1 Instrument Mode
2 Protection 1‐1‐1 B
Auto Setup
1 Setup Wizard
2 Relay Adjust 1‐1‐2‐2
Press & Actuator
3 Auto Travel Calib
1 Tvl/Press Select
2 Pressure Units
1‐1 1‐1‐2 3 Max Supply Press
Basic Setup Manual Setup 1‐1‐2‐3‐1
4 Actuator Style Tvl Tuning Set
1 Auto Setup 1 Instrument Mode 5 Feedback Conn
1 Tvl Tuning Set
2 Manual Setup 2 Press & Actuator 6 Tvl Sensor Motion
2 Tvl Prop Gain
C
3 Tuning & Calib 7 Valve Style
8 Zero Pwr Cond 3 Tvl Velocity Gain
4 Tvl MLFB Gain
1‐1‐2‐3
Tuning & Calib
1‐2‐1
1 Tvl Tuning Set 1‐1‐2‐3‐2
General 2 Press Tuning Set Press Tuning Set
3 Relay Adjust 1 Press Tuning Set
1 HART Tag 4 Auto Travel Calib
2 Message 2 Press Prop Gain D
3 Descriptor 3 Press MLFB Gain
4 Date
5 Valve Serial Num
6 Inst Serial Num
1 7 Polling Address 1‐2‐2
Setup Measured Var
1 Basic Setup 1 Analog In Units 1‐2‐3‐2‐1

1‐2 2 Input Range Hi Tvl Tuning Set
2 Detailed Setup Detailed Setup
3 Input Range Lo
3 Calibrate
1 General 4 Pressure Units 1 Tvl Tuning Set E
2 Measured Var 2 Tvl Prop Gain
3 Response Control 3 Tvl Velocity Gain
4 Relay Type 1‐2‐3 4 Tvl MLFB Gain
Response Control
Online 1 Tvl/Press Select
1‐2‐3‐2
2 Tvl Tuning Tvl Tuning
1 Setup 3 Integral Settings
2 Display 4 Press Tuning 1 Tvl Tuning Set
1‐3
Calibrate 5 Pressure Control 2 Tvl Integ Enab
2
Display 1 Analog In Calib
6 Input Char 3 Tvl Integ Gain F
1‐2‐3‐3
1 Device Information 2 Auto Travel Calib Integral Settings
2 DD Revision 3 Man Travel Calib
4 Restore Factory Settings 1 Integ DeadZ
5 Calib Loc 2 Integ Limit
1-2-3-5
6 Relay Adjust Pressure Control
7 Tvl Sensor Adjust 1‐2‐3‐4 Press Tuning
1 Press Range Hi
2‐1 1 Press Tuning Set
Device Information 2 Press Range Lo
2 Press Integ Enab
1 HART Univ Rev 3 Press Integ Gain G
2 Device Rev
3 Firmware Rev 1‐2‐3‐4‐1
4 Hardware Rev Press Tuning Set
HART Application
5 Inst Level
1 Press Tuning Set
1 Offline 6 Device ID
2 Press Prop Gain
2 Online
1 3 Press MLFB Gain
3 Utility
4 HART Diagnostics
H
Notes:
1‐1‐1 indicates fast‐key sequence to reach menu

1 This menu is available by pressing the left
arrow key from the previous menu.
1 2 3 4 5 6
vi
THE FIELDVUE DVC6000 DIGITAL VALVE CONTROLLERS IS A CORE COMPONENT OF THE PLANTWEBt
DIGITAL PLANT ARCHITECTURE. THE DIGITAL VALVE CONTROLLER POWERS PLANTWEB BY
CAPTURING AND DELIVERING VALVE DIAGNOSTIC DATA. COUPLED WITH VALVELINKt SOFTWARE,
THE DVC6000 PROVIDES USERS WITH AN ACCURATE PICTURE OF VALVE PERFORMANCE, INCLUDING
ACTUAL STEM POSITION, INSTRUMENT INPUT SIGNAL AND PNEUMATIC PRESSURE TO THE
ACTUATOR. USING THIS INFORMATION, THE DIGITAL VALVE CONTROLLER DIAGNOSES NOT ONLY
ITSELF, BUT ALSO THE VALVE AND ACTUATOR TO WHICH IT IS MOUNTED.
FIELDVUE DVC6000 Digital Valve Controller
vii
Introduction and Specifications
Section 1 Introduction 1
Scope of Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Conventions Used in this Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
Related Documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
Educational Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
September 2013 1-1

Table 1-1. Instrument Level Capabilities
DIAGNOSTIC LEVEL(1)
CAPABILITY
AC HC AD PD ODV
Auto Calibration X X X X X
Custom Characterization X X X X X
Burst Communication X X X X
1 Alerts
Step Response, Drive Signal Test & Dynamic Error Band
X X
X
X
X
X
X
Advanced Diagnostics (Valve Signature) X X X
Performance Tuner X X X
Travel Control - Pressure Fallback X X X
Performance Diagnostics X X
Solenoid Valve Testing X X
Lead/Lag Input Filter(2) X
1. See page 6-8 for additional diagnostic level information.
2. Refer to brochure part # D351146X012/D351146X412 for information on Fisher optimized digital valves for compressor antisurge applications.
Scope of Manual
This instruction manual includes specifications,
installation, operating, and maintenance information
for device revision 1, firmware revision 2−6 and device
revision 2, firmware 7, 9, 10, and 11 digital valve
controllers, instrument level AC, HC, AD, PD, and
ODV.
This instruction manual describes using the 475 Field
Communicator with device description revision 8 to
setup and calibrate the instrument. You can also use
Fisher ValveLink software version 7.3 or higher to
setup, calibrate, and diagnose the valve and
instrument. For information on using ValveLink
software with the instrument refer to ValveLink
software help or documentation.
Do not install, operate, or maintain a DVC6000 digital
valve controller without being fully trained and qualified
in valve, actuator, and accessory installation,
operation, and maintenance. To avoid personal
injury or property damage, it is important to W7957 / IL
carefully read, understand, and follow all of the
contents of this manual, including all safety Figure 1-1. Sliding-Stem Control Valve with
cautions and warnings. If you have any questions FIELDVUE DVC6010 Digital Valve Controller
about these instructions, contact your Emerson
Process Management sales office before proceeding.
Some of the procedures also contain the sequence of

numeric keys required to display the desired Field
Conventions Used in this Manual Communicator menu. For example, to access the
Setup Wizard, from the Online menu, press 1 (selects
Configure) followed by a second 1 (selects Basic
Setup) followed by a third 1 (selects Setup Wizard).
Procedures that require the use of the 475 Field
The key sequence in the procedure heading is shown
Communicator have the Field Communicator symbol
as (1-1-1). The path required to accomplish various
in the heading.
tasks, the sequence of steps through the Field
Communicator menus, is also presented in textual
Procedures that are accessible with the Hot Key format. Menu selections are shown in italics, e.g.,
on the Field Communicator will also have the Hot Key Calibrate. An overview of the Field Communicator
symbol in the heading. menu trees are shown at the beginning of this manual.
1-2 September 2013

with the DVC6000 digital valve controller. You can
obtain general information concerning software
revision level, messages, tag, descriptor, and date.
Diagnostic information is available to aid you when
troubleshooting. Input and output configuration
parameters can be set, and the digital valve controller
can be calibrated. Refer to table 1-1 for details on the
capabilities of each diagnostic tier. 1
Using the HART protocol, information from the field
can be integrated into control systems or be received
on a single loop basis.
DVC6000 digital valve controllers are designed to
directly replace standard pneumatic and
electro-pneumatic valve mounted positioners.
W9418
Figure 1-2. Rotary Control Valve with

Specifications
Note WARNING
475 Field Communicator menu Refer to table 1-2 for specifications.
sequences used in this manual are for Incorrect configuration of a
instrument level HC, AD, PD, and ODV, positioning instrument could result in
firmware 7 and above. Refer to the AC the malfunction of the product,
menu tree at the beginning of this property damage or personal injury.
manual for AC menu sequences.
These menu sequences are also
applicable to the 375 Field Specifications for DVC6000 digital valve controllers
Communicator. are shown in table 1-2. Specifications for the Field
Communicator can be found in the product manual for
the Field Communicator.
Description
DVC6000 digital valve controllers (figures 1-1 and 1-2)
are communicating, microprocessor-based Related Documents
current-to-pneumatic instruments. In addition to the Other documents containing information related to
normal function of converting an input current signal to DVC6000 digital valve controllers include:
a pneumatic output pressure, the DVC6000 digital
valve controller, using the HART communications
Bulletin 62.1:DVC6000—Fisher FIELDVUE
protocol, gives easy access to information critical to
DVC6000 Digital Valve Controllers (D102758X012)
process operation. You can gain information from the
principal component of the process, the control valve
itself, using the Field Communicator at the valve, or at Bulletin 62.1:DVC6000(S1)—Fisher FIELDVUE
a field junction box, or by using a personal computer DVC6000 Digital Valve Controller Dimensions
or operator’s console within the control room. (D103308X012)
Using a personal computer and ValveLink software or
AMS Suite: Intelligent Device Manager, or a Field Fisher FIELDVUE DVC6000 Digital Valve
Communicator, you can perform several operations Controllers Quick Start Guide (D102762X012)
September 2013 1-3

FIELDVUE Digital Valve Controller Split Implementation of Lock-in-Last Strategy −
Ranging − Supplement to HART Communicating Supplement to Fisher FIELDVUE DVC6000 and
Fisher FIELDVUE Digital Valve Controller Instruction DVC6200 Digital Valve Controllers Instruction Manual
Manuals (D103262X012) (D103261X012)
Using FIELDVUE Instruments with the Smart

HART Loop Interface and Monitor (HIM) − Fisher HF340 Filter Instruction Manual
1 Supplement to HART Communicating Fisher (D102796X012)
FIELDVUE Instrument Instruction Manuals
(D103263X012) ValveLink software help or documentation
Using FIELDVUE Instruments with the Smart
Wireless THUM Adapter and a HART Interface Field Communicator User’s Manual
Module (HIM) − Supplement to HART Communicating
Fisher FIELDVUE Instrument Instruction Manuals All documents are available from your Emerson
Process Management sales office. Also visit our
Audio Monitor for HART Communications − website at www.FIELDVUE.com.
Supplement to HART Communicating Fisher
FIELDVUE Instrument Instruction Manuals
(D103265X012)
HART Field Device Specification − Supplement

to Fisher FIELDVUE DVC6000 Digital Valve Controller Educational Services
Instruction Manual (D103649X012) For information on available courses for DVC6000
digital valve controllers, as well as a variety of other
Using the HART Tri-Loop HART -to-Analog products, contact:
Signal Converter with FIELDVUE Digital Valve
Controllers − Supplement to HART Communicating Emerson Process Management
Fisher FIELDVUE Instrument Instruction Manuals Educational Services, Registration
(D103267X012) P.O. Box 190; 301 S. 1st Ave.
Marshalltown, IA 50158-2823
Hot Swap Procedure − Supplement to HART Phone: 800-338-8158 or
Communicating Fisher FIELDVUE DVC5000 Phone: 641-754-3771
(Obsolete Product) and DVC6000 Digital Valve FAX: 641-754-3431
Controllers Instruction Manuals (D103264X012) e-mail: [email protected]
1-4 September 2013

Table 1-2. Specifications
Available Configurations Maximum: 10 bar (145 psig) or maximum pressure

rating of the actuator, whichever is lower
DVC6010: Sliding-stem applications
DVC6020: Rotary and long-stroke sliding-stem Medium: Air or Natural Gas
applications [over 102 mm (4 inch) travel]
DVC6030: Quarter-turn rotary applications Air: Supply pressure must be clean, dry air that
meets the requirements of ISA Standard 7.0.01.
1
Remote-Mounted Instrument(1) Natural Gas: Natural gas must be clean, dry,
DVC6005: Base unit for 2 inch pipestand or wall oil-free, and noncorrosive. H2S content should not
mounting exceed 20 ppm.
DVC6015: Feedback unit for sliding-stem
applications A maximum 40 micrometer particle size in the air
DVC6025: Feedback unit for rotary or long-stroke system is acceptable. Further filtration down to 5
sliding-stem applications micrometer particle size is recommended. Lubricant
DVC6035: Feedback unit for quarter-turn rotary content is not to exceed 1 ppm weight (w/w) or
applications volume (v/v) basis. Condensation in the air supply
should be minimized
DVC6000 digital valve controllers can be mounted
on Fisher and other manufacturers rotary and Steady-State Air Consumption(3)(4)
sliding-stem actuators. Standard Relay:
At 1.4 bar (20 psig) supply pressure: Less than 0.38
normal m3/hr (14 scfh)
Input Signal At 5.5 bar (80 psig) supply pressure: Less than 1.3
Point-to-Point: normal m3/hr (49 scfh)
Analog Input Signal: 4-20 mA DC, nominal
Minimum Voltage Available at instrument terminals Low Bleed Relay:
must be 10.5 volts DC for analog control, 11 volts At 1.4 bar (20 psig) supply pressure: Average value
DC for HART communication 0.056 normal m3/hr (2.1 scfh)
Minimum Control Current: 4.0 mA At 5.5 bar (80 psig) supply pressure: Average value
Minimum Current w/o Microprocessor Restart: 0.184 normal m3/hr (6.9 scfh)
3.5 mA
Maximum Voltage: 30 volts DC Maximum Output Capacity(3)(4)
Overcurrent Protection: Input circuitry limits current At 1.4 bar (20 psig) supply pressure: 10.0 normal
to prevent internal damage. m3/hr (375 scfh)
Reverse Polarity Protection: No damage occurs At 5.5 bar (80 psig) supply pressure: 29.5 normal
from reversal of loop current. m3/hr (1100 scfh)
Multi-drop:
Instrument Power: 11-30 volts DC at approximately
Independent Linearity(5)
8 mA
Reverse Polarity Protection: No damage occurs ±0.50% of output span
from reversal of loop current.
Electromagnetic Compatibility
Output Signal
Meets EN 61326-1 (First Edition)
Pneumatic signal as required by the actuator, up to Immunity—Industrial locations per Table 2 of the
full supply pressure. EN 61326-1 standard. Performance is shown
Minimum Span: 0.4 bar (6 psig) in table 1-3 below.
Maximum Span: 9.5 bar (140 psig) Emissions—Class A
Action: Double, Single direct, and Single reverse ISM equipment rating: Group 1, Class A
Lightning and Surge Protection—The degree of
Supply Pressure(2)
immunity to lightning is specified as Surge immunity
Recommended: 0.3 bar (5 psi) higher than in table 1-3. For additional surge protection
maximum actuator requirements, up to maximum commercially available transient protection devices
supply pressure can be used.
-continued-
September 2013 1-5

Table 1-2. Specifications (continued)
Vibration Testing Method Electrical Housing:

Tested per ANSI/ISA-S75.13.01 Section 5.3.5. A CSA—Type 4X, IP66
resonant frequency search is performed on all three FM—Type 4X, IP66
axes. The instrument is subjected to the ISA
ATEX—IP66
1 specified 1/2 hour endurance test at each major
resonance, plus an additional two million cycles. IECEx—IP66
Other Classifications/Certifications
Input Impedance
Gas Certified, Single Seal Device— CSA, FM,
The input impedance of the DVC6000 active ATEX, and IECEx
electronic circuit is not purely resistive. For
comparison to resistive load specifications, an FSETAN— Federal Service of Technological,
equivalent impedance of 550 ohms may be used. Ecological and Nuclear Inspectorate (Russia)
This value corresponds to 11V @ 20 mA. GOST -R— Russian GOST-R
INMETRO— National Institute of Metrology,
Quality, and Technology (Brazil)
Operating Ambient Temperature Limits(2)(6)
KGS— Korea Gas Safety Corporation
-40 to 85C (-40 to 185F) for most approved (South Korea)
valve-mounted instruments
-60 to 125C (-76 to 257F) for remote-mounted KISCO— Korea Industrial Safety Corporation
feedback unit. (South Korea)
-52 to 85C (-62 to 185F) for valve-mounted NEPSI— National Supervision and Inspection
instruments utilizing the Extreme Temperature Centre for Explosion Protection and Safety of
option (fluorosilicone elastomers) Instrumentation (China)
PESO CCOE— Petroleum and Explosives Safety
Organisation − Chief Controller of Explosives (India)
Humidity Limits
TIIS— Technology Institution of Industrial Safety
0 to 100% condensing relative humidity with (Japan)
minimal zero or span shifts Contact your Emerson Process Management sales
office for classification/certification specific
Electrical Classification information
Hazardous Area: IEC 61010 Compliance Requirements
(Valve-Mounted Instruments only)
CSA—Intrinsically Safe, Explosion-proof,
Division 2, Dust Ignition-proof Power Source: The loop current must be derived
from a Separated Extra-Low Voltage (SELV) power
FM—Intrinsically Safe, Explosion-proof, source.
Non-incendive, Dust Ignition-proof
Environmental Conditions: Installation Category I
ATEX—Intrinsically Safe, Flameproof, Type n
IECEx—Intrinsically Safe, Flameproof, Type n Connections
Refer to tables 1-4, 1-5, 1-6, and 1-7, Hazardous Supply Pressure: 1/4 NPT internal and integral
Areas Classifications and Special Instructions for pad for mounting 67CFR regulator
“Safe Use” and Installation in Hazardous Locations Output Pressure: 1/4 NPT internal
in section 2, and Appendix B. Tubing: 3/8-inch, recommended
Vent: 3/8 NPT internal
Pollution Degree 2, Overvoltage Category III per Electrical: 1/2 NPT internal conduit connection,
ANSI/ISA-82.02.01 (IEC 61010-1 Mod). M20 adapter optional
-continued-
1-6 September 2013

Table 1-2. Specifications (continued)
Stem/Shaft Travel Cover: Thermoplastic polyester

Linear Actuators with rated travel between 6.35 mm Elastomers: Nitrile (standard)
(0.25 inch) and 606 mm (23.375 inches)
Rotary Actuators with rated travel between 50 Options

degrees and 180 degrees Supply and output pressure gauges or Tire
1
Mounting (7) valves, Integral mounted filter regulator,
Stainless steel housing, module base and
Designed for direct actuator mounting or remote terminal box Low bleed relay, Inline 10
pipestand or wall mounting. Mounting the micrometer air filter Safety Instrumented System
instrument vertically, with the vent at the bottom of (SIS) Solutions Safety Related Nuclear
the assembly, or horizontally, with the vent pointing Applications Natural Gas Certified, Single Seal
down, is recommended to allow drainage of Device Feedback Assembly PTFE Sleeve
moisture that may be introduced via the instrument Protective Kit for aluminum units in saltwater or
air supply. particulate environments
Weight
Valve-Mounted Instruments Declaration of SEP
Aluminum: 3.5 kg (7.7 lbs)
Stainless Steel: 7.7 kg (17 lbs) Fisher Controls International LLC declares this
product to be in compliance with Article 3 paragraph
Remote-Mounted Instruments 3 of the Pressure Equipment Directive (PED) 97 /
DVC6005 Base Unit: 4.1 kg (9 lbs) 23 / EC. It was designed and manufactured in
DVC6015 Feedback Unit: 1.3 kg (2.9 lbs) accordance with Sound Engineering Practice (SEP)
DVC6025 Feedback Unit: 1.4 kg (3.1 lbs) and cannot bear the CE marking related to PED
DVC6035 Feedback Unit: 0.9 kg (2.0 lbs) compliance.
Construction Materials However, the product may bear the CE marking to

Housing, module base and terminal box: indicate compliance with other applicable European
A03600 low copper aluminum alloy Community Directives.
NOTE: Specialized instrument terms are defined in ISA Standard 51.1 - Process Instrument Terminology.
1. 3-conductor shielded cable, 22 AWG minimum wire size, is required for connection between base unit and feedback unit. Pneumatic tubing between base unit output connection and actuator
has been tested to 91 meters (300 feet). At 15 meters (50 feet) there was no performance degradation. At 91 meters there was minimal pneumatic lag.
2. The pressure/temperature limits in this document and any applicable code or standard should not be exceeded.
3. Values at 1.4 bar (20 psig) based on a single-acting direct relay; values at 5.5 bar (80 psig) based on double-acting relay.
4. Normal m3/hour - Normal cubic meters per hour at 0C and 1.01325 bar, absolute. Scfh - Standard cubic feet per hour at 60F and 14.7 psia
5. Typical Value. Not applicable for travels less than 19 mm (0.75 inch) or for shaft rotation less than 60 degrees. Also, not applicable to DVC6020 digital valve controllers in long-stroke
applications.
6. Temperature limits vary based on hazardous area approval.
7. Do not use the DVC6010S or DVC6020S in high vibration service where the mounting bracket uses standoffs (spacers) to mount to the actuator. Due to NAMUR mounting limitations, do
not use the DVC6030S in high vibration service.
Table 1-3. EMC Summary Results—Immunity

Performance Criteria(1)
Port Phenomenon Basic Standard Test Level Point-to- Multi-drop
Point Mode Mode
Electrostatic discharge 4 kV contact
IEC 61000-4-2 A(2) A
(ESD) 8 kV air
80 to 1000 MHz @ 10V/m with 1 kHz AM at 80%
Enclosure Radiated EM field IEC 61000-4-3 1400 to 2000 MHz @ 3V/m with 1 kHz AM at 80% A A
2000 to 2700 MHz @ 1V/m with 1 kHz AM at 80%
Rated power frequency
IEC 61000-4-8 30 A/m at 50/60 Hz A A
magnetic field
Burst IEC 61000-4-4 1 kV A(2) A
I/O signal/control Surge IEC 61000-4-5 1 kV (line to ground only, each) B B
Conducted RF IEC 61000-4-6 150 kHz to 80 MHz at 3 Vrms A A
Performance Criteria:+/− 1% effect.
1. A = No degradation during testing. B = Temporary degradation during testing, but is self-recovering.
2. Excluding auxiliary switch function, which meets Performance Criteria B.
September 2013 1-7

Table 1-4. Hazardous Area Classifications—CSA (Canada)
Certification Enclosure
Type Certification Obtained Entity Rating Temperature Code
Body Rating
Ex ia Intrinsically Safe Vmax = 30 VDC
Class I,II,III Division 1 GP A,B,C,D,E, Imax = 226 mA
T5(Tamb ≤ 80C) Type 4X, IP66
F,G per drawing GE42818 Ci = 5 nF
T6(Tamb ≤ 75C) Single Seal Device
Natural Gas Approved Li = 0.55 mH
1 DVC60x0 Explosion-proof
Pi = 1.4 W

DVC60x0S Class I Division 1 GP B,C,D −−−
(x = 1,2,3) Natural Gas Approved
Class I Division 2 GP A,B,C,D
Class II Division 1 GP E,F,G
Class II Division 2 GP F,G −−−
Class III
Natural Gas Approved
Ex ia Intrinsically Safe Vmax = 30 VDC Voc = 30 VDC
Class I,II,III Division 1 GP A,B,C,D, Imax = 226 mA Isc = 12 mA
E,F,G per drawing GE42818 Ci = 5 nF Ca = 66 nF
Natural Gas Approved Li = 0.55 mH La = 246 mH
Pi = 1.4 W Po = 86 mW
Explosion-proof
CSA T5(Tamb ≤ 80C) Type 4X, IP66
DVC6005 Class I Division 1 GP B,C,D −−−
Class II Division 2 GP F,G −−−
Class III
Vmax = 30 VDC
Ex ia Intrinsically Safe Imax = 100 mA T4(Tamb ≤ 125C)
Class I,II,III Division 1 GP A,B,C,D, Ci = 0 uF T5(Tamb ≤ 95C) Type 4X, IP66
E,F,G per drawing GE42818 Li = 0 mH T6(Tamb ≤ 80C)
Pmax = 160 mW
DVC60x5 T4(Tamb ≤ 125C)
Explosion-proof
(x = 1,2,3) −−− T5(Tamb ≤ 95C) Type 4X, IP66
Class I Division 1 GP B,C,D
T6(Tamb ≤ 80C)
T4(Tamb ≤ 125C)
−−− T5(Tamb ≤ 95C) Type 4X, IP66
Class II Division 2 GP F,G
T6(Tamb ≤ 80C)
Class III
1-8 September 2013

Table 1-5. Hazardous Area Classifications—FM (United States)
Certification Enclosure
Type Certification Obtained Entity Rating Temperature Code
Body Rating
IS Intrinsically Safe Vmax = 30 VDC
Class I,II,III Division 1 GP A,B,C,D, Imax = 226 mA
E,F,G per drawing GE42819 Ci = 5 nF
DVC60x0
XP Explosion-proof
Pi = 1.4 W
1
Class I Division 1 GP B,C,D
DVC60x0S
NI Non-incendive
(x = 1,2,3)
DIP Dust Ignition-proof −−−
Class II, III Division 1 GP E,F,G
S Suitable for Use
Class II, III Division 2 GP F,G
IS Intrinsically Safe Vmax = 30 VDC Voc = 9.6 VDC
Class I,II,III Division 1 GP A,B,C,D,E, Imax = 226 mA Isc = 3.5 mA
F,G per drawing GE42819 Ci = 5 nF Ca = 3.6 uF
Pi = 1.4 W Po = 8.4 mW
XP Explosion-proof
FM Class I Division 1 GP B,C,D
DVC6005
NI Non-incendive
DIP Dust Ignition-proof −−−
S Suitable for Use
Vmax = 30 VDC
IS Intrinsically Safe Imax = 100 mA T4(Tamb ≤ 125C)
Class I,II,III Division 1 GP A,B,C,D, Ci = 0 uF T5(Tamb ≤ 95C) Type 4X, IP66
E,F,G per drawing GE42819 Li = 0 mH T6(Tamb ≤ 80C)
Pi = 160 mW
XP Explosion-proof
DVC60x5
(x = 1,2,3)
NI Non-incendive
T4(Tamb ≤ 125C)
−−− T5(Tamb ≤ 95C) Type 4X, IP66
DIP Dust Ignition-proof
T6(Tamb ≤ 80C)
S Suitable for Use
September 2013 1-9

Table 1-6. Hazardous Area Classifications—ATEX
Enclosure
Certificate Type Certification Obtained Entity Rating Temperature Code
Rating
II 1 G & D
Intrinsically Safe
Gas Ui = 30 VDC
Ex ia IIC T5/T6 Ga Ii = 226 mA
T5(Tamb ≤ 80C) IP66
1 Dust
Ex ia IIIC T85C (Ta ≤ +73C), T92C
Ci = 5 nF
Li = 0.55 mH
(Ta ≤ +80C) Da Pi = 1.4 W
Per drawing GE60771
DVC60x0 Natural Gas Approved
DVC60x0S
(x = 1,2,3) II 2 G
Flameproof
Gas −−−
Ex d IIC T5/T6 Gb
II 3 G
Type n T5(Tamb ≤ 80C) IP66
−−−
Gas T6(Tamb ≤ 75C) Single Seal Device
Ex nC IIC T5/T6 Gc
II 1 G & D
Intrinsically Safe
Gas Ui = 30 VDC Uo = 9.6 VDC
Ex ia IIC T5/T6 Ga Ii = 226 mA Io = 3.5 mA
Dust Ci = 5 nF Co = 3.6 uF
Ex ia IIIC T85C (Ta ≤ +76C), T89C Li = 0.55 mH Lo = 100 mH
Ta ≤ +80C) Da Pi = 1.4 W Po = 8.4 mW
Per drawing GE60771
ATEX Natural Gas Approved
DVC6005
II 2 G
Flameproof
Gas −−−
Ex d IIC T5/T6 Gb
II 3 G
Type n T5(Tamb ≤ 80C) IP66
−−−
Gas T6(Tamb ≤ 75C) Single Seal Device
Ex nC IIC T5/T6 Gc
II 1 G & D
Intrinsically Safe
Gas Ui = 30 VDC
Ex ia IIC T4/T5/T6 Ga Ii = 100 mA T4(Tamb ≤ 125C)
Dust Ci = 0 uF T5(Tamb ≤ 95C) IP66
Ex ia IIIC T85C (Tamb ≤ +64C) T100C Li = 0 mH T6(Tamb ≤ 80C)
(Tamb ≤ +79C), T135C (Tamb ≤ +114C) Pi = 160 mW
T146C (Tamb ≤ +125C) Da
DVC60x5 Per drawing GE60771
(x = 1,2,3) II 2 G
T4(Tamb ≤ 125C)
Flameproof
−−− T5(Tamb ≤ 95C) IP66
Gas
T6(Tamb ≤ 80C)
Ex d IIC T4/T5/T6 Gb
II 3 G
T4(Tamb ≤ 125C)
Type n
−−− T5(Tamb ≤ 95C) IP66
Gas
T6(Tamb ≤ 80C)
Ex nA IIC T4/T5/T6 Gc
1-10 September 2013

Table 1-7. Hazardous Area Classifications—IECEx
Enclosure
Certificate Type Certification Obtained Entity Rating Temperature Code
Rating
Intrinsically Safe Ui = 30 VDC
Gas Ii = 226 mA
Ex ia IIC T5/T6 per drawing GE42990 Ci = 5 nF
DVC60x0 Flameproof
Pi = 1.4 W
1
DVC60x0S Gas T5(Tamb ≤ 80C) IP66
−−−
(x = 1,2,3) Ex d IIC T5/T6 T6(Tamb ≤ 75C) Single Seal Device
Type n
Gas T5(Tamb ≤ 80C) IP66
−−−
Ex nC IIC T5/T6 T6(Tamb ≤ 75C) Single Seal Device
Intrinsically Safe Ui = 30 VDC Uo = 9.6 VDC
Gas Ii = 226 mA Io = 3.5 mA
Ex ia IIC T5/T6 per drawing GE42990 Ci = 5 nF Ca = 3.6 uF
Pi = 1.4 W Po = 8.4 mW
IECEx Flameproof
DVC6005 Gas T5(Tamb ≤ 80C) IP66
−−−
Ex d IIC T5/T6 T6(Tamb ≤ 75C) Single Seal Device
Type n
Gas T5(Tamb ≤ 80C) IP66
−−−
Ex nC IIC T5/T6 T6(Tamb ≤ 75C) Single Seal Device
Intrinsically Safe Ui = 30 VDC
Gas Ii = 100 mA T4(Tamb ≤ 125C)
Ex ia IIC T4/T5/T6 per drawing GE42990 Ci = 0 uF T5(Tamb ≤ 95C) IP66
Li = 0 mH T6(Tamb ≤ 80C)
Pi = 160 mW
DVC60x5
Flameproof T4(Tamb ≤ 125C)
(x = 1,2,3)
Gas −−− T5(Tamb ≤ 95C) IP66
Ex d IIC T4/T5/T6 T6(Tamb ≤ 80C)
Type n T4(Tamb ≤ 125C)
Gas −−− T5(Tamb ≤ 95C) IP66
Ex nA IIC T4/T5/T6 T6(Tamb ≤ 80C)
September 2013 1-11

1-12 September 2013

Installation
2-2
Section 2 Installation
Hazardous Area Classifications and Special Instructions for “Safe Use” and
Installations in Hazardous Areas 2
CSA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
FM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
ATEX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
IECEx . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
Mounting Guidelines
DVC6010 on Sliding-Stem Actuators (up to 4 inches travel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
DVC6020 on Long-Stroke
Sliding-Stem Actuators (4 to 24 inches travel) and Rotary Actuators . . . . . . . 2-8
DVC6030 on Quarter-Turn Actuators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
DVC6005 Base Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
Wall Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
Pipestand Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
DVC6015 on Sliding-Stem Actuators (up to 4 inches travel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
DVC6025 on Long-Stroke Sliding-Stem Actuators
(4 to 24 inches travel) and Rotary Actuators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15
DVC6035 on Quarter-Turn Actuators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16
67CFR Filter Regulator
Integral-Mounted Regulator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18
Yoke-Mounted Regulator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18
Casing-Mounted Regulator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18
Pneumatic Connections
Supply Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19
Output Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21
Single-Acting Actuators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21
Double-Acting Actuators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21
Special Construction to Support Solenoid Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22
Vent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22
Electrical Connections
4-20 mA Loop Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-24
Remote Travel Sensor Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-25
Test Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-29
September 2013 2-1

Communication Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-29
Wiring Practices
Control System Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-30
HART Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-30
Voltage Available . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-31
Compliance Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-32
2 Maximum Cable Capacitance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-33
Installation in Conjunction with a Rosemount

333 HART Tri-Loop HART-to-Analog
Signal Converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-33
2-2 September 2013

Installation
Installation WARNING
The DVC6000 can be used with either air or natural
gas as the supply medium. If using natural gas as the To avoid static discharge from the
pneumatic supply medium, natural gas will be used in plastic cover when flammable gases
the pneumatic output connections of the DVC6000 to or dust are present, do not rub or
any connected equipment. In normal operation the unit clean the cover with solvents. To do
will vent the supply medium into the surrounding so could result in a spark that may
atmosphere unless it is remotely vented. When using cause the flammable gases or dust to
natural gas as the supply medium, in a non-hazardous explode, resulting in personal injury
location in a confined area, remote venting of the unit or property damage. Clean with a mild 2
is required. Failure to do so could result in personal detergent and water only.
injury, property damage, and area re-classification. For
hazardous locations remote venting of the unit may be
required, depending upon the area classification, and
as specified by the requirements of local, regional, and
federal codes, rules and regulations. Failure to do so
when necessary could result in personal injury,
property damage, and area re-classification. WARNING
This unit vents the supply medium
into the surrounding atmosphere.
When installing this unit in a
non-hazardous (non-classified)
WARNING location in a confined area, with
natural gas as the supply medium,
Avoid personal injury or property
you must remotely vent this unit to a
damage from sudden release of
safe location. Failure to do so could
process pressure or bursting of parts.
result in personal injury or property
Before proceeding with any
damage from fire or explosion, and
Installation procedures:
area re-classification.
Always wear protective clothing,
gloves, and eyewear.
hazardous (classified) location remote
Personal injury or property venting of the unit may be required,
damage may result from fire or depending upon the area
explosion if natural gas is used as the classification, and as specified by the
supply medium and appropriate requirements of local, regional, and
preventive measures are not taken. federal codes, rules and regulations.
Preventive measures may include, but Failure to do so when necessary
are not limited to, one or more of the could result in personal injury or
following: Remote venting of the unit, property damage from fire or
re-evaluating the hazardous area explosion, and area re-classification.
classification, ensuring adequate
ventilation, and the removal of any Vent line piping should comply with
ignition sources. For information on local and regional codes and should
remote venting of this controller, refer be as short as possible with adequate
to page 2-22. inside diameter and few bends to
reduce case pressure buildup.
If installing this into an existing
application, also refer to the In addition to remote venting of the
WARNING at the beginning of the unit, ensure that all caps and covers
Maintenance section of this are correctly installed. Failure to do
instruction manual. so could result in personal injury or
property damage from fire or
Check with your process or
explosion, and area re-classification.
safety engineer for any additional
measures that must be taken to
protect against process media.
September 2013 2-3

Hazardous Area Classifications and FM
Special Instructions for “Safe Use” Special Conditions of Safe Use
and Installations in Hazardous Intrinsically Safe, Explosion-proof, Non-incendive,
Dust Ignition-proof
Locations
1. When product is used with natural gas as the
Certain nameplates may carry more than one pneumatic medium, the maximum working pressure of
approval, and each approval may have unique the natural gas supply shall be limited to 145 psi.
installation/wiring requirements and/or conditions of
safe use. These special instructions for “safe use” are 2. When product is used with natural gas as the
2 in addition to, and may override, the standard pneumatic medium the product shall not be permitted
installation procedures. Special instructions are listed in a Class I, Division 2, Group A, B, C, D location
by approval. without the proper venting installation as per the
manufacturer’s instruction manual.
3. The apparatus enclosure contains aluminum and is
considered to constitute a potential risk of ignition by
impact or friction. Care must be taken into account
Note during installation and use to prevent impact or friction.
This information supplements the 4. Part of the enclosure is constructed from plastic.
nameplate markings affixed to the To prevent the risk of electrostatic sparking the plastic
product. surface should only be cleaned with a damp cloth.
Always refer to the nameplate itself to Refer to table 1-5 for approval information, figures B-6
identify the appropriate certification. and B-7 for FM loop schematics, and figures B-2 and
Contact your Emerson Process B-9 for typical FM nameplates.
Management sales office for
approval/certification information not ATEX
listed here.
Special Conditions for Safe Use
Approval information is for both
aluminum and stainless steel Intrinsically Safe
constructions.
1. This apparatus can only be connected to an
intrinsically safe certified equipment and this
combination must be compatible as regards the
intrinsically safe rules.
WARNING 2. The electrical parameters of this equipment must
not exceed any following values:
Failure to follow these conditions of Uo ≤ 30 V; Io ≤ 226 mA; Po ≤ 1.4 W
“safe use” could result in personal
injury or property damage from fire or 3. Operating ambient temperature: −52C or −40C
explosion, or area re-classification. to + 80C
4. For the model with aluminum body: the apparatus
must not be submitted to frictions or mechanical
impacts.
CSA 5. Covered by standards EN 60079-0 (2009),
Intrinsically Safe, Explosion-proof, Division 2, EN 60079-11 (2012), EN 60079-26 (2007).
Dust Ignition-proof
6. Install per drawing GE60771.
No special conditions for safe use.
Refer to table 1-6 for additional approval information,
Refer to table 1-4 for approval information, figures B-1 figure B-10, B-12, and B-13 for ATEX loop schematics
and B-3 for CSA loop schematics, and figures B-2 and and figure B-11 for typical ATEX Intrinsic Safety
B-5 for typical CSA nameplates. nameplates.
2-4 September 2013

Installation
Flameproof IECEx
Operating ambient temperature: −52C or −40C to Conditions of Certification
+ 85C
Intrinsically Safe, Type n, Flameproof
Refer to table 1-6 for additional approval information, Ex ia / Ex nC / Ex nA/ Ex d
and figure B-14 for typical ATEX Flameproof
nameplates. 1. Warning: Electrostatic charge hazard. Do not rub
or clean with solvents. To do so could result in an
Type n explosion.
Ex nC / Ex nA, Ex d 2
Operating ambient temperature: −52C or −40C to
+ 80C 2. Do not open while energized.
Refer to table 1-7 for additional approval information,
Refer to table 1-6 for additional approval information, figures B-16 and B-17 for IECEx loop schematics, and
and figure B-15 for typical ATEX Type n nameplates. figures B-19 and B-20 for typical IECEx nameplates.
September 2013 2-5

CAP SCREW, FLANGED
MACHINE SCREW
SHIELD
ADJUSTMENT ARM
CONNECTOR ARM
CAP SCREW
PLAIN WASHER
29B1674-A / DOC
Figure 2-1. FIELDVUE DVC6010 Digital Valve Controller Mounted on Sliding-Stem Actuator with up to 2 Inches Travel
Mounting Guidelines
Note
DVC6010 on Sliding-Stem Actuators Up
to 102 mm (4 Inches) of Travel Do not use the stainless steel
DVC6010S in high vibration service
If ordered as part of a control valve assembly, the where the mounting bracket uses
factory mounts the digital valve controller on the standoffs (spacers) to mount to the
actuator, makes pneumatic connections to the actuator.
actuator, sets up, and calibrates the instrument. If you
purchased the digital valve controller separately, you
will need a mounting kit to mount the digital valve
controller on the actuator. See the instructions that Refer to the following guidelines when mounting on
come with the mounting kit for detailed information on sliding-stem actuators with up to 4 inches of travel.
mounting the digital valve controller to a specific Where a key number is referenced, refer
actuator model. to figure 8-2.
The DVC6010 digital valve controller mounts on 1. Isolate the control valve from the process line
pressure and release pressure from both sides of the
sliding-stem actuators with up to 102 mm (4 inch)
travel. Figure 2-1 shows a typical mounting on an valve body. Shut off all pressure lines to the actuator,
releasing all pressure from the actuator. Use lock-out
actuator with up to 51 mm (2 inch) travel. Figure 2-2
procedures to be sure that the above measures stay in
shows a typical mounting on actuators with 51 to 102
mm (2 to 4 inch) travel. For actuators with greater than effect while you work on the equipment.
102 mm (4 inch) travel, see the guidelines for 2. Attach the connector arm to the valve stem
mounting a DVC6020 digital valve controller. connector.
2-6 September 2013

Installation
HEX NUT
CAP SCREW, FLANGED
FEEDBACK ARM
EXTENSION, LOCK WASHER
BIAS SPRING
ADJUSTMENT ARM
SPACER
MACHINE SCREW, FLAT

HEAD
2
HEX NUT, FLANGED
MACHINE SCREW
LOCK WASHER
SHIELD
MACHINE SCREW,
LOCK WASHER, PLAIN WASHER
HEX NUT
CONNECTOR ARM
Figure 2-2. FIELDVUE DVC6010 Digital Valve Controller Mounted on Sliding-Stem Actuator with 2 to 4 Inches Travel
3. Attach the mounting bracket to the digital valve
controller housing.
4. If valve travel exceeds 2 inches, a feedback arm
extension is attached to the existing 2-inch feedback
arm. Remove the existing bias spring (key 78) from
the 2-inch feedback arm (key 79). Attach the feedback
arm extension to the feedback arm (key 79) as shown
in figure 2-2.
5. Mount the digital valve controller on the actuator as
described in the mounting kit instructions.
6. Set the position of the feedback arm (key 79) on
the digital valve controller to the no air position by SPRING RELAXED
inserting the alignment pin (key 46) through the hole
on the feedback arm as follows: FEEDBACK ARM
BIAS SPRING
For air-to-open actuators (i.e., the actuator
stem retracts into the actuator casing or cylinder as air
pressure to the casing or lower cylinder increases),
insert the alignment pin into the hole marked ‘‘A’’. For
this style actuator, the feedback arm rotates
counterclockwise, from A to B, as air pressure to the
casing or lower cylinder increases.
ADJUSTMENT
For air-to-close actuators (i.e., the actuator
ARM PIN BIAS
SPRING
stem extends from the actuator casing or cylinder as
air pressure to the casing or upper cylinder increases), SPRING UNDER TENSION OF
A7209-1
insert the alignment pin into the hole marked ‘‘B’’. For ADJUSTMENT ARM PIN
this style actuator, the feedback arm rotates
clockwise, from B to A, as air pressure to the casing or
upper cylinder increases. Figure 2-3. Locating Adjustment Arm Pin in Feedback Arm
September 2013 2-7

Note Note
When performing the following steps, Do not use the stainless steel
ensure there is enough clearance DVC6020S in high vibration service
between the adjustment arm and the where the mounting bracket uses
feedback arm to prevent interference standoffs (spacers) to mount to the
with the bias spring. actuator.
2
7. Apply anti-seize (key 64) to the pin of the DVC6020 digital valve controllers use a cam (designed
adjustment arm. As shown in figure 2-3, place the pin for linear response) and roller as the feedback
into the slot of the feedback arm or feedback arm mechanism. Figure 2-4 shows an example of
extension so that the bias spring loads the pin against mounting on sliding-stem actuators with travels from 4
the side of the arm with the valve travel markings. inches to 24 inches. Some long-stroke applications will
require an actuator with a tapped lower yoke boss.
8. Install the external lock washer on the adjustment Figures 2-5 and 2-6 show the DVC6020 mounted on
arm. Position the adjustment arm in the slot of the rotary actuators.
connector arm and loosely install the flanged hex nut.
As shown in figure 2-5, two feedback arms are
9. Slide the adjustment arm pin in the slot of the available for the digital valve controller. Most
connector arm until the pin is in line with the desired long-stroke sliding-stem and rotary actuator
valve travel marking. Tighten the flanged hex nut. installations use the long feedback arm [62 mm (2.45
inches) from roller to pivot point]. Installations on
10. Remove the alignment pin (key 46) and store it in Fisher 1051 size 33 and 1052 size 20 and 33
the module base next to the I/P assembly. actuators use the short feedback arm [54 mm (2.13
inches) from roller to pivot point]. Make sure the
11. After calibrating the instrument, attach the shield correct feedback arm is installed on the digital valve
with two machine screws. controller before beginning the mounting procedure.
Refer to figures 2-4, 2-5, and 2-6 for parts locations.
Also, where a key number is referenced, refer to figure
DVC6020 on Long-Stroke (4 to 24 Inch 8-3. Refer to the following guidelines when mounting
Travel) Sliding-Stem Actuators and on sliding-stem actuators with 4 to 24 inches of travel
or on rotary actuators:
Rotary Actuators
1. Isolate the control valve from the process line
If ordered as part of a control valve assembly, the
factory mounts the digital valve controller on the
valve body. Shut off all pressure lines to the
actuator, makes pneumatic connections to the
pneumatic actuator, releasing all pressure from the
actuator. Use lock-out procedures to be sure that the
purchased the digital valve controller separately, you
above measures stay in effect while working on the
will need a mounting kit to mount the digital valve
equipment.
controller on the actuator. See the instructions that
come with the mounting kit for detailed information on 2. If a cam is not already installed on the actuator,
mounting the digital valve controller to a specific install the cam as described in the instructions
actuator model. included with the mounting kit. For sliding-stem
actuators, the cam is installed on the stem connector.
3. If a mounting plate is required, fasten the mounting
plate to the actuator.
4. For applications that require remote venting, a
Note pipe-away bracket kit is available. Follow the
instructions included with the kit to replace the existing
All cams supplied with FIELDVUE
mounting bracket on the digital valve controller with
mounting kits are characterized to
the pipe-away bracket and to transfer the feedback
provide a linear response.
parts from the existing mounting bracket to the
pipe-away bracket.
2-8 September 2013

Installation
CAM/ROLLER POSITION MARK LOCK WASHER

A
CAP SCREW
CAP SCREW, HEX
SOCKET
PLAIN WASHER
HEX NUT
STUD, CONT
2
THREAD
CAM
VENT MOUNTING PLATE
STUD, CONT THREAD
HEX NUT
A PLAIN WASHER
VENT ADAPTOR
29B1665-B / DOC
SPACER
SECTION A‐A
Figure 2-4. FIELDVUE DVC6020 Digital Valve Controller Mounted on Long-Stroke Sliding-Stem Actuator
MACHINE SCREW
MOUNTING ADAPTOR
CAP SCREW, HEX SOCKET CAP SCREW,
HEX SOCKET
CAM
29B1672-A / DOC CAM
MACHINE SCREW
29B2094-A / DOC
TYPICAL MOUNTING WITH SHORT FEEDBACK ARM TYPICAL MOUNTING WITH LONG FEEDBACK ARM
(FISHER 1052 SIZE 33 ACTUATOR SHOWN) (FISHER 1061 SIZE 30-68 ACTUATOR SHOWN)
Figure 2-5. FIELDVUE DVC6020 Digital Valve Controller Mounted on Rotary Actuator
September 2013 2-9

FOLLOWER ARM MOUNTING
EXTENSION ADAPTER
MACHINE SCREW,
LOCK WASHER,
HEX NUT
MOUNTING
CAP SCREW, BRACKET
HEX SOCKET BIAS SPRING
ARM ASSEMBLY PIN
2 ARM ASSEMBLY
CAP SCREW FEEDBACK

ARM ASSEMBLY
29B1673-A / DOC CAM
Figure 2-7. Locating Adjustment Arm Pin in Feedback Arm of a

DVC6030 on Quarter-Turn Actuators

Figure 2-6. FIELDVUE DVC6020 Digital Valve Controller with
Long Feedback Arm and Follower Arm Extension Mounted on a If ordered as part of a control valve assembly, the
Rotary Actuator factory mounts the digital valve controller on the
actuator, makes pneumatic connections to the
5. Larger size actuators may require a follower arm actuator, sets up, and calibrates the instrument. If you
extension, as shown in figure 2-6. If required, the purchased the digital valve controller separately, you
follower arm extension is included in the mounting kit. will need a mounting kit to mount the digital valve
Follow the instructions included with the mounting kit controller on the actuator. See the instructions that
to install the follower arm extension. come with the mounting kit for detailed information on
mounting the digital valve controller to a specific
6. Apply anti-seize (key 64) to the arm assembly pin actuator model.
as shown in figure 2-7. Figure 2-8 shows the DVC6030 digital valve controller
mounted on a quarter-turn actuator. Refer to figure 2-8
7. Mount the DVC6020 on the actuator as follows: for parts locations. Refer to the following guidelines
when mounting on quarter-turn actuators:
If required, a mounting adaptor is included in the

mounting kit. Attach the adaptor to the actuator as
shown in figure 2-5. Then attach the digital valve Note
controller assembly to the adaptor. The roller on the
digital valve controller feedback arm will contact the Due to NAMUR mounting limitations,
actuator cam as it is being attached. do not use the stainless steel
DVC6030S in high vibration service.
If no mounting adaptor is required, attach the 1. Isolate the control valve from the process line
digital valve controller assembly to the actuator or pressure and release pressure from both sides of the
mounting plate. The roller on the digital valve valve body. Shut off all pressure lines to the
controller feedback arm will contact the actuator cam pneumatic actuator, releasing all pressure from the
as it is being attached. actuator. Use lock-out procedures to be sure that the
above measures stay in effect while working on the
equipment.
8. For long-stroke sliding-stem actuators, after the 2. If necessary, remove the existing hub from the
mounting is complete, check to be sure the roller actuator shaft.
aligns with the position mark on the cam (see 3. If a positioner plate is required, attach the
figure 2-4). If necessary, reposition the cam to attain positioner plate to the actuator as described in the
alignment. mounting kit instructions.
2-10 September 2013

Installation
MOUNTING BRACKET
FEEDBACK ARM
TRAVEL INDICATOR PIN
2
29B1703-A / DOC
SPACER
TRAVEL INDICATOR
19B3879−A / DOC
Figure 2-8. Mounting a FIELDVUE DVC6030 Digital Valve Controller on a Rotary Actuator (Fisher 1032 Size 425A Shown)
4. If required, attach the spacer to the actuator shaft.
Refer to figures 2-9 and 2-10. The travel indicator

assembly can have a starting position of 7:30 or
Note
10:30. Determine the desired starting position then ValveLink software and the Field
proceed with the next step. Considering the top of the Communicator use the convention of
digital valve controller as the 12 o’clock position, in the clockwise (figure 2-9) and
next step attach the travel indicator, so that the pin is counterclockwise (figure 2-10) when
positioned as follows: viewing the potentiometer shaft from
the back of the FIELDVUE instrument.
If increasing pressure from the digital valve
controller output A rotates the potentiometer shaft 5. Attach the travel indicator, to the shaft connector or
clockwise (as viewed from the back of the spacer as described in the mounting kit instructions.
instrument), mount the travel indicator assembly such
that the arrow is in the 10:30 position, as shown in 6. Attach the mounting bracket to the digital valve
figure 2-9. controller.
7. Position the digital valve controller so that the pin
on the travel indicator engages the slot in the feedback
If increasing pressure from the digital valve arm and that the bias spring loads the pin as shown in
figure 2-11. Attach the digital valve controller to the
controller output A rotates the potentiometer shaft
actuator or positioner plate.
counterclockwise (as viewed from the back of the
instrument), mount the travel indicator assembly such 8. If a travel indicator scale is included in the
that the arrow is in the 7:30 position, as shown in mounting kit, attach the scale as described in the
figure 2-10. mounting kit instructions.
September 2013 2-11

STARTING POSITION OF TRAVEL
INDICATOR ASSEMBLY (DIGITAL
VALVE CONTROLLER OUTPUT A
AT 0 PSI. )
IN THIS POSITION, THE “B” HOLE
IN THE FEEDBACK ARM WILL BE
ALIGNED WITH THE REFERENCE
HOLE IN THE DIGITAL VALVE
CONTROLLERS HOUSING.
E0989 / DOC
2
DVC6030 FEEDBACK MOVEMENT OF TRAVEL
ARM MOVEMENT INDICATOR ASSEMBLY WITH
INCREASING PRESSURE FROM
OUTPUT A.
ACTUATOR SHAFT MOVEMENT
STARTING POSITION OF THE ACTUATOR TRAVEL

INDICATOR ASSEMBLY IF INCREASING PRESSURE
FROM OUTPUT A DRIVES THE INDICATOR
COUNTERCLOCKWISE (THE POTENTIOMETER
SHAFT WILL ROTATE CLOCKWISE AS VIEWED 19B3879-A / DOC-1
FROM THE BACK OF THE FIELDVUE INSTRUMENT)
NOTE: DVC6030 TRAVEL COUNTS (CLOCKWISE) = 3400 200
Figure 2-9. Explanation of FIELDVUE DVC6030 Travel Indicator Starting Position and Movement, if Clockwise Orientation is Selected
for “Travel Sensor Motion” in ValveLink Software or the Field Communicator
MOVEMENT OF TRAVEL E0989

INDICATOR ASSEMBLY WITH
INCREASING PRESSURE FROM
OUTPUT A.
DVC6030 FEEDBACK
ARM MOVEMENT
19B3879-A / DOC-2
STARTING POSITION OF
TRAVEL INDICATOR ASSEMBLY ACTUATOR SHAFT MOVEMENT
(DIGITAL VALVE CONTROLLER
OUTPUT A AT 0 PSI). STARTING POSITION OF THE TRAVEL INDICATOR
IN THIS POSITION, THE “A” HOLE ASSEMBLY IF INCREASING PRESSURE FROM
IN THE FEEDBACK ARM WILL BE OUTPUT A DRIVES THE INDICATOR CLOCKWISE.
ALIGNED WITH THE REFERENCE THE POTENTIOMETER SHAFT WILL ROTATE
HOLE IN THE DIGITAL VALVE COUNTERCLOCKWISE AS VIEWED FROM THE
CONTROLLERS HOUSING. BACK OF THE FIELDVUE INSTRUMENT.
NOTE: DVC6030 TRAVEL COUNTS (COUNTERCLOCKWISE) = 600 200
Figure 2-10. Explanation of FIELDVUE DVC6030 Travel Indicator Starting Position and Movement if Counterclockwise Orientation is
Selected for “Travel Sensor Motion” in ValveLink Software or the Field Communicator
2-12 September 2013

Installation
HOLE A
HOLE B
10C1796-A / Doc
TRAVEL
INDICATOR PIN
FEEDBACK ARM
48B4164-B / DOC BIAS SPRING Figure 2-12. FIELDVUE DVC6005 Base Unit with Mounting
Bracket (Rear View)
Figure 2-11. Positioning Travel Indicator Pin in the Feedback Arm
(Viewed as if Looking from the FIELDVUE DVC6030 toward the
Actuator)
DVC6015 on Sliding-Stem Actuators Up
to 102 mm (4 Inches) of Travel
DVC6005 Base Unit If ordered as part of a control valve assembly, the
For remote-mounted digital valve controllers, the factory mounts the remote feedback unit on the
DVC6005 base unit ships separately from the control actuator, makes pneumatic connections to the
valve and does not include tubing, fittings or wiring. actuator, sets up, and calibrates the instrument. If you
See the instructions that come with the mounting kit purchased the remote feedback unit, you will need a
for detailed information on mounting the base unit to a mounting kit to mount the remote feedback unit on the
specific actuator model. actuator. See the instructions that come with the
mounting kit for detailed information on mounting the
For remote-mounted instruments, mount the DVC6005 remote feedback unit to a specific actuator model.
base unit on a 50.8 mm (2-inch) pipestand or wall. The
included bracket is used for either mounting method.
Wall Mounting
Refer to figures 2-12 and 2-13. Drill two holes in the
wall using the dimensions shown in figure 2-12. Attach
Note
the mounting bracket to the base unit using four Refer to the DVC6005 Base Unit
spacers and 25.4 mm (1-inch) 1/4-20 hex head mounting instructions for off-actuator
screws. Attach the base unit to the wall using suitable mounting instructions.
screws or bolts.
Pipestand Mounting The DVC6015 remote feedback unit mounts on

Refer to figure 2-13. Position a standoff on the back of sliding-stem actuators with up to 102 mm (4-inch)
the base unit. Using two 101.6 mm (4-inch) 1/4-20 hex travel. Figure 2-1 shows a typical mounting on an
head screws loosely attach the base unit to the actuator with up to 51 mm (2 inch) travel. Figure 2-2
pipestand with the mounting bracket. Position the shows a typical mounting on actuators with 51 to 102
second standoff, then using the remaining 101.6 mm mm (2 to 4 inch) travel. For actuators with greater than
(4-inch) hex head screws, securely fasten the base 102 mm (4 inch) travel, see the guidelines for
unit to the pipe stand. mounting a DVC6025 remote feedback unit.
September 2013 2-13

SPACER
Note 1-INCH 1/4-20

HEX HEAD SCREW
While the housing differs on the

DVC6015 and the DVC6010, feedback
parts are the same.
2
Refer to the following guidelines when mounting on
sliding-stem actuators with up to 4 inches of travel.
Where a key number is referenced, figure 8-7.

pressure and release pressure from both sides of the W8473 / IL
MOUNTING BRACKET
valve body. Shut off all pressure lines to the actuator,
WALL MOUNTING
releasing all pressure from the actuator. Use lock-out
procedures to be sure that the above measures stay in
effect while you work on the equipment.
2. Attach the connector arm to the valve stem

connector.
3. Attach the mounting bracket to the remote

feedback unit housing.
4. If valve travel exceeds 2 inches, a feedback arm

extension is attached to the existing 2-inch feedback
arm. Remove the existing bias spring (key 78) from

the 2-inch feedback arm (key 79). Attach the feedback
arm extension to the feedback arm (key 79) as shown
in figure 2-2.
STANDOFF
4-INCH 1/4-20
5. Mount the remote feedback unit on the actuator as HEX HEAD SCREW
described in the mounting kit instructions. MOUNTING BRACKET
6. Set the position of the feedback arm (key 79) on W8474 / IL PIPESTAND MOUNTING
the remote feedback unit to the no air position by
inserting the alignment pin (key 46) through the hole Figure 2-13. FIELDVUE DVC6005 Base Unit Mounting
on the feedback arm as follows:
For air-to-open actuators (i.e., the actuator

stem retracts into the actuator casing or cylinder as air
pressure to the casing or lower cylinder increases), Note
insert the alignment pin into the hole marked ‘‘A’’. For
this style actuator, the feedback arm rotates When performing the following steps,
counterclockwise, from A to B, as air pressure to the ensure there is enough clearance
casing or lower cylinder increases. between the adjustment arm and the
feedback arm to prevent interference
with the bias spring.
For air-to-close actuators (i.e., the actuator
stem extends from the actuator casing or cylinder as
air pressure to the casing or upper cylinder increases), 7. Apply lubricant to the pin of the adjustment arm. As
insert the alignment pin into the hole marked ‘‘B’’. For shown in figure 2-3, place the pin into the slot of the
this style actuator, the feedback arm rotates feedback arm or feedback arm extension so that the
clockwise, from B to A, as air pressure to the casing or bias spring loads the pin against the side of the arm
upper cylinder increases. with the valve travel markings.
2-14 September 2013

Installation
8. Install the external lock washer on the adjustment installations use the long feedback arm [62 mm (2.45
arm. Position the adjustment arm in the slot of the inches) from roller to pivot point]. Installations on 1051
connector arm and loosely install the flanged hex nut. size 33 and 1052 size 20 and 33 actuators use the
9. Slide the adjustment arm pin in the slot of the short feedback arm [54 mm (2.13 inches) from roller to
pivot point]. Make sure the correct feedback arm is
connector arm until the pin is in line with the desired
installed on the remote feedback unit before beginning
valve travel marking. Tighten the flanged hex nut.
the mounting procedure.
10. Remove the alignment pin (key 46) and store it in
Refer to figures 2-4, 2-5, and 2-6 for parts locations.
the module base next to the I/P assembly.
Refer to the following guidelines when mounting on
11. After calibrating the instrument, attach the shield
with two machine screws.
sliding-stem actuators with 4 to 24 inches of travel or
on rotary actuators:
2
DVC6025 on Long-Stroke (4 to 24 Inch valve body. Shut off all pressure lines to the
Travel) Sliding-Stem Actuators and pneumatic actuator, releasing all pressure from the
Rotary Actuators actuator. Use lock-out procedures to be sure that the
If ordered as part of a control valve assembly, the above measures stay in effect while working on the
factory mounts the remote feedback unit on the equipment.
actuator, makes pneumatic connections to the 2. If a cam is not already installed on the actuator,
actuator, sets up, and calibrates the instrument. If you install the cam as described in the instructions
purchased the remote feedback unit separately, you included with the mounting kit. For sliding-stem
will need a mounting kit to mount the remote feedback actuators, the cam is installed on the stem connector.
unit on the actuator. See the instructions that come
3. If a mounting plate is required, fasten the mounting
with the mounting kit for detailed information on
plate to the actuator.
mounting the remote feedback unit to a specific
actuator model. 4. For applications that require remote venting, a
pipe-away bracket kit is available. Follow the
instructions included with the kit to replace the existing
mounting bracket on the remote feedback unit with the
pipe-away bracket and to transfer the feedback parts
Note from the existing mounting bracket to the pipe-away
bracket.
Refer to the DVC6005 Base Unit
mounting instructions on page 2-13 for 5. Larger size actuators may require a follower arm
off-actuator mounting instructions. extension, as shown in figure 2-6. If required, the
follower arm extension is included in the mounting kit.
Follow the instructions included with the mounting kit
DVC6025 remote feedback units use a cam and roller to install the follower arm extension.
as the feedback mechanism. Figure 2-4 shows an 6. Apply anti-seize (key 64) to the arm assembly pin
example of mounting on sliding-stem actuators with as shown in figure 2-7.
travels from 4 inches to 24 inches. Some long-stroke 7. Mount the DVC6025 on the actuator as follows:
applications will require an actuator with a tapped
lower yoke boss. Figures 2-5 and 2-6 show examples If required, a mounting adaptor is included in the
of mounting on rotary actuators. mounting kit. Attach the adaptor to the actuator as
shown in figure 2-5. Then attach the remote feedback
unit assembly to the adaptor. The roller on the remote
feedback unit feedback arm will contact the actuator
cam as it is being attached.
Note
If no mounting adaptor is required, attach the
While the housing differs on the remote feedback unit assembly to the actuator or
DVC6025 and the DVC6020, feedback mounting plate. The roller on the remote feedback unit
parts are the same. feedback arm will contact the actuator cam as it is
being attached.
As shown in figure 2-5, two feedback arms are 8. For long-stroke sliding-stem actuators, after the
available for the remote feedback unit. Most mounting is complete, check to be sure the roller
long-stroke sliding-stem and rotary actuator aligns with the position mark on the cam (see
September 2013 2-15

figure 2-4). If necessary, reposition the cam to attain
alignment.
DVC6035
DVC6035 FEEDBACK ARM
FEEDBACK ARM MOVEMENT
MOVEMENT
DVC6035 on Quarter-Turn Actuators
If ordered as part of a control valve assembly, the
factory mounts the remote feedback unit on the
actuator, makes pneumatic connections to the E0989
49B7988 / Doc
2 purchased the remote feedback unit separately, you
will need a mounting kit to mount the remote feedback
unit on the actuator. See the instructions that come
with the mounting kit for detailed information on
mounting the remote feedback unit to a specific
actuator model.
ACTUATOR SHAFT MOVEMENT ACTUATOR SHAFT MOVEMENT
STARTING POSITION OF THE TRAVEL STARTING POSITION OF THE TRAVEL

INDICATOR ASSEMBLY IF INCREASING INDICATOR ASSEMBLY IF INCREASING
PRESSURE FROM OUTPUT A DRIVES PRESSURE FROM OUTPUT A DRIVES
Note THE INDICATOR CLOCKWISE. THE
POTENTIOMETER SHAFT WILL ROTATE
THE INDICATOR COUNTERCLOCKWISE.
THE POTENTIOMETER SHAFT WILL
COUNTERCLOCKWISE AS VIEWED FROM ROTATE CLOCKWISE AS VIEWED
FROM THE BACK OF THE INSTRUMENT
Refer to the DVC6005 Base Unit THE BACK OF THE INSTRUMENT.
mounting instructions on page 2-13 for NOTE: DVC6035 TRAVEL COUNTS

(COUNTERCLOCKWISE) = 600 200
NOTE: DVC6035 TRAVEL COUNTS
(CLOCKWISE) = 3400 200
off-actuator mounting instructions.
Figure 2-8 shows an example of mounting on a

quarter-turn actuator. Refer to figure 2-8 for parts Figure 2-14. FIELDVUE DVC6035 Travel Indicator Installation
locations. Refer to the following guidelines when
mounting on quarter-turn actuators:
4. If required, attach the spacer to the actuator shaft.
Refer to figure 2-14. The travel indicator assembly can

Note have a starting position of 7:30 or 10:30. Determine
the desired starting position then proceed with the next
While the housing differs on the step. Considering the top of the remote travel sensor
DVC6035 and the DVC6030, feedback as the 12 o’clock position, in the next step attach the
parts are the same. travel indicator, so that the pin is positioned as follows:
If increasing pressure from the base unit

1. Isolate the control valve from the process line output A rotates the remote feedback units
pressure and release pressure from both sides of the potentiometer shaft counterclockwise (as viewed
valve body. Shut off all pressure lines to the pneumatic from the back of the instrument), mount the travel
actuator, releasing all pressure from the actuator. Use indicator assembly such that the arrow is in the 7:30
lock-out procedures to be sure that the above position, as shown in figures 2-10 and 2-14.
measures stay in effect while working on the
equipment.
2. If necessary, remove the existing hub from the If increasing pressure from the base unit
actuator shaft. output A rotates the remote feedback units
potentiometer shaft clockwise (as viewed from the
3. If a positioner plate is required, attach the back of the instrument), mount the travel indicator
positioner plate to the actuator as described in the assembly such that the arrow is in the 10:30 position,
mounting kit instructions. as shown in figures 2-9 and 2-14.
2-16 September 2013

Installation
5. Attach the travel indicator, to the shaft connector or
spacer as described in the mounting kit instructions.
Note 6. Attach the mounting bracket to the remote
feedback unit.
ValveLink software and the Field 7. Position the remote feedback unit so that the pin on
Communicator use the convention of the travel indicator, engages the slot in the feedback
clockwise (figure 2-9) and arm and that the bias spring loads the pin as shown in
counterclockwise (figure 2-10) when figure 2-11. Attach the remote feedback unit to the
viewing the potentiometer shaft from actuator or positioner plate.
the back of the FIELDVUE instrument.
8. If a travel indicator scale is included in the
2
mounting kit, attach the scale as described in the
mounting kit instructions.
September 2013 2-17

FISHER 67CFR
2
CAP SCREWS
O-RING 1
NOTE:
1 APPLY LUBRICANT
SUPPLY CONNECTION
W8077 / IL
Figure 2-15. Mounting the Fisher 67CFR Regulator on a FIELDVUE DVC6000 Digital Valve Controller
67CFR Filter Regulator Casing-Mounted Regulator

A 67CFR filter regulator, when used with DVC6000 Use the separate 67CFR filter regulator casing
digital valve controllers, can be mounted three ways. mounting bracket provided with the filter regulator.
Attach the mounting bracket to the 67CFR and then
attach this assembly to the actuator casing. Thread a
1/4-inch socket-head pipe plug into the unused outlet
on the filter regulator. The O-ring is not required.
Integral-Mounted Regulator
Refer to figure 2-15. Lubricate an O-ring and insert it
in the recess around the SUPPLY connection on the
digital valve controller. Attach the 67CFR filter Pressure Connections
regulator to the side of the digital valve controller.
Thread a 1/4-inch socket-head pipe plug into the
unused outlet on the filter regulator. This is the WARNING
standard method of mounting the filter regulator.
Refer to the Installation WARNING at
the beginning of this section.
Yoke-Mounted Regulator
Mount the filter regulator with 2 cap screws to the Pressure connections are shown in figure 2-16. All
pre-drilled and tapped holes in the actuator yoke. pressure connections on the digital valve controller are
1/4 NPT internal connections. Use at least 10 mm
Thread a 1/4-inch socket-head pipe plug into the (3/8-inch) tubing for all pneumatic connections. If
unused outlet on the filter regulator. The O-ring is not remote venting is required, refer to the vent
required. subsection.
2-18 September 2013

Installation
Supply Connections
LOOP CONNECTIONS
TERMINAL BOX WARNING
To avoid personal injury and property
damage resulting from bursting of
1/2 NPT
CONDUIT
parts, do not exceed maximum supply
CONNECTION pressure. 2
Personal injury or property damage
may result from fire or explosion if
natural gas is used as the supply
medium and appropriate preventive
measures are not taken. Preventive
measures may include, but are not
limited to, one or more of the
following: Remote venting of the unit,
re-evaluating the hazardous area
classification, ensuring adequate
ventilation, and the removal of any
ignition sources. For information on
FEEDBACK CONNECTIONS
remote venting of this controller, refer
TERMINAL BOX to page 2-22.
DVC6005 BASE UNIT Severe personal injury or property
damage may occur from an
uncontrolled process if the
instrument supply medium is not
clean, dry, oil-free, and noncorrosive.
While use and regular maintenance of
a filter that removes particles larger
1/2 NPT
CONDUIT than 40 micrometers in diameter will
CONNECTIONS
(BOTH SIDES) suffice in most applications, check
with an Emerson Process
OUTPUT A
Management field office and industry
CONNECTION instrument air quality standards for
use with corrosive air or if you are
unsure about the amount of air
filtration or filter maintenance.
SUPPLY
CONNECTION
OUTPUT B
CONNECTION
WARNING
When using natural gas as the supply
W7963 / IL
medium, or for explosion proof
VALVE MOUNTED UNIT
applications, the following warnings
also apply:
NOTE:
PNEUMATIC CONNECTIONS APPLICABLE TO BOTH VALVE-MOUNTED Remove electrical power before
INSTRUMENTS AND DVC6005 BASE UNIT.
removing the housing cap. Personal
injury or property damage from fire
or explosion may result if power is
not disconnected before removing
Figure 2-16. FIELDVUE DVC6000 Digital Valve Controller
the cap.
Connections
September 2013 2-19

Remove electrical power before
disconnecting any of the pneumatic
connections. LABEL LOCATED ON
TOP OF TERMINAL
When disconnecting any of the BOX
pneumatic connections or any

pressure retaining part, natural gas
will seep from the unit and any
connected equipment into the
surrounding atmosphere. Personal
2 injury or property damage may result
from fire or explosion if natural gas
is used as the supply medium and
appropriate preventive measures are
not taken. Preventive measures may
include, but are not limited to, one or
more of the following: Remote
venting of the unit, re-evaluating the
hazardous area classification,
ensuring adequate ventilation, and
the removal of any ignition sources.
For information on remote venting of
this controller, refer to page 2-22.
Ensure that that the covers is
correctly installed before putting this
unit back into service. Failure to do
so could result in personal injury or
property damage from fire or Figure 2-17. Gas Certified Label
explosion.
A maximum 40 micrometer particle size in the air

The DVC6000 can be used with air or natural gas as system is acceptable. Further filtration down to 5
the supply medium. If using natural gas as the micrometer particle size is recommended. Lubricant
pneumatic supply medium, natural gas will be used in content is not to exceed 1 ppm weight (w/w) or volume
the pneumatic output connections of the DVC6000 to (v/v) basis. Condensation in the air supply should be
any connected equipment. In normal operation the unit minimized.
will vent the supply medium into the surrounding
atmosphere unless it is remotely vented.
A 67CFR filter regulator with standard 5 micrometer
Natural Gas Certified, Single Seal instruments can be filter, or equivalent, may be used to filter and regulate
identified by the natural gas approval label shown in supply medium. A filter regulator can be integrally
figure 2-17. The Natural Gas Certified, Single Seal mounted onto the side of the digital valve controller,
device option simplifies conduit sealing requirements. casing mounted separate from the digital valve
Read and follow all local, regional, and federal wiring controller, or mounted on the actuator mounting boss.
requirements for natural gas installations. Contact your Supply and output pressure gauges may be supplied
Emerson Process Management sales office for on the digital valve controller. The output pressure
information on obtaining a Natural Gas Certified, gauges can be used as an aid for calibration.
Single Seal DVC6000 digital valve controller.
Supply pressure must be clean, dry air that meets the Connect the nearest suitable supply source to the
requirements of ISA Standard 7.0.01. 1/4 NPT IN connection on the filter regulator (if
Alternatively, natural gas must be clean, dry, oil-free, furnished) or to the 1/4 NPT SUPPLY connection on
and noncorrosive. H2S content should not exceed 20 the digital valve controller housing (if 67CFR filter
ppm. regulator is not attached).
2-20 September 2013

Installation
Output Connections
A factory mounted digital valve controller has its
output piped to the pneumatic input connection on the
actuator. If mounting the digital valve controller in the
field, or installing the remote-mounted DVC6005 base
unit, connect the 1/4 NPT digital valve controller
output connections to the pneumatic actuator input
connections.
Single-Acting Actuators 2
When using a single-acting direct digital valve
controller (relay A or C) on a single-acting actuator
connect OUTPUT A to the actuator pneumatic input.
When using a single-acting reverse digital valve
controller (relay B) on a single-acting actuator connect
OUTPUT B to the actuator diaphragm casing.
Double-Acting Actuators
DVC6000 digital valve controllers on double-acting
actuators always use relay A. With no input current,
OUTPUT A is at 0 pressure and OUTPUT B is at full W9131-1
supply pressure when the relay is properly adjusted.

To have the actuator stem extend from the cylinder Mounted on Fisher 585C Piston Actuator
with increasing input signal, connect OUTPUT A to the
upper actuator cylinder connection. Connect OUTPUT To have the actuator stem retract into the cylinder with
B to the lower cylinder connection. Figure 2-18 shows increasing input signal, connect OUTPUT A to the
the digital valve controller connected to a lower actuator cylinder connection. Connect OUTPUT
double-acting piston actuator. B to the upper cylinder connection.
September 2013 2-21

CONTROL SIGNAL 24/48 VDC
(4-20 mA, 0-20 mA, 110/220 VAC, etc.
0-24 VDC)
CONTROL LINE
Port A
2 DVC6000 DIGITAL VALVE

Port B
CONTROLLER WITH RELAY C SUPPLY PRESSURE
MONITORING LINE
NOTES:
1/4-18 NPT X 3/8 OD TUBING
ELECTRICAL WIRING SPRING RETURN ACTUATOR
E1048
Figure 2-19. Pneumatic Hookup for Solenoid Testing
Special Construction to Support Solenoid

Valve Testing
In single-acting actuator applications with a solenoid
Note
valve installed, the DVC6000 can be configured to test This application is called “special
the operation of the solenoid valve. This is application” in the Setup Wizard relay
accomplished by connecting the “unused” output port selection.
from the DVC6000 to the pneumatic line between the
solenoid valve and the actuator, as shown in figure This configuration is not possible with
2-19. When single-acting, direct relay C is installed, a double-acting actuator or when
the “unused” output port is port B. When single-acting, using relay A in single-acting mode.
reverse relay B is used, the unused port is port A.
Vent
WARNING

Note can occur from cover failure due to
overpressure. Ensure that the
Solenoid valve testing is only available housing vent opening is open and
for instrument level PD and ODV. free of debris to prevent pressure
buildup under the cover.
2-22 September 2013

Installation
To connect a remote vent to DVC6020 digital valve
WARNING controllers—replace the standard mounting bracket
(key 74, figures 8-3 and 8-5) with the vent-away
This unit vents the supply medium bracket (key 74). Install a pipe plug in the vent-away
into the surrounding atmosphere. mounting bracket (key 74). Mount the digital valve
When installing this unit in a controller on the actuator as described in the
non-hazardous (non-classified) Installation section of this manual. The vent
location in a confined area, with connection is 3/8 NPT internal. At a minimum, 12.7
natural gas as the supply medium, mm (1/2-inch) tubing should be used when installing a
you must remotely vent this unit to a remote vent to prevent excessive pressure from
safe location. Failure to do so could building up under the cover. 2
result in personal injury or property
damage from fire or explosion, and
area re-classification.
hazardous (classified) location remote Electrical Connections
venting of the unit may be required,
depending upon the area
classification, and as specified by the
requirements of local, regional, and
federal codes, rules and regulations. WARNING
Failure to do so when necessary
could result in personal injury or To avoid personal injury resulting
property damage from fire or from electrical shock, do not exceed
explosion, and area re-classification. the maximum input voltage specified
in table 1-2 of this instruction manual,
Vent line piping should comply with or on the product nameplate. If the
local and regional codes and should input voltage specified differs, do not
be as short as possible with adequate exceed the lowest specified maximum
inside diameter and few bends to input voltage.
reduce case pressure buildup. Select wiring and/or cable glands that
are rated for the environment of use
In addition to remote venting of the (such as hazardous area, ingress
unit, ensure that all caps and covers protection and temperature). Failure
are correctly installed. Failure to do to use properly rated wiring and/or
so could result in personal injury or cable glands can result in personal
property damage from fire or injury or property damage from fire or
explosion, and area re-classification. explosion.
Wiring connections must be in
accordance with local, regional, and
national codes for any given
hazardous area approval. Failure to
follow the local, regional, and national
codes could result in personal injury
The relay output constantly bleeds supply medium into or property damage from fire or
the area under the cover. The vent opening at the explosion.
back of the housing should be left open to prevent
The valve may move in an unexpected
pressure buildup under the cover. If a remote vent is
direction when power is applied to the
required, the vent line must be as short as possible
DVC6000 digital valve controller. To
with a minimum number of bends and elbows.
avoid personal injury and property
To connect a remote vent to DVC6010 and damage caused by moving parts,
DVC6030 digital valve controllers and DVC6005 keep hands, tools, and other objects
base unit—remove the plastic vent (key 52, figures away from the valve/actuator
8-2 and 8-5). The vent connection is 3/8 NPT internal. assembly when applying power to the
At a minimum, 12.7 mm (1/2-inch) tubing should be instrument.
used when installing a remote vent to prevent
excessive pressure from building up under the cover.
September 2013 2-23

SAFETY GROUND
WARNING TALK−
TALK+
To avoid personal injury or property

damage caused by fire or explosion,
remove power to the instrument
before removing the terminal box
cover in an area which contains a
potentially explosive atmosphere or
has been classified as hazardous.
2
EARTH GROUND
LOOP+
39B3399-B Sheet 2
LOOP−
4-20 mA Loop Connections

The digital valve controller is normally powered by a Terminal Box
control system output card. The use of shielded cable
will ensure proper operation in electrically noisy
environments. WARNING
Personal injury or property damage,
caused by fire or explosion, can
result from the discharge of static
electricity. Connect a 14 AWG (2.08
WARNING mm2) ground strap between the
digital valve controller and earth
To avoid personal injury or property ground when flammable or
damage from the sudden release of hazardous gases are present. Refer
process pressure, be sure the valve is to national and local codes and
not controlling the process. The valve standards for grounding
may move when the source is applied. requirements.
To avoid static discharge from the
plastic cover when flammable gases
or dust are present, do not rub or
clean the cover with solvents. To do
Wire the digital valve controller as follows: (unless so could result in a spark that may
indicated otherwise, refer to figures 8-2 through 8-4 for cause the flammable gases or dust
identification of parts). to explode, resulting in personal
injury or property damage. Clean
1. Remove the terminal box cap (key 4) from the with a mild detergent and water
terminal box (key 3). only.
2. Bring the field wiring into the terminal box. When

applicable, install conduit using local and national 4. As shown in figure 2-20, two ground terminals are
electrical codes which apply to the application. available for connecting a safety ground, earth ground,
or drain wire. These ground terminals are electrically
identical. Make connections to these terminals
3. Refer to figure 2-20. Connect the control system
following national and local codes and plant standards.
output card positive wire ‘‘current output’’ to the LOOP
+ screw terminal in the terminal box. Connect the 5. Replace and hand tighten the terminal box cap.
control system output card negative (or return) wire to When the loop is ready for startup, apply power to the
the LOOP − screw terminal. control system output card.
2-24 September 2013

Installation
Remote Travel Sensor Connections national electrical codes. Route the 3-conductor
shielded cable between the two units (refer to
The DVC6005 base unit is designed to receive travel
figure 2-21).
information via a remote sensor. The remote can be
any of the following: 4. Connect one wire of the 3-conductor shielded cable
between terminal 1 on the feedback unit and terminal
Emerson Process Management supplied 1 on the base unit.
DVC6015, DVC6025 or DVC6035 feedback unit,
5. Connect the second wire of the 3-conductor
An under-traveled 10 kOhm potentiometer used shielded cable between terminal 2 on the feedback
unit and terminal 2 on the base unit.
in conjunction with onboard 30 kOhm resistor, or 2
6. Connect the third wire of the 3-conductor shielded
A potentiometer used in conjunction with two cable between terminal 3 on the feedback unit and
fixed resistors (potentiometer travel is the same as terminal 3 on the base unit.
actuator travel).
7. Connect the cable shield or drain wire to the
ground screw in the feedback connections terminal
WARNING box of the base unit.
Personal injury or property damage,

caused by wiring failure, can result if
the feedback wiring connecting the Note
base unit with the remote feedback
unit shares a conduit with any other Do not connect the shield or drain wire
power or signal wiring. to any terminal on the feedback unit,
to the earth ground, or any other
Do not place feedback wiring in the
alternative ground.
same conduit as other power or
signal wiring.
8. Replace and hand-tighten all covers.
Using an External 10 kOhm External

Note Potentiometer as a Remote Travel Sensor
3-conductor shielded cable, 22 AWG
minimum wire size, is required for
connection between base unit and
feedback unit. Pneumatic tubing
between base unit output connection
Note
and actuator has been tested to 15 Potentiometer travel must be between
meters (50 feet) maximum without 1.3 and 1.6 times greater than the
performance degradation. actuator travel. For example: if an
actuator has a travel of 9 inches, then
a linear potentiometer must be
Using the DVC6015, DVC6025 & DVC6035 selected with a rated travel between
Feedback Unit as a Remote Travel Sensor 11.7 and 14.4 inches. The resistive
element must be tapered from 0 kOhm
1. On the feedback unit, remove the housing cap.
to 10 kOhm over rated travel of the
2. On the base unit, remove the feedback potentiometer. The actuator will only
connections terminal box cap (see figure 2-16). use 63 to 76 % of the potentiometer
3. If necessary, install conduit between the feedback rated travel.
unit and the base unit following applicable local and
September 2013 2-25

FEEDBACK CONNECTIONS
TERMINAL BOX
2
W8477 / IL
W8475 / IL
GROUND BASE UNIT FEEDBACK UNIT

SCREW
TO FEEDBACK UNIT TERMINAL 3
TERMINAL 1
TERMINAL 2
TERMINAL 3
W8476 / IL
W8478-1 / IL
FEEDBACK CONNECTIONS TERMINAL BOX FEEDBACK UNIT
Figure 2-21. Terminal Details for Connecting Base Unit and Feedback Units of Remote-Mounted Digital Valve Controllers
Note 2
The digital valve controller must be INTERNAL

configured using the SStem/Roller 1 " 10k W
(30k W)
selection on the menu of the

30k
appropriate setup device.
The base unit (DVC6005) was designed to work with a

40 kOhm potentiometer for travel feedback. However, BASE UNIT TERMINATION BOX 3RD PARTY FEEDBACK ELEMENT
there are linear potentiometers that are readily (DVC6005) (WITH 10k W POTENTIOMETER)
available with a rated resistance of 10 kOhm.
Therefore, the feedback connections terminal box of
the DVC6005 contains an additional 30 kOhm fixed Figure 2-22. Terminal Details for Connecting a FIELDVUE
resistor that may be added to the circuit. This brings DVC6005 Base Unit and a 10k Ohm External Potentiometer
the total resistance up to the required 40 kOhm.
2. On the base unit, remove the feedback
1. Mount the external 10 kOhm potentiometer to the connections terminal box cap (see figure 2-16).
actuator such that the mid-travel position of the
potentiometer (5 kOhm) corresponds to the mid-travel 3. If necessary, install conduit between the
position of the actuator. This will leave an equal potentiometer and the base unit following applicable
amount of unused resistive element on both ends of local and national electrical codes. Route the
the travel, which is required by the digital valve 3-conductor shielded cable between the two units
controller to function properly. (refer to figure 2-22).
2-26 September 2013

Installation
4. Connect one wire of the 3-conductor shielded cable
between the terminal labeled “30kW” on the base unit 3
and one end lead of the potentiometer.
5. Connect the second wire of the 3-conductor 2 (R2)
shielded cable between the middle lead (wiper) of the
1
10 kOhm potentiometer to Terminal 2 on the base
unit. 30kW
" (Rpot)
(R1)
6. Connect the third wire of the 3-conductor shielded
cable between Terminal 3 on the base unit and the
other end-lead of the 10 kOhm potentiometer. 2
ground screw in the feedback connections terminal BASE UNIT TERMINATION BOX THREE-RESISTOR SERIES
(DVC6005)
box of the base unit. Do not connect the shield or
drain wire to the external potentiometer. Figure 2-23. Terminal Details for Connecting a FIELDVUE
8. Replace and tighten the base unit cover. DVC6005 Base Unit and a Three-Resistor Series
The maximum resistance of the potentiometer

Using a Potentiometer with Two Fixed (Rpot(max)) must be between 3.9 kOhm and 10 kOhm.
Resistors as a Remote Travel Sensor
The resistance of R1 is 4.25 times greater than
Perform the following procedure if a potentiometer is Rpot(max).
used with the same, or slightly longer travel than the
actuator’s travel. The resistance of R2 is 4 times less than
Rpot(max).
WARNING
Note
The potentiometer must be capable of
damage from an uncontrolled process
resistance close to 0 Ohms.
ensure that the R1 resistor is properly
insulated before installing it in the
terminal box.
CAUTION
1. On the base unit, remove the feedback
To prevent damage to the connections terminal box cap (see figure 2-16).
potentiometer, ensure that it is free to 2. If necessary, install conduit between the
travel the entire length of the two-resistor series and the base unit following
actuator’s travel. applicable local and national electrical codes. Route
the 3-conductor shielded cable between the two units
(refer to figure 2-23).
3. Install the fixed resistor (R1) across the unlabeled
bottom Terminal and Terminal #1. The bottom terminal
Note does not have a screw. The screw on the 30 kOhm
terminal can be used. R1 must be properly insulated
The digital valve controller must be when installed in the terminal box to prevent personal
configured using the SStem/Roller injury or property damage.
selection on the menu of the
appropriate setup device. 4. Connect one wire of the 3-conductor shielded cable
between the unlabeled bottom Terminal on the base
unit and an end-lead of the external potentiometer
This procedure uses three resistors connected in (Rpot).
series, two fixed resistors and one potentiometer. 5. Connect the second wire of the 3-conductor
Three conditions must be met for the resistor shielded cable between the middle lead (wiper) of the
combination to correctly operate the digital valve external potentiometer (Rpot) and Terminal 2 on the
controller: base unit.
September 2013 2-27

6. Connect the third wire of the 3-conductor shielded 9. Replace and tighten the base unit cover.
cable between between a lead on fixed resistor (R2)
and terminal #3 of the base unit. Example: Using a linear potentiometer rated at 400
Ohms/inch on an actuator with 16” of travel.
7. Connect the available end-lead on the
potentiometer (Rpot) with the available lead on fixed Rpot(max) is 400 Ohms/in x 16” = 6.4 kOhm
resistor (R2).
R1 = 6.4 kOhm x 4.25 = 27.2 kOhm
ground screw in the feedback connections terminal
box of the base unit. Do not connect the shield or
2 drain wire to the two-resistor series. R2 = 6.4 kOhm / 4 = 1.6 kOhm
2-28 September 2013

Installation
Test Connections Communication Connections
WARNING WARNING
caused by fire or explosion may occur
if this connection is attempted in a
if this connection is attempted in a
potentially explosive atmosphere, or
potentially explosive atmosphere or in
in an area that has been classified as
an area that has been classified as
hazardous. Confirm that area
classification and atmosphere
hazardous. Confirm that area 2
classification and atmosphere
conditions permit the safe removal of
conditions permit the safe removal of
the terminal box cap before
the terminal box cap before
proceeding.
proceeding.
Test connections inside the terminal box can be used

to measure loop current across a 1 ohm resistor. A HART communicating device, such as a 475 Field
1. Remove the terminal box cap. Communicator or a personal computer running
ValveLink software communicating through a HART
2. Adjust the test meter to measure a range of 0.001 modem, interfaces with the DVC6000 digital valve
to 0.1 volts. controller from any wiring termination point in the 4-20
3. Connect the positive lead of the test meter to the mA loop. If you choose to connect the HART
TEST + connection and the negative lead to the TEST communicating device directly to the instrument,
− connection inside the terminal box. attach the device to the LOOP + and LOOP −
4. Measure Loop current as: terminals or to the TALK + and TALK − connections
Voltage (on test meter) 1000 = milliamps inside the terminal box to provide local
communications with the instrument.
example:
Test meter Voltage X 1000 = Loop Milliamps
0.004 X1000 = 4.0 milliamperes
0.020 X 1000 = 20.0 milliamperes
5. Remove test leads and replace the terminal box
cover.
September 2013 2-29

NON-HART BASED
DCS
I/O I/O
HART
2 FILTER
4-20 mA
DIGITAL VALVE
CONTROLLER
Tx Tx VALVE
A6188-1/IL
Figure 2-24. HART Filter Application
Wiring Practices communication. For more information on the

description and use of the HART filter, refer to the
separate HART filter instruction manual.
Control System Requirements Contact your Emerson Process Management sales
There are several parameters that should be checked office if assistance is needed to determine if your
to ensure the control system is compatible with the system requires a filter.
DVC6000 digital valve controller.
HART Filter
Depending on the control system you are using, a
HART filter may be needed to allow HART Note
communication. The HART filter is a passive device
that is inserted in field wiring from the HART loop. The A HART filter is typically NOT required
filter is normally installed near the field wiring terminals for any of the Emerson Process
of the control system I/O (see figure 2-24). Its purpose Management control systems,
is to effectively isolate the control system output from including PROVOXt, RS3t, and
modulated HART communication signals and raise the DeltaVt systems.
impedance of the control system to allow HART
2-30 September 2013

Installation
TOTAL LOOP THUM ADAPTER
CABLE RESISTANCE (IF USED)
COMPLIANCE VOLTAGE
CONTROL
SYSTEM
VOLTAGE
+ INTRINSIC SAFETY R AVAILABLE AT
HART BARRIER + THE
− FILTER (if used) − INSTRUMENT
(if used)
Calculate Voltage Available at the Instrument as

follows:
Example Calculation 2
Control system compliance voltage 18.5 volts (at 21.05 mA)
– Filter voltage drop (if used) 1 – 2.3 volts (for HF300 filter)
– Intrinsic safety barrier resistance (if used) x maximum loop current – 2.55 volts (121 ohms x 0.02105 amps)
– Smart Wireless THUM adapter voltage drop (if used) 2
– Total loop cable resistance x maximum loop – 1.01 volts (48 ohms x 0.02105 amps for
current 1000 feet of Belden 9501 cable)
= Voltage available at the instrument 3 = 15.19 volts, available—if safety barrier (2.55 volts)
is not used
NOTES:
1 Obtain filter voltage drop. The measured drop will be different than this value. The measured filter voltage drop
depends upon control system output voltage, the intrinsic safety barrier (if used), and the instrument. See note 3.
2 The voltage drop of the THUM adapter is linear from 2.25 volts at 3.5 mA to 1.2 volts at 25 mA.
3 The voltage available at the instrument is not the voltage measured at the instrument terminals. Once the instrument is
connected, the instrument limits the measured voltage to approximately 9.0 to 10.5 volts.
Figure 2-25. Determining Voltage Available at the Instrument
Voltage Available The voltage available at the instrument may be

calculated from the following equation:
The voltage available at the DVC6000 digital valve
controller must be at least 11 volts DC. The voltage Voltage Available = [Control System Compliance
available at the instrument is not the actual voltage Voltage (at maximum current)] − [filter voltage drop (if
measured at the instrument when the instrument is a HART filter is used)] − [total cable resistance
connected. The voltage measured at the instrument is maximum current] − [barrier resistance x maximum
limited by the instrument and is typically less than the current].
voltage available.
The calculated voltage available should be greater
As shown in figure 2-25, the voltage available at the
than or equal to 11 volts DC.
instrument depends upon:
Table 2-1 lists the resistance of some typical cables.
the control system compliance voltage
The following example shows how to calculate the
if a filter, wireless THUM adapter, or intrinsic voltage available for a Honeywell TDC2000 control
safety barrier is used, and system with a HF340 HART filter, and 1000 feet of
Belden 9501 cable:
the wire type and length. Voltage available = [18.5 volts (at 21.05 mA)] − [2.3
volts] − [48 ohms 0.02105 amps]
The control system compliance voltage is the
maximum voltage at the control system output Voltage available = [18.5] − [2.3] − [1.01]
terminals at which the control system can produce
maximum loop current. Voltage available = 15.19 volts
September 2013 2-31

Table 2-1. Cable Characteristics
Capacitance(1) Capacitance(1) Resistance(2) Resistance(2)
Cable Type
pF/Ft pF/m Ohms/ft Ohms/m
BS5308/1, 0.5 sq mm 61.0 200 0.022 0.074
BS5308/1, 1.0 sq mm 61.0 200 0.012 0.037
BS5308/1, 1.5 sq mm 61.0 200 0.008 0.025
BS5308/2, 0.5 sq mm 121.9 400 0.022 0.074
BS5308/2, 0.75 sq mm 121.9 400 0.016 0.053
BS5308/2, 1.5 sq mm 121.9 400 0.008 0.025
2 BELDEN 8303, 22 awg 63.0 206.7 0.030 0.098
BELDEN 8441, 22 awg 83.2 273 0.030 0.098
BELDEN 8767, 22 awg 76.8 252 0.030 0.098
BELDEN 8777, 22 awg 54.9 180 0.030 0.098
BELDEN 9501, 24 awg 50.0 164 0.048 0.157
BELDEN 9680, 24 awg 27.5 90.2 0.048 0.157
BELDEN 9729, 24 awg 22.1 72.5 0.048 0.157
BELDEN 9773, 18 awg 54.9 180 0.012 0.042
BELDEN 9829, 24 awg 27.1 88.9 0.048 0.157
BELDEN 9873, 20 awg 54.9 180 0.020 0.069
1. The capacitance values represent capacitance from one conductor to all other conductors and shield. This is the appropriate value to use in the cable length calculations.
2. The resistance values include both wires of the twisted pair.
1 kW POTENTIOMETER
MILLIAMMETER
VOLTMETER
CIRCUIT
UNDER
TEST
A6192-1/IL
Figure 2-26. Voltage Test Schematic
Compliance Voltage 3. Increase the resistance of the 1 kW potentiometer,

If the compliance voltage of the control system is not shown in figure 2-26, until the current observed on the
known, perform the following compliance voltage test. milliammeter begins to drop quickly.
1. Disconnect the field wiring from the control system 4. Record the voltage shown on the voltmeter. This is
and connect equipment as shown in figure 2-26 to the the control system compliance voltage.
control system terminals.
For specific parameter information relating to your
2. Set the control system to provide maximum output control system, contact your Emerson Process
current. Management sales office.
2-32 September 2013

Installation
START HERE
A
B
Unpack the
Install the HART
HART Tri-Loop
Tri-Loop. See
HART Tri-Loop Configure the
product manual HART Tri-Loop
Review the HART to receive digital
Tri-Loop Product valve controller
Manual burst commands
Mount the
HART Tri-Loop
to the DIN rail.
2
Check
No Pass system No troubleshooting
Digital valve Install the digital Wire the digital
controller valve controller to test? procedures in
valve controller. HART Tri-Loop
Installed? the HART Tri-Loop.
product manual.
Yes Yes
Install Channel 1
wires from HART
Set the digital Tri-Loop to the
valve controller control room.
Burst Option DONE
(Optional) Install
Set the digital Channel 2 and 3 wires
valve controller from HART Tri-Loop
Burst Mode to the control room.
A B
E0365 / IL
Figure 2-27. HART Tri-Loop Installation Flowchart
Maximum Cable Capacitance sales office for specific information relating to your
control system.
The maximum cable length for HART communication
is limited by the characteristic capacitance of the
cable. Maximum length due to capacitance can be
calculated using the following formulas: Installation in Conjunction with a
Length(ft) = [160,000 − Cmaster(pF)] [Ccable(pF/ft)] Rosemountt 333 HART Tri-Loop
Length(m) = [160,000 − Cmaster(pF)] [Ccable(pF/m)] HART-to-Analog Signal Converter
Use the DVC6000 digital valve controller in operation
where: with a Rosemount 333 HART Tri-Loop
160,000 = a constant derived for FIELDVUE HART-to-Analog Signal Converter to acquire an
instruments to ensure that the HART network RC time independent 4-20 mA analog output signal for the
constant will be no greater than 65 μs (per the HART analog input, travel target, pressure, or travel. The
specification). HART Tri-Loop accepts any three of these digital
signals and converts them into three separate 4-20
Cmaster = the capacitance of the control system or mA analog channels.
HART filter
Refer to figure 2-27 for basic installation information.
Ccable = the capacitance of the cable used Refer to the 333 HART Tri-Loop HART-to-Analog
(see table 2-1) Signal Converter Product Manual for complete
installation information.
The following example shows how to calculate the
cable length for a Foxboro I/A control system (1988)
with a Cmaster of 50, 000 pF and a Belden 9501 cable Commissioning the Digital Valve
with characteristic capacitance of 50pF/ft.
Controller for use with the HART
Length(ft) = [160,000 − 50,000pF] [50pF/ft] Tri-Loop Signal Converter
Length = 2200 ft.
To prepare the digital valve controller for use with a
The HART communication cable length is limited by 333 HART Tri-Loop, you must configure the digital
the cable characteristic capacitance. To increase valve controller to burst mode, and select Burst
cable length, select a wire with lower capacitance per Command 3. In burst mode, the digital valve controller
foot. Contact your Emerson Process Management provides digital information to the HART Tri-Loop
September 2013 2-33

HART-to-Analog Signal Converter. The HART
Tri-Loop converts the digital information to a 4 to 20
mA analog signal. Each burst message contains the Set the Burst Operation (1-2-1-4)
latest value of the primary (analog input), secondary
(travel target), tertiary (configured output pressure), 1. From the Online menu, select Configure, Detailed
and quaternary (travel) variables. Setup, Mode and Protection, and Burst Mode.
2. Select Change Burst Enable. Select Enable then
To commission a DVC6000 digital valve controller for press ENTER and SEND.
use with a HART Tri-Loop, perform the following 3. Select Change Burst Command. Select the desired
2 procedures. command (HART Univ Command 3).
4. Select Cmd 3 Configured Pressure. Select the
pressure you want the HART Tri-Loop to use as the
tertiary variable.
Command 3 provides the following variables:
Primary variable—analog input in % or ma,
Secondary variable—travel target in % of ranged
Note travel,
Instrument level AC does not support Tertiary variable—supply or output pressure in psig,
HART Command 3 or Burst Mode bar, kPa, or kg/cm2. Select Cmd 3 Press from the
communications. Burst menu to select if the output A, output B,
differential (A−B), or supply pressure is sent.
Quaternary variable—travel in % of ranged travel.
2-34 September 2013

Basic Setup
3-3
Section 3 Basic Setup

Instrument Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Configuration Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2 3

Guided Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Setup Wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Using the Performance Tuner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Stabilizing/Optimizing Valve Response . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
September 2013 3-1

Basic Setup (1-1)
Instrument Mode
To setup and calibrate the instrument, the instrument
mode must be Out Of Service.
WARNING
Changes to the instrument setup may
To view the instrument mode, press the Hot Key and
cause changes in the output pressure
select Instrument Mode. If the mode is not Out Of
or valve travel. Depending on the
Service, select Out Of Service from the Instrument
application, these changes may upset
Mode menu and press ENTER.
process control, which may result in
personal injury or property damage.
Note
To setup and calibrate the instrument,
Configuration Protection the protection must be None and the
Instrument Mode must be Out Of
To setup and calibrate the instrument, the protection Service. See Configuration Protection
must be set to None with the Field Communicator. If and Instrument Mode at the beginning
the protection is not None, changing the protection of this section for information on
requires placing a jumper across the Auxiliary removing instrument protection and
terminals in the terminal box. changing the instrument mode.
To remove protection: If you are operating in burst mode, we
recommend that you disable burst
1. Connect a 4-20 mA source to the instrument. before continuing with calibration.
Once calibration is complete, burst
2. Connect the Field Communicator to the instrument mode may then be turned back on.
and turn it on.
3. Press the Hot key on the Field Communicator and When the DVC6000 digital valve controller is ordered
select Protection. as part of a control valve assembly, the factory
mounts the digital valve controller and sets up the
instrument as specified on the order. When mounting
to a valve in the field, the instrument needs to be
setup to match the instrument to the valve and
actuator.
Note Before beginning Basic Setup, be sure the instrument

is correctly mounted as described in the Installation
If the Auxiliary Terminal Action is section.
configured for Auto Calibration, be
sure the jumper remains across the
auxiliary terminals until the Field Setup Wizard (1-1-1)
Communicator prompts you to remove
To have the Field Communicator automatically setup
it. Removing the jumper too soon will
the instrument using specified actuator information,
cause the instrument to begin auto
travel calibration. from the Online Menu select Configure, Guided Setup,
and Setup Wizard. Follow the prompts on the Field
Communicator display to setup the instrument. Table
4-5 provides the actuator information required to setup
and calibrate the instrument.
4. From the Protection menu, select None. When
1. Select travel or pressure control. Travel control is
prompted by the Field Communicator, temporarily
the typical mode of operation.
attach the jumper to the AUX + and AUX − terminals
in the instrument terminal box. 2. Enter the pressure units: psi, bar, kPa, or kg/cm2.
3-2 September 2013

Basic Setup
Table 3-1. Factory Default Settings Communicator sets the setup parameters to the
Setup Parameter Default Setting values listed in table 3-1. If you select NO for the
Analog Input Units mA factory defaults, the setup parameters listed in the
Analog In Range High 20.0 mA table remain at their previous settings.
Analog In Range Low 4.0 mA
Control Mode Analog Typically the Setup Wizard determines the required
Restart Control Mode Resume Last setup information based upon the actuator
Self-Test Shutdown All Failures Disabled manufacturer and model specified. However, if you
Setpoint Filter Time 0 secs
enter other for the actuator manufacturer or the
Input Characterization Linear
Travel Limit High 125% actuator model, then you will be prompted for setup
Travel Limit Low −25% parameters such as:
Travel Cutoff High 99.5% Actuator style (spring & diaphragm, piston
Travel Cutoff Low 0.5% double-acting without spring, piston single-acting with
Set Point Rate Open(1) 0 %/secs spring, piston double-acting with spring), 3
Set Point Rate Close(2) 0 %/secs
Polling Address 0
Valve style (rotary or sliding stem),
Auxiliary Terminal Action Auxiliary Input Alert
On Loss of Instrument Signal (valve opens or
Cmd 3 Configured Pressure closes), see Zero Power Condition in the Detailed
For double-acting actuators differential output pressure Setup section.
For single-acting actuators actuator pressure Feedback connection (rotary-all, sstem-roller, or
1. In firmware 2 thru 6 this parameter is labeled Minimum Opening Time. In firmware
10 and below this parameter should be set to zero.
sstem-standard), see Feedback Connection in the
2. In firmware 2 thru 6 this parameter is labeled Minimum Closing Time. In firmware Detailed Setup section.
10 and below this parameter should be set to zero.
Travel Sensor motion (increasing air pressure
3. Enter the maximum instrument supply pressure. causes the travel sensor shaft to rotate clockwise or
counterclockwise). The Field Communicator will ask if
After entering the maximum instrument supply it can move the valve to determine travel sensor
pressure, the Setup Wizard prompts you for actuator motion. If you answer yes, the instrument may stroke
information. the valve the full travel span to determine travel
sensor rotation. If you answer No, then you will have
4. Enter the manufacturer of the actuator on which
to specify the rotation for increasing air pressure:
the instrument is mounted. If the actuator
clockwise or counterclockwise. (see Travel Sensor
manufacturer is not listed, select Other.
Motion in the Detailed Setup section).
5. Enter the actuator model or type. If the actuator Volume booster (indicate if volume booster or quick
model is not listed, select Other. release is present)
Tuning set (see Tuning Set in the Detailed Setup
6. Enter the actuator size. section).
7. Select whether the valve is open or closed under
After completing the setup information, travel is
the zero power condition.
automatically calibrated. Follow the prompts on the
Field Communicator display. The calibration procedure
uses the valve and actuator stops as the 0% and
WARNING 100% calibration points. For additional information,
refer to Auto Calibrate Travel on page 5-2 of the
In the next step, if you answer YES to Calibration section.
the prompt for permission to move
the valve when the Field When travel calibration is complete, you are asked if
Communicator is determining the you wish to adjust the relay (double-acting only).
travel sensor motion, the instrument Select yes to adjust the relay. For additional
will move the valve through its full information, refer to Relay Adjustment on page 5-10 of
travel range. To avoid personal injury the Calibration section.
and property damage caused by the
release of pressure or process fluid,
provide some temporary means of
control for the process.
8. Specify if a volume booster or quick release valve

Note
is present. Relay Adjustment is only available for
the double-acting relay (Relay A).
9. Specify if factory defaults should be used for basic
setup. If you select YES for factory default, the Field
September 2013 3-3

If after completing the Setup Wizard the valve seems
slightly unstable or unresponsive, you can improve Stabilizing/Optimizing or (1-1-2)
operation by selecting either Performance Tuner or
Stabilize/Optimize from the Guided Setup menu. For
Valve Response
additional information on using the Performance
Tuner, refer to Using the Performance Tuner in this
section. For additional information on stabilizing or
optimizing valve response, refer to Stabilize/Optimize
at the end of this section. Note
Stabilize/Optimize is only available
Using the Performance Tuner (1-1-2) through the Guided Setup menu for
instrument level HC.
3
Note
Performance Tuner is not available for WARNING
instrument level AC or HC.
During Stabilize/Optimize the valve
may move, causing process fluid or
pressure to be released. To avoid
personal injury and property damage
WARNING caused by the release of process fluid
or pressure, isolate the valve from the
During performance tuning the valve process and equalize pressure on
may move, causing process fluid or both sides of the valve or bleed off
pressure to be released. To avoid the process fluid.
personal injury and property damage
caused by the release of process fluid
or pressure, isolate the valve from the
process and equalize pressure on If after completing setup and calibration the valve
both sides of the valve or bleed off seems slightly unstable or unresponsive, you can
the process fluid. improve operation by pressing the Hot Key and
selecting Stabilize/Optimize, or select
Stabilize/Optimize from the Guided Setup menu.
The Performance Tuner is used to optimize digital Stabilize/Optimize permits you to adjust valve
valve controller tuning. It can be used with digital valve response by changing the digital valve controller
controllers mounted on most sliding-stem and rotary
actuators, including Fisher and other manufacturers’ If the valve is unstable, select Decrease Response to
products. Moreover, because the Performance Tuner stabilize valve operation,. This selects the next lower
can detect internal instabilities before they become tuning set (e.g., F to E). If the valve response is
apparent in the travel response, it can generally sluggish, select Increase Response to make the valve
optimize tuning more effectively than manual tuning. more responsive. This selects the next higher tuning
Typically, the Performance Tuner takes 3 to 5 minutes set (e.g., F to G).
to tune an instrument, although tuning instruments
If after selecting Decrease Response or Increase
mounted on larger actuators may take longer. Response the valve travel overshoot is excessive
Access Performance Tuner by selecting Performance select Decrease Damping to select a damping value
Tuner from the Guided Setup menu. Follow the that allows more overshoot. Select Increase Damping
prompts on the Field Communicator display to to select a damping value that will decrease the
optimize digital valve controller tuning. overshoot. When finished, select done.
3-4 September 2013

Detailed Setup
4-4
Section 4 Detailed Setup

Menu and Quick Key Sequence Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Front Cover
Detailed Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2

Mode and Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2 4
Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Response Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
Tuning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
Travel Tuning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
Pressure Tuning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
Travel/Pressure Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
Travel/Pressure Select . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
Cutoffs and Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
Pressure Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
End Point Pressure Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
Input Characterization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
Custom Characterization Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
Dynamic Response . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
Alert Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12
Electronics Alerts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12
Sensor Alerts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
Environment Alerts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
Travel Alerts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
Travel History Alerts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15
SIS Alerts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15
Alert Record . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16
Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16
Instrument . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17
Valve and Actuator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18
SIS/Partial Stroke . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19
September 2013 4-1

Detailed Setup (1-2) Table 4-1. Factory Default Detailed Setup Parameters
Setup Parameter Default Setting(1)
Control Mode Analog
Restart Control Mode Resume Last
Zero Power Condition Valve Open(2)
Analog In Range Low 4 mA
Analog In Range High 20 mA
Note Analog Input Units mA
Feedback Connection Rotary − All(2)
Detailed Setup is not available for Instrument Travel Sensor Motion Clockwise(2)
instrument level AC. Configuration Auxiliary Terminal Action Disabled
Maximum Supply Pressure 20(2)
Pressure Units PSI
Temperature Units F
The Detailed Setup selection from the Configure menu Polling Address 0
4 allows you to configure the digital valve controller to Burst Mode Enable
Burst Command
No
3
your application. Table 4-1 lists the default settings for
Cmd 3 Configured Pressure A−B
a standard factory configuration. You can adjust
Tuning Set F(2)
actuator response, set the various modes, alerts,
Input Characteristic Linear
ranges, travel cutoffs and limits. You can also restart
Travel Limit High 125%
the instrument and set the protection. Travel Limit Low −25%
Travel/Pressure Cutoff High 99.46%
Dynamic Travel/Pressure Cutoff Low 0.50%
Response and
Set Point Rate Open(3) 0%/sec
Tuning
Set Point Rate Close(4) 0%/sec
Mode and Protection (1-2-1) Set Point Filter Lag Time(5) 0 sec
Integrator Enable Yes
Integral Gain 9.4 repeats/minute
Mode Integral Dead Zone 0.26%
Cycle Counter Alert Enable No
Instrument Mode—You can change the Cycle Counter Alert Deadband 1%
instrument mode by selecting Mode and Protection, Cycle Counter Alert Point 1000000
Travel History
Instrument Mode from the Detailed Setup menu, or Travel Accumulator Alert
Alerts No
Enable
press the Hot Key and select Instrument Mode.
Travel Accumulator Deadband 1%
Travel Accumulator Alert Point 1000000
Instrument Mode allows you to either take the Travel Deviation Alert Enable Yes
instrument Out Of Service or place it In Service. Travel Deviation Alert Point 5%
Taking the instrument Out Of Service allows you to Travel Deviation Time 9.99 sec
Pressure Deviation Alert
perform instrument calibration and also allows you to Enable
Yes
change setup variables that affect control, provided Deviation &
Other Alerts Pressure Deviation Alert Point 5 psi
the calibration/configuration protection is properly set. Pressure Deviation Alert Time 9.99 sec
See Setting Protection. Drive Signal Alert Enable Yes
Supply Pressure Alert Enable Yes
Supply Pressure Alert Point 19 psi
Travel Alert Lo Enable No
Lo Point −25%
Travel Alert Hi Enable No
Hi Point 125%
Note Travel Alerts Travel Alert Lo Lo Enable No
Lo Lo Point −25%
Some changes that require the Travel Alert Hi Hi Enable No
instrument to be taken Out Of Service Hi Hi Point 125%
will not take effect until the instrument Deadband 5%
is placed back In Service or the Shutdown Activated Yes
Electronic
instrument is restarted. Alerts
Low Power Write Fail Enable No
Non-Critical NVM Alert Enable No
−continued on next page−
4-2 September 2013

Detailed Setup
Table 4-1. Factory Default Detailed Setup Parameters Burst Mode (1-2-1-4)
(continued)
Enabling burst mode provides continuous
Default
Setup Parameter
Setting(1) communication from the digital valve controller. Burst
Instrument Time Invalid Enable No mode applies only to the transmission of burst mode
Calibration in Progress Enable No data (analog input, travel target, pressure, and travel)
Autocal in Progress Enable No and does not affect the way other data is accessed.
Diagnostics in Progress Enable No Access to information in the instrument is normally
Informational Diagnostics Data Available obtained through the poll/response of HART
Yes
Status Enable
communication. The Field Communicator or the
Integrator Saturated Hi Enable Yes
control system may request any of the information that
Integrator Saturated Lo Enable Yes
Pressure Control Active Enable Yes
is normally available, even while the instrument is in
Multi-Drop Alert Enable No
burst mode. Between each burst mode transmission
Valve Alerts Enable Yes
sent by the instrument, a short pause allows the Field
Failure Alerts Enable Yes
Communicator or control system to initiate a request.
Alert Record
Miscellaneous Alerts Enable No The instrument receives the request, processes the
response message, and then continues “bursting” the
4
Alert Record Has Entries
Yes
Enable burst mode data.
Alert Record Full Enable No
To enable burst mode, select Burst Mode, and Burst
1. The settings listed are for standard factory configuration. DVC6000 instruments
can also be ordered with custom configuration settings. For the default custom Enable from the Mode and Protection menu.
settings, refer to the order requisition.
2. If the instrument is shipped mounted on an actuator, these values depend upon
the actuator on which the instrument is mounted. Burst Enable—Yes or no. Burst mode must be
3. In firmware 2 thru 6 this parameter is labeled Minimum Opening Time.
In firmware 10 and below this parameter should be set to zero (0). enabled before you can change the burst mode
4. In firmware 2 thru 6 this parameter is labeled Minimum Closing Time.
In firmware 10 and below this parameter should be set to zero (0).
command.
5. Only available in firmware 7 and above. In firmware 7, 9, and 10 this parameter
should be set to zero (0).
Change Burst Enable—Turns Burst Mode on and
Control Mode—You can change the control off. Actual values are Burst Enable = Disabled(Polled),
mode by selecting Control Mode from the Mode and Enabled.
Protection menu, or press the Hot Key and select
Control Mode. Burst Command—There are four burst mode
commands. Command 3 is recommended for use with
Control Mode lets you define where the instrument the 333 HART Tri-Loop HART-to-analog signal
reads its set point. Follow the prompts on the Field converter. The other three are not used at this time.
Communicator display to choose one of the following
Change Burst Command—Allows you to pick the
control modes: Analog or Digital.
command to be sent from the instrument when Burst
Choose Analog if the instrument is to receive its set Mode is on. Select HART Univ Cmd 1, HART Univ
point over the 4-20 mA loop. Normally the instrument Cmd 2, HART Univ Cmd 3, or DVC6000 Cmd 148.
control mode is Analog.
Cmd 3 Configured Presssure—Command 3
Choose Digital if the instrument is to receive its set provides the following variables:
point digitally, via the HART communications link.
Primary variable—analog input in % or ma,
A third mode, Test, is also displayed. Normally the
instrument should not be in the Test mode. The Field Secondary variable—travel target in % of ranged
Communicator automatically switches to this mode travel,
whenever it needs to stroke the valve during Tertiary variable—supply or output pressure in psig,
calibration or stroke valve, for example. However, if bar, kPa, or kg/cm2. Select Cmd 3 Configured
you abort from a procedure where the instrument is in Pressure from the Burst menu to select if the output A,
the Test mode, it may remain in this mode. To take output B, differential (A−B), or supply pressure is sent.
the instrument out of the Test mode, select Control Quaternary variable—travel in % of ranged travel.
Mode then select either Analog or Digital.
Restart Control Mode—Lets you choose which

Protection
operating mode you want the instrument to be in after Protection—Some setup parameters may
a restart. Access by selecting Restart Control Mode require changing the protection with the Field
from the Mode and Protection menu. Follow the Communicator. To remove protection (change
prompts on the Field Communicator display to define protection to None) requires placing a jumper across
the restart control mode as Resume Last, Analog, or the Auxiliary terminals in the terminal box in order to
Digital. change protection.
September 2013 4-3

terminal box when prompted by the Field
Communicator.
Note
If the Auxiliary Terminal Action is Response Control (1-2-2)
configured for Auto Travel Calibration, Select Configure, Detailed Setup, and Response
be sure the jumper remains across the Control. Follow the prompts on the Field
auxiliary terminals until the Field Communicator display to configure the following
Communicator prompts you to remove response control parameters: Tuning, Travel/Pressure
it. Removing the jumper too soon will Control, Input Characterization, Custom
cause the instrument to begin auto Characterization Table, and Dynamic Response.
travel calibration.
Tuning
Travel Tuning (1-2-2-1-1)
4 WARNING WARNING
If the jumper is removed too soon, Changes to the tuning set may cause
and auto travel calibration begins, the the valve/actuator assembly to stroke.
valve will move full stroke. To avoid To avoid personal injury and property
personal injury and property damage damage caused by moving parts,
caused by the release of pressure or keep hands, tools, and other objects
process fluid, provide some away from the valve/actuator
temporary means of control for the assembly.
process.
Travel Tuning Set— There are eleven tuning sets to

Two levels of protection are available: choose from. Each tuning set provides a preselected
value for the digital valve controller gain settings.
Config & Calib—Both setup and calibration are Tuning set C provides the slowest response and M
protected. Prohibits changing calibration and protected provides the fastest response. Table 4-2 lists the
setup parameters. proportional gain, velocity gain and minor loop
feedback gain values for preselected tuning sets.
None—Neither setup nor calibration is protected.
Allows changing calibration and setup parameters. Table 4-2. Gain Values for Preselected Travel Tuning Sets
Tuning Minor Loop
Table 4-3 lists configurable parameters in the Proportional Gain Velocity Gain
Set Feedback Gain
instrument and the requirements for modifying these C 4.4 3.0 35
parameters, in terms of instrument mode and D 4.8 3.0 35
protection. E 5.5 3.0 35
F 6.2 3.1 35
To change an instrument’s protection, press the Hot G 7.2 3.6 34
key on the Field Communicator and select Protection H 8.4 4.2 31
or from the Online menu, select Configure, Detailed I 9.7 4.8 27
J 11.3 5.6 23
Setup, Mode and Protection, and Protection. Select K 13.1 6.0 18
the desired level of protection. Follow the prompts on L 15.5 6.0 12
the Field Communicator display to set the protection M 18.0 6.0 12
level. If necessary, temporarily attach the jumper to X
User Adjusted User Adjusted User Adjusted
the AUX + and AUX − terminals in the instrument (Expert)
4-4 September 2013

Detailed Setup
Table 4-3. Conditions for Modifying FIELDVUE DVC6000 Digital Valve Controller Parameters
In Service/ In Service/ Out of Service/ Out of Service/
Parameters
Config Protected Config Unprotected Config Protected Config Unprotected
Control Mode --- ---
Restart Ctrl Mode --- --- ---
Burst Mode Enable
Burst Mode Command --- --- ---
Protection
HART Tag --- ---
Message --- ---
Descriptor --- ---
Date --- ---
Valve Serial Num --- ---
Inst Serial Num --- --- ---
Polling Address --- --- ---
Relay Type --- --- ---
Max Supply Pressure --- --- ---
Actuator Style --- --- --- 4
Feedback Connection --- --- ---
Travel Sensor Motion --- --- ---
Valve Style --- --- ---
Zero Ctrl Signal --- --- ---
Analog In Units --- --- ---
Input Range High --- --- ---
Input Range Low --- --- ---
Pressure Units --- --- ---
Temp Units
Tuning Set --- ---
Prop Gain --- --- ---
Velocity Gain --- --- ---
MLFB Gain --- --- ---
Input Char --- --- ---
Define Custom Char --- --- ---
Set Pt Filter Time --- --- ---
Tvl Limit High --- --- ---
Tvl Limit Low --- --- ---
Tvl Cutoff High --- --- ---
Tvl Cutoff Low --- --- ---
Set Point Rate Open(1) --- --- ---
Set Point Rate Close(2) --- --- ---
Tvl Hi/Lo Enab
Tvl HH/LL Enab
Tvl Alert Hi Pt
Tvl Alert Lo Pt
Tvl Alert HiHi Pt
Tvl Alert LoLo Pt
Tvl Alrt DB
Tvl Dev Alrt Enab
Tvl Dev Alrt Pt
Tvl Dev Time
Cycl Cnt Alrt Enab
Cycl Count Alrt Pt
Cycl Count DB
Cycl Count
Tvl Acum Alrt Enab
Tvl Acum Alrt Pt
Tvl Acum DB
Tvl Acum
Aux Terminal Mode --- --- ---
Aux In Alrt Enab --- --- ---
Aux In Alrt State --- --- ---
Drive Alrt Enab
Supply Press Alrt
—indicates parameter may be modified for instrument mode and protection shown.
−Continued−
September 2013 4-5

Table 4-3. Conditions for Modifying FIELDVUE DVC6000 Digital Valve Controller Parameters (Continued)
In Service/ In Service/ Out of Service/ Out of Service/
Parameters
Config Protected Config Unprotected Config Protected Config Unprotected
Flash ROM Fail --- --- ---
No Free Time --- --- ---
Ref Voltage Fail --- --- ---
Drive Current Fail --- --- ---
Critical NVM Fail --- --- ---
Temp Sensor Fail --- --- ---
Press Sensor Fail --- --- ---
Tvl Sensor Fail --- --- ---
—indicates parameter may be modified for instrument mode and protection shown.
1. In firmware 2 thru 6 this parameter is labeled Minimum Opening Time.
2. In firmware 2 thru 6 this parameter is labeled Minimum Closing Time.
Table 4-5 provides tuning set selection guidelines for

Fisher, Baumann, and Gulde actuators. These tuning
4 Note sets are only recommended starting points. After you
finish setting up and calibrating the instrument, you
When selecting a tuning set for a may have to select either a higher or lower tuning set
DVC6015, DVC6025 or DVC6035 remote to get the desired response. You can use the
mount unit, it may be necessary to Performance Tuner to optimize tuning.
reduce the tuning set, due to the
effects of the long tubing between the Integral Enable—Yes or No. Enable the integral
digital valve controller and the setting to improve static performance by correcting for
actuator. error that exists between the travel target and actual
travel. Travel Integral Control is enabled by default.
In addition, you can select User Adjusted or Expert, Integral Gain—Travel Integral Gain is the ratio
which allows you to modify tuning of the digital valve of the change in output to the change in input, based
controller. With User Adjusted, you specify the on the control action in which the output is proportional
proportional gain; an algorithm in the Field to the time integral of the input.
Communicator calculates the velocity gain and minor
loop feedback gain. With Expert you can specify the Stabilize/Optimize —Stabilize/Optimize permits
proportional gain, velocity gain, and minor loop you to adjust valve response by changing the digital
feedback gain. valve controller tuning.
If the valve is unstable, select Decrease Response to

stabilize valve operation. This selects the next lower
Note tuning set (e.g., F to E). If the valve response is
sluggish, select Increase Response to make the valve
Use Expert tuning only if standard more responsive. This selects the next higher tuning
tuning has not achieved the desired set (e.g., F to G).
results.
If after selecting Decrease Response or Increase
Stabilize/Optimize or Performance Response the valve travel overshoot is excessive,
Tuner may be used to achieve the select Decrease Damping to select a damping value
desired results more rapidly than that allows more overshoot. Select Increase Damping
Expert tuning. to select a damping value that will decrease the
overshoot. When finished, select done.
4-6 September 2013

Detailed Setup
Performance Tuner Table 4-4. Gain Values for Preselected Pressure Tuning Sets
Pressure Pressure
Tuning Pressure
Integrator Minor Loop
Set Proportional Gain
Gain Feedback Gain
B 0.5 0.3 35
Note C
D
2.2
2.4
0.1
0.1
35
35
E 2.8 0.1 35
The Performance Tuner is not F 3.1 0.1 35
available for instrument level HC. G 3.6 0.1 34
H 4.2 0.1 31
I 4. 0.1 27
J 5.6 0.1 23
The Performance Tuner is used to optimize digital K 6.6 0.1 18
L 7.8 0.1 12
valve controller tuning. It can be used with digital valve M 9.0 0.1 12
controllers mounted on most sliding-stem and rotary X
actuators, including Fisher and other manufacturers’ User Adjusted User Adjusted User Adjusted
products. Moreover, because the performance tuner
(Expert)
4
can detect internal instabilities before they become
apparent in the travel response, it can generally Tuning set B is appropriate for controlling a pneumatic
optimize tuning more effectively than manual tuning. positioner. Table 4-4 lists the proportional gain,
Typically, the performance tuner takes 3 to 5 minutes pressure integrator gain and minor loop feedback gain
to tune an instrument, although tuning instruments values for preselected tuning sets.
mounted on larger actuators may take longer.
In addition, you can specify Expert tuning and
Integral Settings (1-2-2-1-2) individually set the pressure proportional gain,
pressure integrator gain, and pressure minor loop
Integral Dead Zone—A window around the feedback gain. Individually setting or changing any
Primary Setpoint in which integral action is disabled. tuning parameter will automatically change the tuning
This feature is used to eliminate friction induced limit set to X (expert).
cycles around the Primary Setpoint when the
integrator is active. The Dead Zone is configurable
from 0% to 2%, corresponding to a symmetric window
from 0% to +/−2% around the Primary Setpoint.
Default value is 0.25%.
Note
Integral Limit—Provides an upper limit to the
integrator output. The high limit is configurable from 0 When selecting a tuning set for a
to 100% of the I/P drive signal. DVC6015, DVC6025 or DVC6035 remote
mount unit, it may be necessary to
Pressure Tuning (1-2-2-1-3) reduce the tuning set, due to the
effects of the long tubing between the
digital valve controller and the
actuator.
WARNING
Changes to the tuning set may cause

the valve/actuator assembly to stroke.
To avoid personal injury and property
damage caused by moving parts, Note
keep hands, tools, and other objects
away from the valve/actuator Use Expert tuning only if standard
assembly. tuning has not achieved the desired
results.
Stabilize/Optimize and performance
tuner may be used to achieve the
Pressure Tuning Set—There are twelve Pressure
desired results more rapidly than
Tuning Sets to choose from. Each tuning set provides
Expert tuning.
a preselected value for the digital valve controller gain
settings. Tuning set B provides the fastest response.
September 2013 4-7

Table 4-5. Actuator Information for Initial Setup
Starting Travel Sensor Motion
Actuator Actuator Feedback
Actuator Size Actuator Style Tuning
Manufacturer Model Connection Relay A or C Relay B
Set
25 Piston Dbl w/ or E SStem-Standard
50 w/o Spring. See I for travels up to Depends upon pneumatic connections.
585C & 585CR 60 actuator instruction J 4 inches. SStem- See description for Travel Sensor
68, 80 manual and L Roller for longer Motion
100, 130 nameplate. M travels
30 H
34, 40 K
Spring &
657 45, 50 L SStem-Standard Clockwise Counterclockwise
Diaphragm
46, 60, 70, 76, &
80-100 M
30 H
34, 40 K
Spring &
667 45, 50 L SStem-Standard Counterclockwise Clockwise
Diaphragm
4 46, 60, 70, 76, &
80-100 M
20, 30 H
33 Spring & I
1051 & 1052 Rotary Clockwise Counterclockwise
40 Diaphragm K
60, 70 M
Fisher 30 J
Depends upon pneumatic connections.
40 Piston Dbl w/o K
1061 Rotary See description for Travel Sensor
60 Spring L
Motion
68, 80, 100, 130 M
Depends upon mounting style, see

20 G
1066SR Piston Sgl w/Spring Rotary actuator instruction manual and
27, 75 L
table 4-6
1 H
Spring &
2052 2 J Rotary Clockwise Counterclockwise
Diaphragm
3 M
For Po operating For Po operating
mode (air opens), mode (air opens),
30, 30E E
Spring & Counterclockwise Clockwise
3024C 34, 34E, 40, 40E H SStem-Standard
Diaphragm For Ps operating For Ps operating
45, 45E K
mode (air closes), mode (air closes),
Clockwise Counterclockwise
225 X(1) Air to
Spring &
GX 750 K SStem-Standard Open Close
Diaphragm
1200 M Counterclockwise Clockwise
Air to Extend 16 C Clockwise Counterclockwise
32 E SStem-Standard
Air to Retract 570 Spring & H Counterclockwise Clockwise
Baumann
10 Diaphragm E
Rotary 25 H Rotary Specify
54 J
1. X = Expert Tuning. Proportional Gain = 4.2; Velocity Gain = 3.0; Minor Loop Feedback Gain = 18.0
Table 4-6. Travel Sensor Motion Selections for the FIELDVUE Integral Enable—Yes or No. Enable the
DVC6030 on a Fisher 1066SR Actuator pressure integral setting to improve static performance
Travel Sensor Motion by correcting for error that exists between the
Mounting Style
Relay A or C Relay B pressure target and actual pressure. Pressure Integral
A Clockwise Counterclockwise Control is disabled by default.
B Counterclockwise Clockwise Integral Gain—Pressure Integral Gain (also
C Counterclockwise Clockwise called reset) is the gain factor applied to the time
D Clockwise Counterclockwise integral of the error signal between desired and actual
pressure. Changing this parameter will also change
the tuning set to Expert.
4-8 September 2013

Detailed Setup
Travel/Pressure Control (1-2-2-2) Travel Limit Hi—Defines the high limit for the
travel in percent (%) of ranged travel. It is the
Travel/Pressure Select—Determines if the maximum allowable travel (in percent of ranged travel)
instrument is set up for position or pressure control. for the valve. During operation, the travel target will
Select Travel, Pressure, Travel with Pressure not exceed this limit. When a Travel Limit High is set,
Fallback/Auto recovery or Travel with Pressure the Travel Cutoff High is deactivated, since only one of
Fallback/Manual Recovery. If the travel sensor fails, these parameters can be active. Travel Limit High is
and Travel with Pressure Fallback/Auto Recovery is deactivated by setting it to 125.0%
selected, it will return to travel control when the travel
sensor starts working again. Travel with Pressure Travel Limit Lo—Travel Limit Low defines the
Fallback/Manual recovery will stay in pressure control low limit for the travel in percent (%) of ranged travel.
until Travel Pressure Select is changed to Travel or It is the minimum allowable travel (in percent of ranged
Travel with Pressure Fallback/Auto recovery. It is not travel) for the valve. During operation, the travel target
necessary to enable the Travel Sensor Alert for will not exceed this limit. When a Travel Limit Low is
Pressure Fallback to occur. set, the Travel Cutoff Low is deactivated, since only
one of these parameters can be active. Travel Limit
Low is deactivated by setting it to −25.0%.
4
Cutoffs and Limits (1-2-2-2-2)
Cutoff Hi Change Travel Limits—Allows you to set hi and

lo travel limits. Setting a travel limit will eliminate the
Travel Cutoff High defines the high cutoff point for the corresponding Tvl/Press Cutoff.
travel in percent (%) of ranged input current. Above
this cutoff, the travel target is set to 123.0% of the Pressure Control (1-2-2-2-3)
ranged input current. When a Travel Cutoff High is set,
Pressure Range Hi—The high end of output
the Travel Limit High is deactivated, since only one of
pressure range. Enter the pressure that corresponds
these parameters can be active. Travel Cutoff Hi is
with 100% valve travel when Zero Power Condition is
deactivated by setting it to 125.0%.
closed, or 0% valve travel when Zero Power Condition
Pressure Cutoff Hi defines the high cutoff point for the is open. This pressure must be greater than the
pressure in percent (%) of pre-characterized setpoint. Pressure Range Lo.
Above this cutoff, the pressure target is set to 123.0%.
A Pressure Cutoff Hi of 99.5% is recommended to Pressure Range Lo—The low end of the output
ensure valve goes fully open. Pressure Cutoff Hi is pressure range. Enter the pressure that corresponds
deactivated by setting it to 125%. to 0% valve travel when Zero Power Condition is
closed, or 100% valve travel when Zero Power
Cutoff Lo Condition is open. This pressure must be less than the
Pressure Range Hi.
Travel Cutoff Low defines the low cutoff point for the
travel set point. Travel Cutoff Low can be used to End Point Pressure Control (1-2-2-2-5)
ensure proper seat load is applied to the valve. When
below the travel cutoff low, the output is set to zero or
to full supply pressure, depending upon the zero
power condition. A Travel Cutoff Low of 0.5% is
recommended to help ensure maximum shutoff seat
Note
loading. When a Travel Cutoff Low is set, the Travel End Point Pressure Control is only
Limit Low is deactivated, since only one of these available for instrument level ODV.
parameters can be active. Travel Cutoff Low is
deactivated by setting it to −25%.
Pressure Cutoff Lo defines the low cutoff point for the End Pt Control Enab— Select Yes or No. End
pressure in percent (%) of pre-characterized setpoint. Point Pressure Control allows the digital valve
Below this cutoff, the pressure target is set to −23%. A controller to pull back from saturation of the pneumatic
Pressure Cutoff Lo of 0.5% is recommended to help output after reaching the travel extreme. Rather than
ensure maximum shutoff seat loading. Pressure Cutoff having the instrument provide full supply pressure
Lo is deactivated by setting it to −25.0% (saturation) continuously at the travel extreme, the
digital valve controller switches to an End Point
Change Cutoffs—Allows you to set hi and lo Pressure Control where the output pressure (pressure
cutoffs. When a cutoff is set the corresponding travel controller set point) to the actuator is maintained at a
or pressure limit will be disabled. certain value. This value is configured through the
September 2013 4-9

125
Upper Operating Pressure feature. Because the digital
valve controller is constantly in control and not allowed
to reach a dormant or saturated state, it is constantly
100
testing its own pneumatic system. If there is an output
pressure deviation, for example, the instrument will
issue an alert. To ensure there is an alert when an
output pressure deviation occurs, setup the alert as
Travel Target, %
described under Pressure Deviation Alert.
PST Start Pt—Defines the travel stop the valve

needs to be at before a partial stroke test can be
initiated. Also defines the travel stop for end point
pressure control. Setting this value to Not Configured 0
will disable partial stroke tests and end point pressure

control.
4 −25
−25 0 Ranged Set Point, % 100 125
EPPC Setup Point—Used in conjunction with Input Characteristic = Linear
End Point Pressure Control, Pressure Set Point allows
the user to select a pressure to be delivered by the 125
instrument at the travel extreme. For a fail-closed

valve, this pressure must be sufficient to maintain the
fully open position. For a fail-open valve, this pressure 100
(which is automatically set to supply pressure) must

be sufficient to fully close the valve and maintain its
rated shutoff classification. For double-acting spring
Travel Target, %
return actuators, this is the differential pressure

required to either maintain the fully open or fully closed
position, depending on the valve and actuator
configuration. For a double-acting actuator without
springs with a fail-close valve, this is 95% of the
supply pressure. If the valve is fail-open, the upper 0
operating pressure for all actuator is set to the supply
pressure.
−25
EPPC Saturation Time—Pressure Saturation −25 0 Ranged Set Point, % 100 125
Time is the amount of time the digital valve controller Input Characteristic = Equal Percentage
stays in hard cutoff before switching to pressure 125
control. Default is 45 seconds.
Input Characterization (1-2-2-3) 100
Input Characterization defines the relationship

between the travel target and ranged set point.
Ranged set point is the input to the characterization
Travel Target, %
function. If the zero power condition equals closed,

then a set point of 0% corresponds to a ranged input
of 0%. If the zero power condition equals open, a set
point of 0% corresponds to a ranged input of 100%.
Travel target is the output from the characterization
function. 0
To select an input characterization, select Input

Characterization from the Response Control menu.
−25
You can select from the three fixed input −25 0 Ranged Set Point, % 100 125
characteristics shown in figure 4-1 or you can select a A6535-1/IL Input Characteristic = Quick Opening
custom characteristic. Figure 4-1 shows the
relationship between the travel target and ranged set Figure 4-1. Travel Target Versus Ranged Set Point, for Various
point for the fixed input characteristics, assuming the Input Characteristics (Zero Power Condition = Closed)
Zero Power Condition is configured as closed.
4-10 September 2013

Detailed Setup
You can specify 21 points on a custom characteristic Set Point Filter Time (Lag Time)—Slows the
curve. Each point defines a travel target, in % of response of the digital valve controller. A value
ranged travel, for a corresponding set point, in % of ranging from 0.2 to 10.0 can be used for noisy or fast
ranged set point. Set point values range from −6.25% processes to improve closed loop process control.
to 106.25%. Before modification, the custom Entering a value of 0.0 will deactivate the lag filter.
characteristic is linear. In Firmware 7, 9, and 10 this parameter should be set
Custom Characterization Table (1-2-2-4) to 0.
Select Custom Characterization Table from the

Response Control menu and follow the prompts to
define a custom input character.
With input characterization you can modify the overall Note
characteristic of the valve and instrument combination.
Selecting an equal percentage, quick opening, or Lead/Lag is only available for
custom (other than the default of linear) input instrument level ODV.
characteristic modifies the overall valve and 4
instrument characteristic. However, if you select the
linear input characteristic, the overall valve and Lead/Lag Set Point Filter—ODV devices have
instrument characteristic is the characteristic of the access to a lead-lag input filter that can be used to
valve, which is determined by the valve trim (i.e., the improve a valve’s dynamic response. The lead-lag
plug or cage). input filter is part of the set point processing routine
Dynamic Response (1-2-2-5) that reshapes the input signal before it becomes travel
set point. Lead-lag filters are characterized by lead
SP Rate Open (Minimum Opening Time in and lag time constants.
firmware 2−6)—Maximum rate (% of valve travel per
second) at which the digital valve controller will move When the valve is in its active control region (off the
to the open position regardless of the rate of input seat), the lead-lag filter improves small amplitude
current change. A value of 0 will deactivate this response by momentarily overdriving the travel set
feature and allow the valve to stroke open as fast as point. This is useful when the actuator is large and
possible. In firmware 10 and below this parameter equipped with accessories. As a result, any volume
should be set to 0. boosters that are present will be activated. The longer
the lag time, the more pronounced the overdrive.
SP Rate Close (Minimum Closing Time in Since the lead-lag input filter is used to enhance the
firmware 2−6)—Maximum rate (% of valve travel per dynamic response of a control valve, filter parameters
second) at which the digital valve controller will move should be set after the tuning parameters have been
to the close position regardless of the rate of input established.
current change. A value of 0 will deactivate this When the valve is at its seat, the lead-lag filter also
feature and allow the valve to stroke close as fast as has a boost function that sets the initial conditions of
possible. In firmware 10 and below this parameter the filter artificially low so that small amplitude signal
should be set to 0. changes appear to be large signal changes to the
filter. The boost function introduces a large spike that
momentarily overdrives the instrument and activates
any external volume boosters that may be present.
The lead-lag boost function is normally disabled
Note except for those cases where the valve must respond
to small command signals off the seat. By setting the
Set Point Filter Time (Lag Time) is only lead/lag ratio in the opening and closing directions to
available for instrument level HC, AD, 1.0, the boost function can be enabled without
and PD, firmware 7, 9, 10, and 11. introducing lead-lag dynamics in the active control
region. See table 4-7 for typical lead-lag filter settings.
September 2013 4-11

Table 4-7. Typical Lead/Lag Filter Settings for Instrument Level ODV
Parameter Description Typical Value
First order time constant. A value of 0.0 will disable the
Lag Time 0.2 sec
lead-lag filter.
Opening Lead/Lag Ratio Initial response to the filter in the opening direction. 2.0
Closing Lead/Lag Ratio Initial response to the filter in the closing direction. 2.0
Initial conditions of the lead-lag filter when the lower
Lead-Lag Boost Off
travel cutoff is active.
Alert Setup (1-2-3) Drive Signal < 10% and Calibrated Travel > 3%
The following menus are available for configuring Drive Signal > 90% and Calibrated Travel < 97%
Alerts. Items on the menus may be changed with the
instrument In Service. Protection does not need to be For the case where Zero Power Condition is defined
removed (no need to set to None). Alerts are not as open:
4 processed when a Diagnostic is in progress. Select
Configure, Detailed Setup, and Alerts. Follow the Drive Signal < 10% and Calibrated Travel < 97%
prompts on the Field Communicator display to
configure the following Alerts: Electronic Alerts, Drive Signal > 90% and Calibrated Travel > 3%
Sensor Alerts, Environment Alerts, Travel Alerts, Drive Signal Alert Enable—Yes or No. Activates
Travel History Alerts, SIS Alerts (instrument level ODV checking of the relationship between the Drive Signal
only), and Alert Record. and the calibrated travel.
Drive Signal—Shows the value of the instrument
drive signal in % (percent) of maximum drive.
Processor Impaired Alerts (1-2-3-1-3)
Note
Offline/Failed Alert Enable—If enabled, set when
The Alerts section covers alerts and the device is in a failed state and not controlling the
shutdowns. An alert, if enabled, can input.
provide information on operation and
performance issues. A shutdown, if Power Starvation Alrt Enab—When enabled, an
enabled, and upon the occurrence of alert is generated whenever power starvation is
the associated failure alert, will cause detected. Firmware 2−7.
the instrument air output to go to the
Zero Power Condition as per figure Low Power Write Fail Enable—When enabled, an
4-6. It will remain latched in that alert is generated if a write to the instrument is
condition until power to the attempted and fails when the loop current is less than
instrument is cycled and the failure 3.5 mA. Firmware 9, 10 and 11.
alert has cleared. While in shutdown
Non-Critical NVM Alert Enable—When enabled,
condition the instrument will remain
an alert is generated whenever there is a failure
powered up and able to communicate
associated with non-critical NVM (non-volatile
via HART.
memory).
Critical NVM Shutdown—When enabled, the
Electronics Alerts (1-2-3-1) instrument shuts down whenever there is a failure
associated with critical NVM (non-volatile memory).
Drive Current Shutdown— When enabled, the
instrument shuts down whenever the drive current Flash ROM Shutdown—When enabled, the
does not read as expected. instrument shuts down whenever there is a failure
associated with flash ROM (read only memory).
Drive Signal Alert (1-2-3-1-2)
Drive Signal Alert checks the drive signal and No Free Time Shutdown—When enabled, the
calibrated travel. If one of the following conditions instrument shuts down whenever there is a failure
exists for more than 20 seconds, the Drive Signal Alert associated with No Free Time.
is set.
Reference Voltage Shutdown—When enabled,
For the case where Zero Power Condition is defined the instrument shuts down whenever there is a failure
as closed: associated with the internal voltage reference.
4-12 September 2013

Detailed Setup
Sensor Alerts (1-2-3-2) point, the supply pressure alert is active. To disable
the supply pressure alert, set Supply Pressure Alert
Travel Sensor Shutdown—When enabled, the Point to zero.
instrument shuts down whenever there is a failure
associated with the travel sensor. Loop Current Validation Enable—When
enabled, the instrument shuts down whenever there is
Temp Sensor Shutdown—When enabled, the a failure associated with the measured loop current
instrument shuts down whenever there is a failure being out-of-range. Firmware 9, 10, and 11.
associated with the temperature sensor.
Travel Alerts (1-2-3-4)
Pressure Sensor Shutdown—When enabled,
the instrument shuts down whenever there is a failure Travel—Displays the actual position of the valve
associated with the pressure sensor. in percent (%) of calibrated travel.
Environment Alerts (1-2-3-3) Setpoint—The input to the characterization

function.
Auxiliary Terminal Alerts (1-2-3-3-1) 4
Auxiliary Terminal Alert Enable—Yes or No. Travel Alrt DB—Travel Alert Deadband is the
Activates checking the status of the auxiliary input travel, in percent (%) of ranged travel, required to
when the Auxiliary Terminal Mode is Auxiliary Input clear a travel alert, once it has been set. The
Alert. When enabled, the Auxiliary Input Alert is set deadband applies to both Travel Alert Hi/Lo and Travel
when the auxiliary input terminals are either open or Alert Hi Hi/Lo Lo. See figure 4-2.
closed, depending upon the selection for the Auxiliary Travel Deviation Alert (1-2-3-4-4)
Input Alert State. Factory default is No.
If the difference between the travel target and the
Auxiliary Input—The auxiliary input is a contact or actual target exceeds the Travel Deviation Alert Point
discrete input, which may be open or closed. for more than the Travel Deviation Time, the Travel
Deviation Alert is set. It remains set until the difference
Auxiliary Terminal Action—Disabled, Alert on between the travel target and the actual travel is less
Open Contact, Alert on Close Contact, or Auto Travel than the Travel Deviation Alert Point minus the Travel
Calibration. Selecting Alert on Open or Closed Contact Alert Deadband.
activates checking the status of the auxiliary input Travel Deviation Alert Enable— Select Yes or
contacts. Selecting Auto Travel Calibration permits No. When enabled, checks the difference between the
starting an automatic travel calibration procedure by travel target and the actual travel. Factory default is
placing a jumper across the auxiliary input terminals Yes.
for 3 to 5 seconds.
Supply Press Lo Alert (1-2-3-3-2) Travel Deviation Alert Point— The alert point for
the difference, expressed in percent (%), between the
travel target and the actual travel. When the difference
exceeds the alert point for more than the Travel
Deviation Time, the Travel Deviation Alert is set.
Note Travel Deviation Time— The time, in seconds,
The Supply Pressure Lo alert is not that the travel deviation must exceed the Travel
available in instrument level HC. Deviation Alert Point before the alert is set.
Travel Limit Alerts (1-2-3-4-5)
Supply Pressure Lo Alert Enable—When Travel Alert Hi Hi is set if the ranged travel rises above
enabled, the instrument sends an alert when the the alert high point. Once the alert is set, the ranged
supply pressure falls below the supply pressure alert travel must fall below the alert high high point by the
point. Factory default is Yes. Travel Alert Deadband before the alert is cleared. See
figure 4-2.
Supply—Supply Pressure displays the instrument Travel Alert Lo Lo is set if the ranged travel falls below
supply pressure in kPa,bar, psi, or kg/cm2. the alert low low point. Once the alert is set, the
ranged travel must rise above the alert low low point
Supply Pressure Lo Alert Point— When the by the Travel Alert Deadband before the alert is
supply pressure falls below the supply pressure alert cleared.
September 2013 4-13

Travel Alert Lo Point—The value of the travel, in
ALERT IS SET percent (%) of ranged travel, which, when exceeded,
sets the Travel Alert Low alert.
TRAVEL ALERT
HIGH POINT Travel Limit/Cutoff Alerts (1-2-3-4-7)
Travel Limit/Cutoff Hi Enable—Yes or No.
TRAVEL ALERT Activates the Travel Limit / Cutoff Hi alert.
DEADBAND
Travel Limit/Cutoff Lo Alert Enable—Yes or No.

Activates the Travel Limit/Cutoff Lo alert.
ALERT IS CLEARED Cutoff Hi
A6532/IL Travel Cutoff Hi defines the high cutoff point for the
Figure 4-2. Travel Alert Deadband travel in percent(%) of pre-characterized set point.
4 Above this cutoff, the travel target is set to 123.0% of
the ranged travel. Travel Cutoff Hi is deactivated by
Travel Alert Hi Hi Enable—Yes or No. Activates setting it to 125.0%.
checking of the ranged travel against the Travel Alert Pressure Cutoff Hi defines the high cutoff point for the
Hi Hi points. Factory default is No. pressure in percent (%) of pre-characterized set point.
Above this cutoff,the pressure target is set to 123.0%.
Travel Alert Lo Lo Enable—Yes or No. Activates A Pressure Cutoff Hi of 99.5% is recommended to
checking of the ranged travel against the Travel Alert ensure valve goes fully open. Pressure Cutoff Hi is
Lo Lo points. Factory default is No. deactivated by setting it to 125%
Cutoff Lo
Travel Alert Hi Hi Point—The value of the travel,
in percent (%) of ranged travel, which, when Travel Cutoff Lo defines the low cutoff point for the
exceeded, sets the Travel Alert Hi Hi alert. travel in percent (%)of pre-characterized set point.
Below this cutoff, the travel target is set to −23%. A
Travel Alert Lo Lo Point—The value of the travel, Travel Cutoff Lo of 0.5% is recommended to help
in percent (%) of ranged travel, which, when ensure maximum shutoff seat loading. Travel Cutoff
exceeded, sets the Travel Alert Lo Lo alert. Lo is deactivated by setting it to−25.0%
Pressure Cutoff Lo defines the low cutoff point for the
Travel Limit Hi/Lo Alerts (1-2-3-4-6) pressure in percent (%) of pre-characterized set point.
Below this cutoff,the pressure target is set to −23%. A
Travel Alert Hi is set if the ranged travel rises above
Pressure Cutoff Lo of 0.5% is recommended to help
the alert high point. Once the alert is set, the ranged
ensure maximum shutoff seat loading. Pressure Cutoff
travel must fall below the alert high point by the Travel
Lo is deactivated by setting it to −25.0%
Alert Deadband before the alert is cleared. See figure
4-2. Change Cutoffs—Allows you to set Cutoff Hi and
Travel Alert Lo is set if the ranged travel falls below Cutoff Lo. When a cutoff is set the corresponding
the alert low point. Once the alert is set, the ranged travel or pressure limit is disabled.
travel must rise above the alert low point by the Travel
Alert Deadband before the alert is cleared. Travel Limit Hi—Defines the high limit for the
Travel Alert Hi Enable—Yes or No. Activates maximum allowable travel (in percent of ranged travel)
checking of the ranged travel against the Travel Alert for the valve. During operation, the travel target will
High Point. Factory default is No. not exceed this limit. When a Travel Limit High is set,
the Travel Cutoff High is deactivated, since only one of
these parameters can be active. Travel Limit High is
Travel Alert Lo Enable—Yes or No. Activates deactivated by setting it to 125.0%.
checking of the ranged travel against the Travel Alert
Lo Point. Factory default is No. Travel Limit Lo—Defines the low limit for the
Travel Alert Hi Point—The value of the travel, in minimum allowable travel (in percent of ranged travel)
percent (%) of ranged travel, which, when exceeded, for the valve. During operation, the travel target will
sets the Travel Alert High alert. not exceed this limit. When a Travel Limit Low is set,
4-14 September 2013

Detailed Setup
Deadband exceeded, Deadband exceeded, and direction
new Reference Point changed, new Reference Point
established established
This amount of change is Point at which

Deadband Reference added to the Travel cycle is counted.
Accumulator. Deadband Reference
Point
Point
A6534/IL
Deadband (+/− 5%) A6533-1/IL Deadband (+/− 5%)
4
Figure 4-4. Cycle Counter Deadband (set at 10%)
Figure 4-3. Travel Accumulator Deadband (set at 10%)
the Travel Cutoff Low is deactivated, since only one of Travel Accumulator Deadband is the area around the
these parameters can be active. Travel Limit Low is travel reference point, in percent (%) of ranged travel,
deactivated by setting it to −25.0%. that was established at the last increment of the
accumulator. This area must be exceeded before a
Change Travel Limits—Allows you to set hi and change in travel can be accumulated. See figure 4-3.
lo travel limits. Setting a travel limit will eliminate the
corresponding Tvl/Press Cutoff. Travel Accumulator (1-2-3-5-3)
Travel History Alerts (1-2-3-5) Travel Accumulator Alert Enable—Yes or No.

Activates checking of the difference between the
Cycle Counter (1-2-3-5-1) Travel Accumulator value and the Travel Accumulator
Alert Point. The Travel Accumulator Alert is set when
Cycle Counter Alert Enable—Yes or No. the Travel Accumulator value exceeds the Travel
Activates checking of the difference between the Accumulator Alert Point. It is cleared after you reset
Cycle Counter and the Cycle Counter Alert point. The the Travel Accumulator to a value less than the alert
Cycle Counter Alert is set when the value exceeds the point. Factory default is No.
Cycle Counter Alert point. It is cleared after you reset
the Cycle Counter to a value less than the alert point.
Travel Accumulator—Records the total change in
Factory default is No.
travel, in percent (%) of ranged travel, since the
accumulator was last cleared. The value of the Travel
Cycle Counter—Records the number of times the Accumulator increments when the magnitude of the
travel changes direction. The change in direction must change exceeds the Travel Accumulator Deadband.
occur after the deadband has been exceeded before it See figure 4-3. You can reset the Travel Accumulator
can be counted as a cycle. See figure 4-4. You can by configuring it to zero.
reset the Cycle Counter by configuring it as zero.
Travel Accumulator Alert Point—The value of the
Cycle Counter Alert Point—The value of the Travel Accumulator, in percent (%) of ranged travel,
Cycle Counter, in cycles, which, when exceeded, sets
which, when exceeded, sets the Travel Accumulator
the Cycle Counter Alert. Alert.
Cycle Count/Travel Accumulator Deadband
SIS Alerts (1-2-3-6)
(1-2-3-5-2)
Deadband
Cycle Counter Deadband is the area around the travel
reference point, in percent (%) of ranged travel, that Note
was established at the last increment of the Cycle
Counter. This area must be exceeded before a change SIS Alerts are only available for
in travel direction can be counted as a cycle. See instrument level ODV.
figure 4-4.
September 2013 4-15

PST Pressure Limit—Defines the output Table 4-8. Alerts Included in Alert Groups for Alert Record
pressure that will cause the partial stroke test to stop. Alert Group Alerts Include in Group
For actuators that vent from the test starting point, the Travel Lo Alert
pressure limit will be a minimum value. For actuators Travel Hi Alert
that fill from the test starting point, the pressure limit Valve Alerts
Travel Lo Lo Alert
will be a maximum value. Travel Hi Hi Alert
Travel Deviation Alert
Drive Signal Alert
Pressure Deviation Alert Enable— Select Yes Flash ROM Fail
or No. This alert notifies a monitoring system when a No Free Time
deviation in the actuator pressure has occurred. This Reference Voltage Fail
Drive Current Fail
is used when the instrument is controlling via pressure Failure Alerts
Critical NVM Fail
(Pressure Control Mode is enabled) to the actuator Temperature Sensor Fail
(rather than valve position) to prevent saturation of the Pressure Sensor Fail
pneumatic output. When enabled, this alert checks the Travel Sensor Fail
difference between the target pressure and the actual Miscellaneous Alerts Auxiliary input
4 pressure. If the difference exceeds the Pressure
Deviation Alert Point for more than the pressure
deviation time, the Pressure Deviation Alert is set. It View Alert Records—Displays all recorded
remains set until the difference between the target alerts and the date and time the alerts were recorded.
pressure and the actual pressure is less than the
Pressure Deviation Alert Point. The pressure deviation Clear ALL Records—Clears the alert record. To
alert point and deviation alert time are configurable clear the alert record, all alerts in enabled groups must
and can be disabled altogether. Factory default is Yes. be inactive.
Alert Groups
Pressure Deviation Alert Point— The alert (1-2-3-6-5) HC, AD, and PD
point for the difference between the pressure target (1-2-3-7-5) ODV
and the actual pressure. When the difference exceeds
the alert point for more than the Pressure Deviation Failure Group Enable—Permits enabling the
Time, the Pressure Deviation Alert is set. After Failure Alert group. Factory default is Yes. Table 4-8
completion of the Setup Wizard or Auto Travel lists the alerts included in each of the groups.
calibration a default value of 2 psi is set. This will
generate an alert when the actuator pressure is not Valve Group Enable—Permits enabling the Valve
within $2 psi of the target pressure. Alert group. Factory default is Yes. Table 4-8 lists the
alerts included in each of the groups.
Pressure Deviation Time— The time, in
seconds, that the pressure deviation must exceed the Miscellaneous Group Enable—Permits enabling
Pressure Deviation Alert Point before the alert is set. the Miscellaneous Alert group. Factory default is No.
The Pressure Deviation Time is set to 30 seconds by Table 4-8 lists the alerts included in each of the
default. groups.
Alert Record
(1-2-3-6) HC, AD, and PD Status (1-2-4)
(1-2-3-7) ODV
Select Configure, Detailed Setup, and Status. Follow
To be recorded, an alert must both be enabled for the prompts on the Field Communicator display to
reporting, and the group in which it resides must be configure the following parameters: Instrument Time,
enabled for recording. Table 4-8 lists the alerts Calibration and Diagnostics, Operational, and
included in each of the groups. When any alert from Integrator Saturation.
an enabled group becomes active, active alerts in all Instrument Time (1-2-4-1)
enabled groups are stored.
Inst Time Invalid Enable—Yes or No. When
Alert Record Has Entries Enable—Yes or No. enabled indicates if the Instrument Time Invalid alert is
When enabled indicates when an alert has been active. Factory default is Yes.
recorded. Factory default is Yes.
Instrument Date and Time—Permits setting the
Alert Record Full Enable—Yes or No. When instrument clock. When alerts are stored in the alert
enabled indicates when the Alert Record is full. record, the record includes the time and date. The
Factory default is No. instrument clock uses a 24-hour format.
4-16 September 2013

Detailed Setup
Calibration and Diagnostics (1-2-4-2) Terminal Action, Instrument Date and Time, and Calib
Status and Type.
Calibration in Progress Enable—Yes or No.
When enabled indicates that calibration is in progress. General (1-2-5-1)
Factory default is No. HART Tag—Enter an up to 8 character HART
tag for the instrument. The HART tag is the easiest
AutoCal in Progress Enable—Yes or No. When way to distinguish between instruments in a
enabled indicates that auto calibration is in progress. multi-instrument environment. Use the HART tag to
Factory default is No. label instruments electronically according to the
requirements of your application. The tag you assign is
Diagnostic in Progress Enable—Yes or No. automatically displayed when the Field Communicator
When enabled indicates that a diagnostic test is in establishes contact with the digital valve controller at
progress. Factory default is No. power-up.
Diagnostic Data Avail Enable—Yes or No. When Message—Enter any message with up to 32
enabled indicates when there is diagnostic data characters. Message provides the most specific
user-defined means for identifying individual
4
available. Factory default is Yes.
instruments in multi-instrument environments.
Operational (1-2-4-3)
Descriptor—Enter a descriptor for the application
Pressure Control Active Enable—Yes or No. with up to 16 characters. The descriptor provides a
When enabled indicates when Pressure Control is longer user-defined electronic label to assist with more
active. Factory default is Yes. specific instrument identification than is available with
the HART tag.
Multi-Drop Enable—Yes or No. When enabled
indicates the digital valve controller is operating in a Date—Enter a date with the format MM/DD/YY.
multi-drop loop. Factory default is No. Date is a user-defined variable that provides a place to
save the date of the last revision of configuration or
Integrator Saturation(1-2-4-4) calibration information.
Integrator Sat Hi Enable—Yes or No. When Valve Serial Number—Enter the serial number
enabled indicates when the Integrator Saturated High
for the valve in the application, up to 12 characters.
alert is active. Factory default is Yes.
Instrument Serial Number—Enter the serial
Integrator Sat Lo Enable—Yes or No. When number on the instrument nameplate, up to 12
enabled indicates when the Integrator Saturated Lo characters.
alert is active. Factory default is Yes.
Polling Address—If the digital valve controller is
Integral Limit—Provides an upper limit to the used in point-to-point operation, the Polling Address is
integrator output. The high limit is configurable from 0 0. When several devices are connected in the same
to 100% of the I/P drive signal. loop, such as for split ranging, each device must be
assigned a unique polling address. The Polling
Integral Dead Zone—A window around the Address is set to a value between 0 and 15. To
Primary Setpoint in which integral action is disabled. change the polling address the instrument must be
This feature is used to eliminate friction induced limit Out Of Service.
cycles around the Primary Setpoint when the
integrator is active. The Dead Zone is configurable For the Field Communicator to be able to
from 0% to 2%, corresponding to a symmetric window communicate with a device whose polling address is
from 0% to +/−2% around the Primary Setpoint. not 0, it must be configured to automatically search for
Default value is 0.25%. all or specific connected devices.
Units (1-2-5-2)
Pressure Units—Defines the output and supply
Instrument (1-2-5) pressure units in either psi, bar, kPa, or kg/cm2.
Select Configure, Detailed Setup, and Instrument.
Follow the prompts on the Field Communicator display Temperature Units—Degrees Fahrenheit or
to configure the following Instrument parameters: Celsius. The temperature measured is from a sensor
General, Units, Analog Input Range, Relay Type, Zero mounted on the digital valve controller’s printed wiring
Power Condition, Maximum Supply Pressure, Auxiliary board.
September 2013 4-17

solenoid valve. See page 2-22 for additional
TRAVEL
RANGE
information.
HIGH
ZPC = OPEN Lo Bleed: The label affixed to the relay body
indicates whether it is a low bleed version.
ZPC = CLOSED
CALIBRATED TRAVEL, %
Zero Power Condition (Zero Control Signal in

firmware 2−6)—The position of the valve (open or
closed) when the electrical power to the instrument is
removed. Zero Power Condition (ZPC) is determined
by relay and actuator action, as shown in figure 4-6.
THE SHAPE OF
Maximum Supply Pressure—Enter the
THESE LINES DEPENDS ON maximum supply pressure in psi, bar, kPa, or kg/cm2,
THE INPUT CHARACTERISTICS
TRAVEL LINEAR CHARACTERISTIC SHOWN depending on what was selected for pressure units.
RANGE
LOW
4 Auxiliary Terminal Action—Disabled, Alert on
Open Contact, Alert on Close Contact, or Auto Travel
ANALOG INPUT
Calibration. Selecting Alert on Open or Closed Contact
INPUT RANGE mA OR % OF 4-20 mA INPUT RANGE activates checking the status of the auxiliary input
LOW HIGH
NOTE: contacts. Selecting Auto Travel Calibration permits
ZPC = ZERO POWER CONDITION
A6531-1 / IL
starting an automatic travel calibration procedure by
placing a jumper across the auxiliary input terminals
Figure 4-5. Calibrated Travel to Analog Input Relationship for 3 to 5 seconds.
Analog In Units—Permits defining the Analog Instrument Date and Time—Permits setting the
Input Units in mA or percent of 4−20 mA range. instrument clock. When alerts are stored in the alert
record, the record includes the time and date. The
Analog Input Range (1-2-5-3) instrument clock uses a 24-hour format.
Input Range Hi—Permits setting the Input Range Calib Status and Type (1-2-5-9)
High value. Input Range High should correspond to
Travel Range High, if the Zero Power Condition is Last AutoCal Status—Indicates the status of the
configured as closed. If the Zero Power Condition is last instrument calibration.
configured as open, Input Range High corresponds to
Travel Range Low. See figure 4-5. Last Calibration Type—Indicates the type of the
last instrument calibration.
Input Range Lo—Permits setting the Input Range
Low value. Input Range Low should correspond to
Travel Range Low, if the Zero Power Condition is Valve and Actuator (1-2-6)
configured as closed. If the Zero Power Condition is Select Configure, Detailed Setup, and Valve and
configured as open, Input Range Low corresponds to Actuator. Follow the prompts on the Field
Travel Range High. See figure 4-5. Communicator display to configure the following
instrument parameters: Manufacturer, Valve Serial
Relay Type—There are three categories of Number, Valve Style, Actuator Style, Travel Sensor
relays that result in combinations from which to select. Motion, and View/Edit Feedback Connection.
Relay Type: The relay type is printed on the label
affixed to the relay body. Manufacturer—Enter the manufacturer of the
A = double-acting or single-acting actuator on which the instrument is mounted. If the
B = single-acting, reverse actuator manufacturer is not listed, select Other.
C= single-acting, direct
Special App: This is used in single-acting Valve Serial Number—Enter the serial number
applications where the “unused” output port is for the valve in the application with up to 12
configured to read the pressure downstream of a characters.
4-18 September 2013

Detailed Setup
Relay Type Loss of

Loss of Power
A Pneumatic Supply
Instrument goes to zero air out- Failure direction per
Single-Acting Direct (Relay C) put at port A. actuator fail mode.
Instrument goes to full supply
Failure direction cannot
Double-Acting (Relay A) air output at port B. A goes to
be determined.
zero air output.
Instrument goes to full supply Failure direction per
Single-Acting Reverse (Relay B) air output at port B. actuator fail mode.
B
4
Figure 4-6. Zero Power Condition
Valve Style—Enter the valve style, rotary or

ACTUATOR
sliding-stem STEM TRAVEL SENSOR SHAFT
Actuator Style—Enter the actuator style, spring

and diaphragm, piston double-acting without spring,
piston single-acting with spring, or piston double-acting
with spring.
FEEDBACK ARM
Travel Sensor Motion—Select Clockwise, or

Counterclockwise. Travel Sensor Motion establishes
the proper travel sensor rotation. Determine the ADJUSTMENT
rotation by viewing the end of the travel sensor shaft ARM
from the perspective of the actuator.
For instruments with Relay A and C: If increasing

air pressure at output A causes the shaft to turn CONNECTOR
ARM
clockwise, enter Clockwise. If it causes the shaft to
turn counterclockwise, enter Counterclockwise.
Figure 4-7. Feedback Connection for Typical Sliding-Stem
For instruments with Relay B: If increasing air Actuator (Up to 4 inch Travel)
pressure at output B causes the shaft to turn
counterclockwise, enter Clockwise. If it causes the
shaft to turn clockwise, enter Counterclockwise. Partial Stroke (1-2-7)
View/Edit Feedback Connection—Select
Rotary All, SStem - Roller or SStem - Standard. For
rotary valves, enter Rotary - All, SStem - Roller. For
sliding-stem valves, if the feedback linkage consists of Note
a connector arm, adjustment arm, and feedback arm
(similar to figure 4-7), enter SStem - Standard. If the Partial Stroke is only available for
feedback linkage consists of a roller that follows a cam instrument level ODV.
(similar to figure 4-8), enter Rotary All, SStem - Roller.
Select Configure, Detailed Setup, and Partial Stroke.

Assembly Specification Sheet— Allows you to Follow the prompts on the Field Communicator display
view and edit the Specification Sheet used by to configure the following partial stroke parameters:
ValveLink Software. PST Enable and View/Edit PST Variables.
September 2013 4-19

Pause Time—The Setup Wizard sets the Partial
Stroke Pause Time to 5 seconds. This is the pause
ROLLER
time between the up and down strokes of the test. It
can be set for 5, 10, 15, 20 or 30 seconds.
PST Press Limit (single acting actuators)—During the
Setup Wizard, or Auto Calibration, the Partial Stroke
Pressure Limit value will be set to a positive value for
single-acting actuator. For those actuators that vent
from the test starting point, the pressure limit will be a
minimum value. For those actuators that fill from the
test starting point, the pressure limit will be a
STEM
CONNECTOR
maximum value. The pressure signal used for this
CAM
threshold depends on relay type and is summarized
below.
4 29B1665-A / DOC
Relay Type Pressure Signal
Figure 4-8. Feedback Connection for Typical Long-Stroke A or C Port A − Port B
Sliding-Stem Actuator (4 to 24 Inches Travel)
B Port B − Port A
B Special App. Port B
C Special App. Port A
PST Enable—Yes or No. Enables or disables
the Partial Stroke Test.
PST Press Limit (double-acting actuators)— During
PST Variables View/Edit—Follow the prompts the Setup Wizard or Auto Travel Calibration, the PST
on the Field Communicator display to enter or view Press Limit will be set to a negative value for actuators
information for following PST Variables: Max Travel where the Partial Stroke Start Point is opposite of the
Movement, Stroke Speed, Pause Time, PST Press Zero Power Condition (e.g., Partial Stroke Start Point
Limit, PST Mode Enable, Pressure Set Point, and End = Open and Zero Power Condition = Closed) and to a
Pt Control Enable. positive value for actuators where the Partial Stroke
Start Point is the same as the Zero Power Condition.
Max Travel Movement—The default value for Max
Travel Movement is 10%. It may be set to a value
between 1 and 30% in 0.1% increments.
Note Note
The Max Travel Movement is the In order to manually set the partial
percentage of total span that the valve stroke pressure limit with the correct
moves away from its operating state value, you must be able to run a valve
towards its fail state during a Partial signature test using ValveLink
Stroke Test. software. It is then possible to set the
partial stroke pressure limit with the
Field Communicator, using the
Stroke Speed—The stroke speed can be set for information generated by the valve
1%/second, 0.5%/second, 0.25%/second, signature test.
0.12%/second, or 0.06%/second. The default value for
Partial Stroke Speed is 0.25%/second.
4-20 September 2013

Detailed Setup
To manually set the partial stroke pressure limit, Table 4-9. Values for Disabling Partial Stroke Pressure Limit
disable the travel deviation alert by setting Travel Dev Partial
Alert Pt to 125%. Also disable “end point pressure Actuator
Zero Partial Stroke
control” and disable the partial stroke pressure limit by Relay Type Power Stroke Pressure
Type
Condition Start Point Limit
setting the values shown in table 4-9.
(Disabled)
Run the partial stroke test using the Field Open 0.0
Closed
Communicator. Once the test is completed download Closed Psupply
A or C
the partial stroke test results using ValveLink software. Open Psupply
Open
Single- Closed 0.0
Select the Press/Time radio button from the partial
Acting Open Psupply
stroke valve signature graph. If actuator pressure Closed
starts high and moves low, find the minimum actuator Closed 0.0
B
pressure, Pmin. Otherwise, find the maximum actuator Open 0.0
Open
pressure, Pmax. Use table 4-10 to estimate the partial Closed Psupply
stroke pressure limit.
The default value is 0. Closed
Open
Closed
−Psupply
Psupply
4
Double-
A
For double-acting valves, the differential pressure is Acting Open Psupply
Open
used. Closed −Psupply
Table 4-10. Estimates for Partial Stroke Pressure Limits

Zero Power
Actuator Style Relay Type PST Starting Point Partial Stroke Pressure Limit(1)
Condition
Open Pmin − 0.25 * (Bench Set High − Bench Set Low)
Closed
Closed Pmax + 0.25 * (Bench Set High − Bench Set Low)
A or C
Open Pmax + 0.25 * (Bench Set High − Bench Set Low)
Open
Spring and Closed Pmin − 0.25 * (Bench Set High − Bench Set Low)
Diaphragm Open Pmax + 0.25 * (Bench Set High − Bench Set Low)
Closed
Closed Pmin − 0.25 * (Bench Set High − Bench Set Low)
B
Open Pmin − 0.25 * (Bench Set High − Bench Set Low)
Open
Closed Pmax + 0.25 * (Bench Set High − Bench Set Low)
Open 0.5 * Pmin

Closed
Closed Pmax + 0.5 * (Psupply − Pmax)
A or C
Open Pmax + 0.5 * (Psupply − Pmax)
Open
Closed 0.5 * Pmin
Single-Acting Piston
Open Pmax + 0.5 * (Psupply − Pmax)
Closed
Closed 0.5 * Pmin
B
Open 0.5 * Pmin
Open
Closed Pmax + 0.5 * (Psupply − Pmax)
Open Pmin − 0.5 * (Psupply + Pmin)

Closed
Double-Acting Closed Pmax + 0.5 * (Psupply − Pmax)
A
Piston Open Pmax + 0.5 * (Psupply − Pmax)
Open
Closed Pmin − 0.5 * (Psupply + Pmin)
September 2013 4-21

4-22 September 2013

Calibration
5-5
Section 5 Calibration
Calibration Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Travel Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2

Auto Travel Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Manual Travel Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
Analog Calibration Adjust 5
Digital Calibration Adjust
Touch-Up Travel Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
Sensor Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6

Pressure Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
Output Pressure Sensor Calibration
Supply Pressure Sensor Calibration
Travel Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
DVC6010, DVC6015, DVC6030 and DVC6035 Digital Valve Controllers
DVC6020 and DVC6025 Digital Valve Controllers
Analog Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
Relay Adjust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10

Double-Acting Relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
Single-Acting Direct Relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
Single-Acting Reverse Relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
Restore Factory Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
September 2013 5-1

Calibration Overview
When a DVC6000 digital valve controller is ordered as
part of a control valve assembly, the factory mounts Note
the digital valve controller on the actuator and
connects the necessary tubing, then sets up and The Instrument Mode must be Out Of
calibrates the controller. For remote-mounted digital Service and the Protection set to None
valve controllers, the DVC6005 base unit ships before the instrument can be calibrated.
separately from the control valve and does not include
tubing, fittings or wiring. If you are operating in burst mode, we
recommend that you disable burst before
For digital valve controllers that are ordered continuing with calibration. Once
separately, recalibration of the analog input or calibration is complete, burst mode may
pressure sensors generally is unnecessary. However, then be turned back on.
after mounting on an actuator, perform the initial setup
(either auto or manual), then calibrate travel by
selecting Calibrate, Travel Calibration, and Auto
Calibration from the Configure menu. For more
detailed calibration information, refer to the following
5 calibration procedures, available from the Calibrate WARNING
menu:
During calibration the valve will move
Travel Calibration full stroke. To avoid personal injury
Auto Calibration —This procedure automatically and property damage caused by the
calibrates the travel. The calibration procedure uses release of process fluid or pressure,
the valve and actuator stops as the 0% and 100% isolate the valve from the process and
calibration points. equalize pressure on both sides of the
valve or bleed off the process fluid.
Manual Calibration —This procedure permits
manual calibration of the travel. This calibration
procedure allows you to determine the 0% and 100%
calibration points and obtain the optimum linearity on a
sliding-stem valve.
Travel Calibration
Sensor Calibration There are two procedures available for calibrating
travel:
Pressure Sensors—This procedure permits
calibrating the three pressure sensors. Normally the Auto Calibration
sensors are calibrated at the factory and should not
need calibration. Manual Calibration
Once the travel is calibrated by performing either the
Travel Sensor—This procedure permits Auto Calibration or Manual Calibration procedures, the
calibrating the travel sensor. Normally the travel travel calibration can be “touched-up” using Touch-Up
sensor is calibrated at the factory. Calibrating the Travel Calibration.
travel sensor should only be necessary if the travel
sensor is replaced.
Auto Calibration (1-3-1-1)
Analog In—This procedure permits calibrating User interaction is only required with Auto Calibrate
the analog input sensor. Normally the sensor is Travel when the feedback connection is SStem -
calibrated at the factory and should not need Standard (Sliding Stem - Standard). A feedback
calibration. connection of Rotary - All, SStem - Roller (Sliding
Stem - Roller) requires no user interaction and you
Relay Adjustment—This procedure permits
adjustment of the pneumatic relay. can start with step 6.
For a SStem - Standard feedback connection,
Restore Factory Settings—This procedure permits
interaction provides a more accurate crossover
you to restore the calibration settings back to the
adjustment. Setting crossover establishes the zero
factory settings.
degree point for the geometric correction used to
To display the calibrate menu, from the Online menu, translate the rotary motion observed by the travel
select Configure and Calibrate. sensor into the linear motion of the sliding-stem valve.
5-2 September 2013

Calibration
When a double-acting actuator is used, you will be
prompted to run the Relay Adjustment when Auto ACTUATOR
STEM
Travel Calibration is selected. Select Yes to adjust the
relay. Select No to proceed with Auto Travel
Calibration. For additional information, refer to Relay 90_
Adjustment in this section.
Select Calibrate, Travel Calibration, Auto Calibration,

then follow the prompts on the Field Communicator
display to automatically calibrate travel.
FEEDBACK ARM
1. Select the method of crossover adjustment:
manual, last value, or default. Manual is the
recommended choice. If you select Manual, the Field
Communicator will prompt you to adjust the crossover
in step 3.
If you select Last Value, the crossover setting

currently stored in the instrument is used and there
are no further user interactions with the 5
auto-calibration routine (go to step 6). Use this
selection if you cannot use manual, such as when you
cannot see the valve. A6536−3 / IL
If you select Default, an approximate value for the Figure 5-1. Crossover Point
crossover is written to the instrument and there are no
further user interactions with the auto-calibration approximately 10.0°, 1.0°, and 0.1°, respectively, to
routine (go to step 6). Use this selection only as a last the rotation of the feedback arm.
resort. Default assumes a midrange position on the
travel sensor as the crossover point, however, this If another adjustment is required, repeat step 5.
may not be an appropriate value to use for crossover Otherwise, select Done and go to step 6.
because of variations in mounting and travel sensor 6. The remainder of the auto calibration procedure is
calibration. automatic.
2. The instrument seeks the high and low drive points During calibration, the instrument seeks the high and
and the minor loop feedback (MLFB) and output bias. low end points and the minor loop feedback (MLFB)
No user interaction is required in this step. For a and output bias. By searching for the end points, the
description of these actions see step 6. instrument establishes the limits of physical travel, i.e.,
the actual travel 0 and 100% positions. This also
3. If you select Manual in step 1, you are asked to determines how far the relay beam swings to calibrate
select an adjustment source, either analog or digital. If the sensitivity of the beam position sensor.
you use a current source to adjust the crossover,
select Analog and go to step 4. If you wish to adjust Adjusting the minor loop feedback bias is done around
the current source digitally, select Digital and go to mid travel. The valve position is briefly moved back
step 5. and forth to determine the relay beam position at
quiescence. Essentially, it establishes the zero point
4. If you selected Analog as the crossover adjustment for the Minor Loop Feedback circuit. The back and
source, the Field Communicator prompts you to adjust forth motion is performed to account for hysteresis.
the current source until the feedback arm is 90° to the
Adjusting the output bias aligns the travel set point
actuator stem, as shown in figure 5-1. After you have
with the actual travel by computing the drive signal
made the adjustment, press OK and go to step 6.
required to produce 0% error. This is done while the
5. If you selected Digital as the crossover adjustment valve is at 50% travel, making very small adjustments.
source, the Field Communicator displays a menu to Calibration is complete when the “Auto Calibration has
allow you to adjust the crossover. completed” message appears.
7. Place the instrument In Service and verify that the
Select the direction and size of change required to set travel properly tracks the current source.
the feedback arm so it is 90° to the actuator stem, as
shown in figure 5-1. Selecting large, medium, and If the unit does not calibrate, refer to table 5-1 for error
small adjustments to the crossover causes changes of messages and possible remedies.
September 2013 5-3

Manual Calibration (1-3-1-2) Table 5-1. Auto Calibrate Travel Error Messages
Error Message Possible Problem and Remedy
It is recommended that you adjust the relay before
The analog input signal to the instrument
manually calibrating travel. For additional information Input current must
must be greater than 3.8 mA. Adjust the
refer to Relay Adjustment in this section. exceed 3.8 mA for
current output from the control system or the
calibration.
current source to provide at least 4.0 mA.
The Instrument Mode must be Out of Service
Place Out Of Service
and the Protection must be None before the
and ensure Calibrate
instrument can be calibrated. For information
Protection is disabled
on changing instrument protection and mode,
before calib.
see the beginning of this section.
Note The problem may be one or the other of the
following:
Relay Adjustment is only available for 1. The tuning set selected is too low and the
valve does not reach an end point in the
the double-acting relay (Relay A). allotted time. Press the Hot Key, select
Calibration Aborted.
Stabilize/Optimize then Increase Response
An end point was not
(selects next higher tuning set).
reached.
2. The tuning set selected is too high, valve
operation is unstable and does not stay at an
Two procedures are available to manually calibrate
5 travel:
end point for the allotted time. Press the Hot
Key, select Stabilize/Optimize then Decrease
Response (selects next lower tuning set).
Analog Adjust Prior to receiving this message, did the
instrument output go from zero to full supply?
If not, verify instrument supply pressure by
referring to the specifications in the
Digital Adjust appropriate actuator instruction manual. If
supply pressure is correct, check instrument
pneumatic components (I/P converter and
Invalid travel value. relay).
Check travel sensor
Analog Calibration Adjust and feedback arm If the instrument output did go from zero to
adjustments, and inst full supply prior to receiving this message,
Select Calibrate, Travel Calibration, Manual supply press. Then, then verify proper mounting by referring to the
Calibration and Analog Adjust. Connect a variable repeat Auto Calib. appropriate mounting procedure in the
current source to the instrument LOOP + and LOOP − Installation section.
terminals. The current source should be capable of Verify travel sensor adjustment by performing
the appropriate Travel Sensor Adjust
generating 4 to 20 mA. Follow the prompts on the procedure in the Calibration section.
Field Communicator display to calibrate the Making the crossover adjustment with the
instrument’s travel in percent. valve positioned at either end of its travel will
also cause this message to appear.
The instrument may have been taken out of
Aborting due to
service by a primary master. Put the
response code or
instrument into service with the primary
device status.
master or cycle the power off and on.
Note
0% Travel = Valve Closed
100% Travel = Valve Open Note
In steps 3 through 7, the accuracy of
the current source adjustment affects
the position accuracy.
1. Adjust the input current until the valve is near
mid-travel. Press OK.
3. Adjust the current source until the valve is at 0%
2. If the feedback connection is Rotary - All, SStem - travel, then press OK.
Roller, go to step 6. If the feedback connection is
SStem - Standard, you are prompted to set the
travel, then press OK.
crossover point. Adjust the current source until the
feedback arm is 90° to the actuator stem, as shown in 5. Adjust the current source until the valve is at 50%
figure 5-1. Then press OK. travel, then press OK.
5-4 September 2013

Calibration
6. Adjust the current source until the valve is at 0% 5. From the adjustment menu, select the direction and
travel, then press OK. size of change required to set the travel at 0%.
Selecting large, medium, and small adjustments
causes changes of approximately 10.0°, 1.0°, and
travel, then press OK.
0.1°, respectively, to the feedback arm rotation.
8. Adjust the current source until the valve is near 5% If another adjustment is required, repeat step 5.
travel, then press OK. Otherwise, select Done and go to step 6.
9. Adjust the current source until the valve is near 6. From the adjustment menu, select the direction and
95% travel, then press OK. size of change required to set the travel to 100%.
10. Place the instrument In Service and verify that the Selecting large, medium, and small adjustments
travel properly tracks the current source. causes changes of approximately 10.0°, 1.0°, and
0.1°, respectively, to the feedback arm rotation.
Digital Calibration Adjust If another adjustment is required, repeat step 6.
Otherwise, select Done and go to step 7.
Select Calibrate, Travel Calibration, Manual
Calibration and Digital Adjust. Connect a variable 7. From the adjustment menu, select the direction and
current source to the instrument LOOP + and LOOP − size of change required to set the travel to 50%.
terminals. The current source should be set between 4
and 20 mA. Follow the prompts on the Field
Selecting large, medium, and small adjustments
5
Communicator display to calibrate the instrument’s 0.1°, respectively, to the feedback arm rotation.
travel in percent. If another adjustment is required, repeat step 7.
8. From the adjustment menu, select the direction and
size of change required to set the travel to 0%.
Note Selecting large, medium, and small adjustments
0% Travel = Valve Closed 0.1°, respectively, to the feedback arm rotation for a
100% Travel = Valve Open sliding-stem valve or to the travel for a rotary valve.
If another adjustment is required, repeat step 8.
9. From the adjustment menu, select the direction and
1. Adjust the input current until the valve is near size of change required to set the travel to 100%.
mid-travel. Press OK. Selecting large, medium, and small adjustments
2. From the adjustment menu, select the direction and causes changes of approximately 10.0°, 1.0°, and
size of change required to adjust the output until the 0.1°, respectively, to the feedback arm rotation for a
valve is near mid-travel. Selecting large, medium, and sliding-stem valve or to the travel for a rotary valve.
small adjustments causes changes of approximately If another adjustment is required, repeat step 9.
10.0°, 1.0°, and 0.1°, respectively, to the feedback Otherwise, select Done and go to step 10.
arm rotation.
10. From the adjustment menu, select the direction
If another adjustment is required, repeat step 2. and size of change required to set the travel to near
Otherwise, select Done and go to step 3. 5%. Selecting large, medium, and small adjustments
3. If the feedback connection is Rotary - All, SStem - causes changes of approximately 10.0°, 1.0°, and
Roller, go to step 8. If the feedback connection is 0.1°, respectively, to the feedback arm rotation for a
SStem - Standard, adjust the feedback arm to the sliding-stem valve or to the travel for a rotary valve.
crossover point by using the adjustment menu. If another adjustment is required, repeat step 10.
4. From the adjustment menu, select the direction and Otherwise, select Done and go to step 11.
size of change required to set the feedback arm so it 11. From the adjustment menu, select the direction
is 90° to the actuator stem, as shown in figure 5-1. and size of change required to set the travel to near
Selecting large, medium, and small adjustments to the 95%. Selecting large, medium, and small adjustments
crossover causes changes of approximately 10.0°, causes changes of approximately 10.0°, 1.0°, and
1.0°, and 0.1°, respectively, to the feedback arm 0.1°, respectively, to the feedback arm rotation for a
rotation. sliding-stem valve or to the travel for a rotary valve.
If another adjustment is required, repeat step 4. If another adjustment is required, repeat step 11.
Otherwise, select Done and go to step 5. Otherwise, select Done and go to step 12.
September 2013 5-5

12. Place the instrument In Service and verify that the calibrated. The gauge should be capable of measuring
travel properly tracks the current source. maximum instrument supply pressure. From the
Calibrate menu, select Sensor Calibration and Press
Sensors. Depending upon the sensor you wish to
Touch-Up Travel Calibration calibrate, select either Output A Sensor or Output B
Once the travel is calibrated by performing either the Sensor. Follow the prompts on the Field
Auto or Manual Calibration procedure, the travel Communicator display to calibrate the instrument’s
calibration can be “touched-up” by shorting the output pressure sensor.
Auxiliary Terminal Connections for 3 to 5 seconds to
activate Touch-Up Calibration. Touch-Up Travel 1. Adjust the supply pressure regulator to the desired
Calibration uses Last Value for the crossover supply pressure. Press OK.
adjustment. You can abort the procedure by shorting 2. Select a) Zero only, or b) Zero and Span (gauge
the auxiliary terminals for 1 second. required) sensor calibration.
To enable Touch-Up Travel Calibration the Aux
Terminal Mode must be set to Auto Calibration. The a. If Zero only calibration is selected, wait until
instrument Operational Status during calibration is output x pressure has completely exhausted, then
Calibration in Progress. continue. Once calibration is completed, go to step
6. The output x pressure corresponds to A or B,
5 Use Touch-Up Calibration to calibrate the digital valve
controller travel whenever the I/P converter or relay is
depending on which output you are calibrating.
replaced. Do not use Touch-Up calibration for initial
calibration when mounting the instrument on an b. If Zero and Span calibration is selected, wait
actuator, or if the travel sensor assembly or printed until output x pressure has completely exhausted,
wiring board assembly was replaced. then continue. You will then be asked to wait until
output x pressure has reached full supply, then
You can use Touch-Up Travel Calibration to calibrate continue. The output x pressure corresponds to A
the digital valve controller if you suspect calibration or B, depending on which output you are
has changed due to drift. However, prior to initiating calibrating. Proceed with step 3.
Touch-Up Travel Calibration, perform a Valve
Signature diagnostic test, using ValveLink software. 3. The instrument sets the output pressure to full
This will capture the as-found data for future root supply. The following message appears:
cause analysis.
Use the Increase and

Decrease selections
until the displayed
Sensor Calibration pressure matches the
output x pressure.
Pressure Sensors (1-3-2-1)
There are three pressure sensors: output A, output B The output x pressure corresponds to A or B,
and supply. Select the appropriate menu depending depending on which output you are calibrating. Press
upon which pressure sensor you are calibrating. OK when you have read the message.
4. The value of the output pressure appears on the
display.
Note 5. From the adjustment menu, select the direction and

size of adjustment to the displayed value. Selecting
The pressure sensors are calibrated at large, medium, and small adjustments causes
the factory and should not require changes of approximately 3.0 psi/0.207 bar/20.7 kPa,
calibration. 0.30 psi/0.0207 bar/2.07 kPa, and 0.03 psi/0.00207
bar/0.207 kPa, respectively. Adjust the displayed value
until it matches the output pressure, select Done and
go to step 6.
Output Pressure Sensor Calibration 6. Place the instrument In Service and verify that the
To calibrate the output pressure sensors, connect an displayed pressure matches the measured output
external reference gauge to the output being pressure.
5-6 September 2013

Calibration
Supply Pressure Sensor Calibration
Alignment Pin
(key 46)
Note Feedback Arm
(key 79)
Supply Pressure Sensor Calibration is

not available for instrument level HC.
To calibrate the supply pressure sensor, connect an Travel B

external reference gauge to the output side of the Sensor
supply regulator. The gauge should be capable of Shaft
measuring maximum instrument supply pressure.
From the Calibrate menu, select Sensor Calibration,
Pressure Sensors, and Supply Sensor. Follow the
prompts on the Field Communicator display to
A7023 / IL 5
calibrate the instrument’s supply pressure sensor. Figure 5-2. FIELDVUE DVC6010 Digital Valve Controller
Showing Feedback Arm in Position for Travel Sensor
1. Select a) Zero Only, or b) Zero and Span (gauge Adjustment
required).
5. Place the instrument In Service and verify that the
a. If Zero Only calibration is selected, adjust the displayed pressure matches the measured supply
supply pressure regulator to remove supply pressure.
pressure from the instrument. Press OK. Once
calibration is complete, go to step 5.
Travel Sensor (1-3-2-2)

b. If Zero and Span calibration is selected, adjust
the supply pressure regulator to remove supply The travel sensor is normally adjusted at the factory
pressure from the instrument. Press OK. Adjust the and should not require adjustment. However, if the
supply regulator to the maximum instrument supply travel sensor has been replaced, adjust the travel
pressure. Press OK. Proceed with step 2. sensor by performing the appropriate procedure. See
the Maintenance section for travel sensor replacement
procedures.
2. The following message appears:
DVC6010, DVC6015, DVC6030 and

Use the Increase and DVC6035 Digital Valve Controllers
Decrease selections until
the displayed pressure
matches the instrument WARNING
supply pressure.
Failure to remove air pressure may
cause personal injury or property
Press OK when you have read this message.
damage from bursting parts.
3. The value of the pressure appears on the display.
4. From the adjustment menu, select the direction and 1. Remove supply air and remove the instrument from
size of adjustment to the displayed value. Selecting the actuator.
large, medium, and small adjustments causes
changes of approximately 3.0 psi/0.207 bar/20.7 kPa, 2. As shown in figure 5-2, align the feedback arm (key
0.30 psi/0.0207 bar/2.07 kPa, and 0.03 psi/0.00207 79) with the housing by inserting the alignment pin
bar/0.207 kPa, respectively. Adjust the displayed value (key 46) through the hole marked “A” on the feedback
until it matches the supply pressure, select Done and arm. Fully engage the alignment pin into the tapped
go to step 5. hole in the housing.
September 2013 5-7

BACK EDGE Table 5-2. Travel Sensor Counts
OF ARM PARALLEL
W/BACK OF HOUSING Digital Valve Controller Travel Sensor Counts
DVC6010 / DVC6015 700 ±200
ARM ASSEMBLY DVC6020 / DVC6025 2100 ±200
DVC6030(1) / DVC6035(2)
600 ±200
Counterclockwise shaft rotation
DVC6030(3) / DVC6035(2)
ARM ASSEMBLY PIN 3400 ±200
Clockwise shaft rotation
1. Refer to figure 2-9 to determine the desired starting position for the DVC6030
based on counterclockwise potentiometer shaft rotation.
based on potentiometer shaft; counterclockwise or clockwise.
based on clockwise potentiometer shaft rotation.
TRAVEL SENSOR
SHAFT
BACK OF HOUSING
Note
A7025 / IL
In the next step, be sure the feedback

5 Figure 5-3. FIELDVUE DVC6020 Travel Sensor Arm/Housing
Back Plane Alignment arm surface remains flush with the end
of the travel sensor shaft.
7. While observing the travel sensor counts, tighten

the screw that secures the feedback arm to the travel
sensor shaft. Be sure the travel sensor counts remain
within the tolerances listed in table 5-2. Paint the
screw to discourage tampering with the connection.
Note 8. Disconnect the Field Communicator and current

source from the instrument.
The alignment pin (key 46) is 9. Remove the alignment pin and store it in the
stored inside the digital valve instrument housing.
controller housing.
10. Install the digital valve controller on the actuator.
DVC6020 and DVC6025 Digital Valve

Controllers
WARNING
3. Loosen the screw that secures the feedback arm to
the travel sensor shaft. Position the feedback arm so Failure to remove air pressure may
that the surface of the feedback arm is flush with the cause personal injury or property
end of the travel sensor shaft. damage from bursting parts.
4. Connect a current source to the instrument LOOP

− and LOOP + terminals. Set the current source to 1. Remove supply air and remove the instrument from
any value between 4 and 20 mA. Connect the Field the actuator.
Communicator to the TALK terminals. 2. See figure 5-4 for parts identification. Disconnect
the bias spring (key 82) from the feedback arm
5. Before beginning the travel sensor adjustment, set assembly (key 84) and the arm assembly (key 91).
the instrument mode to Out Of Service and the Remove the mounting bracket (key 74) from the back
protection to None. of the digital controller. Hold the arm assembly
(key 91) so that the arm assembly points toward the
6. From the Calibrate menu select Sensor Calibration, terminal box and the arm is parallel to the back of the
Travel Sensor. Follow the prompts on the Field housing, as shown in figure 5-3.
Communicator display to adjust the travel sensor 3. Loosen the screw that secures the arm assembly
counts to the value listed in table 5-2. to the travel sensor shaft. Position the arm assembly
5-8 September 2013

Calibration
MOUNTING CAP SCREW, HEX SOCKET

ADAPTER (KEY 116)
(KEY 117)
MOUNTING BRACKET
(KEY 74)
BIAS SPRING
(KEY 82) 5
CAP SCREW, HEX HEAD
(KEY 92)
ARM ASSEMBLY PIN
ARM ASSEMBLY
(KEY 91)
FEEDBACK ARM ASSEMBLY

FEEDBACK ARM (KEY 84)
TORSION SPRING
A7024-2
(KEY 93)
Figure 5-4. FIELDVUE DVC6020 Digital Valve Controller Mounted on Fisher 1052, Size 33 Actuator
so that the outer surface is flush with the end of the

travel sensor shaft.
Note
4. Connect a current source to the instrument LOOP
− and LOOP + terminals. Set the current source to In the next step, be sure the arm
any value between 4 and 20 mA. Connect the Field assembly outer surface remains flush
Communicator to the TALK terminals. with the end of the travel sensor shaft.
5. Before beginning the travel sensor adjustment, set

the instrument mode to Out Of Service and the 7. While observing the travel sensor counts, tighten
protection to None. the screw that secures the arm assembly to the travel
sensor shaft. Be sure the travel sensor counts remain
within the tolerances listed in table 5-2. Paint the
6. From the Calibrate menu, select Sensor
screw to discourage tampering with the connection.
Calibration, Travel Sensor. Follow the prompts on the
Field Communicator display to adjust the travel sensor 8. Disconnect the Field Communicator and current
counts to the value listed in table 5-2. source from the instrument.
September 2013 5-9

9. Apply lubricant (key 63) to the pin portion of the 6. The following message appears:
arm assembly (key 91).
Use Increase and
10. Replace the mounting bracket on the back of the
instrument and reconnect the bias spring between the Decrease selections
feedback arm assembly and the arm assembly on the until the displayed
travel sensor shaft. current matches the
current source.
11. Install the digital valve controller on the actuator.
7. The value of the Analog Input appears on the
display.
Analog Input (1-3-2-3) 8. From the adjustment menu, select the direction and
size of adjustment to the displayed value. Selecting
To calibrate the analog input sensor, connect a large, medium, and small adjustments causes
variable current source to the instrument LOOP+ and changes of approximately 0.4 mA, 0.04 mA, and 0.004
LOOP− terminals. The current source should be
5 capable of generating an output of 4 to 20 mA. From
mA, respectively. Adjust the displayed value until it
matches the current source, select Done and go to
the Configure menu select Calibrate, Sensor step 9.
Calibration, and Analog In. Follow the prompts on the
Field Communicator display to calibrate the analog 9. Place the instrument In Service and verify that the
input sensor. analog input displayed matches the current source.
1. Set the current source to the target value shown on

the display. The target value is the Input Range Low
value. Press OK.
Relay Adjust (1-3-3)
2. The following message appears: Before beginning travel calibration, check the relay
adjustment. To check relay adjustment, select Relay
from the Calibrate menu, then follow the prompts on
the Field Communicator display. Replace the digital
valve controller cover when finished.
Use Increase and
Decrease selections
until the displayed
current matches the
current source. Note
Relay B and C are not user-adjustable.
3. The value of the Analog Input appears on the

Double-Acting Relay
display. The double-acting relay is designated by “Relay A” on
a label affixed to the relay itself. For double-acting
4. From the adjustment menu, select the direction and actuators, the valve must be near mid-travel to
size of adjustment to the displayed value. Selecting properly adjust the relay. The Field Communicator will
large, medium, and small adjustments causes automatically position the valve when Relay is
changes of approximately 0.4 mA, 0.04 mA, and 0.004 selected.
mA, respectively. Adjust the displayed value until it Rotate the adjustment disc, shown in figure 5-5, until
matches the current source, select Done and go to the output pressure displayed on the Field
step 5. Communicator is between 50 and 70% of supply
pressure. This adjustment is very sensitive. Be sure to
5. Set the current source to the target value shown on allow the pressure reading to stabilize before making
the display. The target value is the Input Range High another adjustment (stabilization may take up to 30
value. Press OK. seconds or more for large actuators).
5-10 September 2013

Calibration
FOR SINGLE-ACTING DIRECT RELAYS:

ROTATE ADJUSTMENT DISC IN THIS
DIRECTION UNTIL IT CONTACTS THE
BEAM
FOR DOUBLE-ACTING RELAYS:
ROTATE ADJUSTMENT DISC IN
THIS DIRECTION TO DECREASE
OUTPUT PRESSURE
ADJUSTMENT DISC
FOR DOUBLE-ACTING RELAYS:
ROTATE ADJUSTMENT DISC IN
THIS DIRECTION TO INCREASE
OUTPUT PRESSURE
5
W9034
Figure 5-5. Relay A Adjustment (Shroud Removed for Clarity)
If the low bleed relay option has been ordered Single-Acting Direct Relay
stabilization may take approximately two minutes The single-acting direct relay is designated by “Relay
longer than the standard relay. C” on a label affixed to the relay itself. Relay C
requires no adjustment.
Relay A may also adjusted for use in single-acting-
direct applications. Rotate the adjustment disc as
shown in figure 5-5 for single-acting direct operation. Single-Acting Reverse Relay
The single-acting reverse relay is designated by
“Relay B” on a label affixed to the relay itself. Relay B
is calibrated at the factory and requires no further
Single-Acting Relays adjustment.
WARNING
Restoring Factory Settings (1-3-4)
If the unused port is monitoring From the Online menu, select Configure, Calibrate,
pressure, ensure that the pressure and Restore Factory Settings. Follow the prompts on
source conforms to ISA Standard the Field Communicator display to restore calibration
7.0.01 and does not exceed the to the factory settings. You should only restore the
pressure supplied to the instrument. calibration if it is not possible to calibrate an individual
Failure to do so could result in sensor. Restoring calibration returns the calibration of
personal injury or property damage all of the sensors and the tuning set to their factory
caused by loss of process control. settings. Following restoration of the factory
calibration, the individual sensors should be
recalibrated.
September 2013 5-11

5-12 September 2013

Viewing Device Variables and Diagnostics
476-6
Section 6 Viewing Device Variables and

Diagnostics
Service Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Alert Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Device Record . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Stroke Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Partial Stroke Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5 6
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Analog Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Setpoint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Travel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Drive Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Device Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
DD Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
September 2013 6-1

Service Tools Low Power Write Alert— This alert is activated if a
write to the instrument is attempted when the loop
current is less than approximately 3.5 mA. Firmware 9,
10, and 11.
Non-Critical NVM Alert—This alert is indicated if the
checksum for data, which are not critical for instrument
operation, has failed.
Note Critical NVM Alert—This alert is indicated when the
Service Tools are not available for Non-Volatile Memory integrity test fails. Configuration
instrument level AC. data is stored in NVM. If this failure is indicated,
restart the instrument and see if it clears. If it does not
clear, replace the printed wiring board assembly.
Flash ROM Alert—This alert indicates that the Read
Only Memory integrity test failed. If this alert is
indicated, restart the instrument and see if it clears. If
it does not clear, replace the printed wiring board
assembly.
Alert Conditions (2-1) No Free Time Alert—This alert is indicated if the
instrument is unable to complete all of the configured
Instrument Alert Conditions, when enabled, detect
6 many operational and performance issues that may be
tasks. This will not occur with a properly functioning
instrument.
of interest. To view these alerts, from the Online menu
select Service Tools, Alert Conditions. The alert Reference Voltage Alert—This failure is indicated
conditions for each group of alerts are listed below. If whenever there is a failure associated with the internal
there are no alerts active for a particular group the voltage reference. If this alert is indicated replace the
group will not be displayed on the Field printed wiring board assembly.
Communicator. See table 6-1 for alert groups. Internal Sensor Out of Limits—This alert is indicated
if there is a possible problem with either the pressure
sensor or the printed wiring board assembly
Electronics— If an electronics alert is active it
will appear under ELECT ALERTS. submodule.
Variable Out of Range—This alert is indicated if
there is a possible problem with one or more of the
Drive Current following: the Analog Input Signal, the I/P converter
Drive Current Alert—This alert is indicated when the submodule, the pneumatic relay submodule, or the
drive current does not read as expected. If this alert printed wiring board.
occurs, check the connection between the I/P
converter and the printed wiring board assembly. Try Field device malfunction—The alert is indicated if
removing the I/P converter and re-installing it. If the the pressure, position, or temperature sensors are
failure does not clear, replace the I/P converter or the providing invalid readings.
printed wiring board assembly. Sensor— If a sensor alert is active it will appear
under SENSOR ALERTS.
Drive Signal
Drive Signal Alert—This alert is indicated when the Travel Sensor
Drive Signal is greater or less than the expected Travel Sensor Alert—This alert is indicated if the
maximum or minimum. sensed travel is outside the range of −25.0 to 125.0%
of calibrated travel. If this alert is indicated, check the
Processor Impaired instrument mounting and the travel sensor adjustment.
Offline/Failed Alert—This alert is indicated if a Also, check that the electrical connection from the
failure, enabled from the Self Test Shutdown menu, travel sensor is properly plugged into the printed wiring
caused an instrument shutdown. Press Enter to see board assembly. After restarting the instrument, if the
which of the specific failures caused the Offline/Failed alert does not clear, troubleshoot the printed wiring
indication. board assembly or travel sensor.
Pressure Sensors
Power Starvation Alert— This alert is activated if the Pressure Sensor Alert—This alert is indicated if the
instrument does not have enough power to function actuator pressure is outside the range of −24.0 to
properly. Firmware 7 and below. 125.0% of the calibrated pressure for more than 60
6-2 September 2013

seconds. If this alert is indicated, check the instrument Table 6-1. Alerts Included in Alert Groups for Alert Record
supply pressure. If the failure persists, ensure the Alert Group Alerts Include in Group
printed wiring board assembly is properly mounted Travel Alert Lo
onto the Module Base Assembly, and the pressure Travel Alert Hi
sensor O-rings are properly installed. If the alert does Valve Alerts
Travel Alert Lo Lo
not clear after restarting the instrument, replace the Travel Alert Hi Hi
Travel deviation
printed wiring board assembly. Drive signal
No free time
Flash ROM fail
Drive current fail
Ref Voltage fail
Failure Alerts
NVM fail
Temperature sensor fail
Note Pressure sensor fail
Travel sensor fail
The pressure sensor alert is used for Miscellaneous Alerts Auxiliary input
output A, output B, and the supply
pressure sensor. Check the pressure
values to see which sensor is causing Travel Deviation
the alert. Travel Deviation Alert—The difference between
Setpoint and Travel is greater than the configured
limits.
Travel Limit 6
Temperature Sensor Travel Alert Hi Hi—This alert is indicated if the
Temperature Sensor Alert—This alert is indicated Travel is greater than the configured limit.
when the instrument temperature sensor fails, or the
Travel Alert Lo Lo—This alert is indicated if the
sensor reading is outside of the range of −40 to 85C
Travel is lower than the configured limit.
(−40 to 185F). The temperature reading is used
internally for temperature compensation of inputs. If Travel Limit Hi/Lo
this alert is indicated, restart the instrument and see if Travel Alert Hi—This alert is indicated if the Travel
it clears. If it does not clear, replace the printed wiring is greater than the configured limit.
board assembly. Travel Alert Lo—This alert is indicated if the Travel
is lower than the configured limit.
Environment— If an environment alert is active
Travel Limit / Cutoff
it will appear under ENVIRO ALERTS.
Travel Limit/Cutoff Hi—This alert is indicated if the
Travel is limited high or the high cutoff is in effect.
Supply Pressure
Supply Pressure Lo Alert—This alert is indicated Travel Limit/Cutoff Lo—This alert is indicated if the
when supply pressure is lower than the configured Travel is limited low or the low cutoff is in effect.
limit. Travel History— If a travel history alert is active
it will appear under TVL HIST ALERTS.
Auxiliary Terminal Alert
Aux Terminal Alert—This alert is set when the Cycle Count
auxiliary input terminals are either open or closed, Cycle Count Alert—This alert is indicated if the
depending upon the selection for the Auxiliary Input Cycle Counter exceeds the Cycle Count Alert Point.
Alert State.
Travel Accumulator
Loop Current Validation Alert— This alert is Travel Accumulator Alert—This alert is indicated if
activated if the loop current is out of valid range. If the the Travel Accumulator exceeds the Travel
control system is known to output currents outside of Accumulator Alert Point.
this range, the loop current shutdown should not be SIS (ODV tier only)— If an SIS alert is active it
enabled. If this alert is indicated, clear the alert by will appear under SIS ALERTS.
restarting the instrument with the loop current verified
to be in the valid range. If the alert does not clear, Partial Stroke Test (PST)
replace the printed wiring board. Only available in Valve Stuck or Pressure/Travel Path
firmware 9, 10, and 11. Obstructed—This alert is indicated if the valve is stuck
or the pressure/travel path is obstructed.
Travel— If a travel alert is active it will appear End Point Pressure Deviation
under TRAVEL ALERTS. Pressure Deviation Alert—The alert is indicated if
September 2013 6-3

the difference between the target pressure and the Device Record (2-3)
actual pressure exceeds the Pressure Deviation Alert
Point for a period of time greater than the Pressure
Deviation Time.
Locked in Safety Alert—This alert is indicated if the Note

ODV unit is locked in the safety position.
Device Record is not available for
instrument level AC.
Alert Record
Alert Record has Entries—This alert indicates that
an alert has been saved to the alert record. From the Online menu, select Service Tools, Device
Record. Follow the prompts on the Field
Alert Record Full—This alert indicates that the alert Communicator display to view the following
record is full. parameters:
Maximum Recorded Temperature—shows the
maximum temperature the instrument has experienced
since installation.
Viewing Instrument Status (2-2)
Mininum Recorded Temperature—shows the
minimum temperature the instrument has experienced
6 since installation.
View Number of Days Powered Up—indicates

Note in hours or days the total elapsed time the instrument
Status is not available with instrument has been powered up.
level AC.
Number of Power Ups—indicates how many
times the instrument has cycled power.
To view the instrument status, from the Service Tools

menu select Status. This menu item indicates the Stroking the Digital Valve Controller
status of the Operational items listed below. The Output (2-4)
status of more than one operational item may be
indicated.
Instrument Time
Inst Time Invalid
Note
Stroke Valve is not available with
Calibration and Diagnostics instrument level AC.
Cal in Progress
Autocal in Progress From the Online menu, select Service Tools,Stroke
Valve. Follow the prompts on the Field Communicator
Diag in Progress display to select from the following:
Diag Data Avail Done—Select this if you are done. All ramping is
stopped when DONE is selected.
Operational
Ramp Open—Ramps the travel toward open at
Press Ctrl Active the rate of 1.0% per second of the ranged travel.
Multi-Drop Ramp Closed—Ramps the travel toward closed
Integrator at the rate of 1.0% per second of the ranged travel.
Integrator Sat Hi Ramp to Target—Ramps the travel to the

specified target at the rate of 1.0% per second of the
Integrator Sat Lo ranged travel.
6-4 September 2013

Step to Target—Steps the travel to the specified Device (Digital Valve Controller)
target.
The Auto Partial Stroke Test allows the partial stroke
test to be scheduled by the DVC6000. The test is
scheduled in number of hours between tests. Any
Partial Stroke Test (2-5) power cycle will reset the test clock timer.
Auxiliary Terminal
The auxiliary terminal can be used for different
Note applications. The default configuration is for a partial
stroke test initiated by shorting the contacts wired to
Partial Stroke Test is only available for the auxiliary +/− terminals of the DVC6000. Refer to
instrument level ODV. Auxiliary Terminal Wiring Length Guidelines below.
Local Push Button
A partial stroke test command may be sent to the

WARNING digital valve controller using a set of contacts wired to
the auxiliary +/− terminals. To perform a test, the
During the partial stroke test the valve contacts must be closed for 3 to 5 seconds and then
will move. To avoid personal injury
and property damage caused by the
opened. To abort the test, close the contacts for 1
second. The last set of diagnostic data is stored in the
6
release of pressure or process fluid, instrument memory for later retrieval via ValveLink
provide some temporary means of software.
control for the process.
Local DI
When configured by the user interface, the Auxiliary

The Partial Stroke Test allows the DVC6000 digital
Terminal can be used as a discrete input from a
valve controllers with instrument level ODV to perform
pressure switch, temperature switch etc., to provide an
a Valve Signature type of test while the instrument is
alert.
in service and operational. In some applications, it is
important to be able to exercise and test the valve to Auxiliary Terminal Wiring Length Guidelines
verify that it will operate when commanded. This
feature allows the user to partially stroke the valve The Auxiliary Input Terminals of a DVC6000 with
while continually monitoring the input signal. If a instrument level ODV can be used with a
demand arises, the test is aborted and the valve locally-mounted switch for initiating a partial stroke
moves to its commanded position. The partial stroke test. Some applications require that the partial stroke
valve travel is configurable between 1 and 30% test be initiated from a remote location.
maximum travel, in 0.1% increments. Data from the
last partial stroke test is stored in the instrument The length for wiring connected to the Auxiliary Input
memory for retrieval by ValveLink software. Terminals is limited by capacitance. For proper
The Partial Stroke Test allows you to perform a partial, operation of the Auxiliary Input Terminals capacitance
10%, stroke test (standard) or a custom stroke test. should not exceed 18000 pF. As with all control signal
With the custom stroke test, the stroke may be wiring, good wiring practices should be observed to
extended up to 30%. Be sure to check plant guidelines minimize adverse effect of electrical noise on the Aux
before performing a custom stroke test. The purpose Switch function.
of this test is to ensure that the valve assembly moves
upon demand. Example Calculation: Capacitance per foot or per
A partial stroke test can be initiated when the valve is meter is required to calculate the length of wire that
operating at either 4 or 20 mA (point-to-point mode). In may be connected to the Aux switch input. The wire
applications where a spurious trip is to be minimized, 4 should not exceed the capacitance limit of 18000 pF.
mA is the normal operating position. Typically the wire manufacturer supplies a data sheet
which provides all of the electrical properties of the
When enabled, a partial stroke test may be initiated by wire. The pertinent parameter is the highest possible
the device (as a scheduled, auto partial stroke test), a capacitance. If shielded wire is used, the appropriate
remote push button located in the field or at the valve, number is the “Conductor to Other Conductor &
the 475 Field Communicator, or ValveLink software. Shield” value.
September 2013 6-5

Example — 18AWG Unshielded Audio, Control Field Communicator
and Instrumentation Cable
1. Connect the Field Communicator to the LOOP
Manufacturer’s specifications include: terminals on the digital valve controller.
Nom. Capacitance Conductor to Conductor @ 1 KHz: 26 pF/ft 2. Turn on the Field Communicator.
Nom. Conductor DC Resistance @ 20 Deg. C: 5.96 Ohms/1000 ft 3. From the Online menu, select Service Tools,
Max. Operating Voltage − UL 200 V RMS (PLTC, CMG),150 V RMS Partial Stroke Test.
(ITC)
4. Select either Standard (10%) or Custom. With the
Allowable Length with this cable = 18000pF /(26pF/ft) = 692 ft
Custom Stroke Test, the stroke may be entered up to
Example — 18AWG Shielded Audio, Control and 30% with configurable stroking speed and pause time.
Instrumentation Cable 5. The currently configured Stroke, Stroking Speed,
Manufacturer’s specifications include: and Pause Time is displayed. Choose “Yes” to run the
test using these values. Choose “No” to modify the
Nom. Characteristic Impedance: 29 Ohms values. The default value for Stroke Speed is
Nom. Inductance: .15 μH/ft 0.25%/second.
Nom. Capacitance Conductor to Conductor @ 1 KHz: 51 pF/ft 6. The valve begins to move and the actual travel
Nom. Cap. Cond. to other Cond. & Shield @ 1 KHz 97 pF/ft reported by the digital valve controller is displayed on
Allowable Length with this cable = 18000pF /(97pF/ft) = 185 ft the Field Communicator.
6 7. Once the valve has reached the endpoint, check
The AUX switch input passes less than 1 mA through that the valve has reached the desired set point. The
the switch contacts, and uses less than 5V, therefore, valve should return to its original position.
neither the resistance nor the voltage rating of the
cable are critical. Ensure that switch contact corrosion For information on configuring the Partial Stroke Test,
is prevented. It is generally advisable that the switch see Partial Stroke Variables in the Detailed Setup
have gold-plated or sealed contacts. section.
6-6 September 2013

Overview (3) Variables
The following menus are available to define and/or The Variables menu is available to view additional
view information about the instrument. From the variables, including; Auxiliary Input, Temperature,
Online menu select Overview. Maximum Temperature, Minimum Temperature, Cycle
Counter, Travel Accumulator, Raw Travel Input, Run
Time, and Number of Power Ups.
Note
Note
These variables are not available for
These variables are not available for instrument level AC.
instrument level AC. Supply Pressure
alert is not available for instrument
level HC. If a value for a variable does not appear on the
display, select the variable and a detailed display of
that variable with its value will appear. A variable’s
value does not appear on the menu if the value
becomes too large to fit in the allocated space on the
Analog In—the value of the instrument analog input in
mA (milliamperes) or % (percent) of ranged input.
display, or if the variable requires special processing, 6
such as Aux Input.
Setpoint—the requested valve position in % of ranged Auxiliary Input—A discrete input that can be
travel. used with an independent limit or pressure switch. Its
value is either open or closed.
Travel—the value of the DVC6000 digital valve
controller travel in % (percent) of ranged travel. Travel Temperature—The internal temperature of the
always represents how far the valve is open. instrument is displayed in either degrees Fahrenheit or
Celsius.
Drive Signal—the value of the instrument drive signal
in % (percent) of maximum drive. Maximum Recorded Temperature—Shows the
maximum temperature the instrument has experienced
Pressure since installation.
Shows the value of the instrument supply and output Minimum Recorded Temperature—Shows the
pressures in psi, bar, kPa, or kg/cm2. Also shows the minimum temperature the instrument has experienced
output pressure differential. To display pressures may since installation.
require selecting the variable; a detail display of that
variable with its values will appear. Cycle Counter—Displays the number of times
the valve travel has cycled. Only changes in direction
of the travel after the travel has exceeded the
Pressure A—the value of Output Pressure A in deadband are counted as a cycle. Once a new cycle
psi, bar, kPa, or kg/cm2. has occurred, a new deadband around the last travel
is set. The value of the Cycle Counter can be reset
from the Cycle Count Alert menu. See page 4-15 of
Pressure B— the value of Output Pressure A in the Detailed Setup section for additional information.
psi, bar, kPa, or kg/cm2.
Travel Accumulator—contains the total change
in travel, in percent of ranged travel. The accumulator
only increments when travel exceeds the deadband.
A Minus B—the value of the output pressure Then the greatest amount of change in one direction
differential in psi, bar, kPa, or kg/cm2. from the original reference point (after the deadband
has been exceeded) will be added to the Travel
Accumulator. The value of the Travel Accumulator can
Pressure—the instrument supply pressure in psi, be reset from the Travel Accumulator menu. See page
bar, kPa, or kg/cm2. Not available in instrument level 4-15 of the Detailed Setup section for additional
HC. information.
September 2013 6-7

Table 6-2. Functions Available for Instrument Level
Instrument
Functions Available
Note Level
Communicates with the Field Communicator.
AC
Provides basic setup and calibration.
Do not use the following raw travel
input indication for calibrating the Communicates with the Field Communicator and
ValveLink software.
travel sensor. The following should In addition to above, provides: travel cutoffs and limits,
only be used for a relative indication to minimum opening and closing times, input
be sure the travel sensor is working HC characterization (linear, equal percentage, quick
and that it is moving in the correct opening, and custom), trending with ValveLink Solo,
and the following alerts: travel deviation; travel alert
direction. Perform the Travel Sensor high, low, high high, and low low; drive signal; auxiliary
Adjust procedure in the Calibration terminal; cycle counter; and travel accumulation.
section to calibrate the travel sensor. Includes all functions listed above plus (with ValveLink
software) all offline diagnostic tests (dynamic error
AD
band, drive signal, step response, and valve signature)
plus online trending
Includes all functions listed above plus all Performance
PD Diagnostics online/in-service valve testing (valve
friction, electronics, and mechanical condition)
Includes all functions listed above plus partial stroke
ODV
test and lead/lag input filter.
Raw Travel Input—Indicates the travel sensor
6 position in analog-to-digital converter counts. When
the travel sensor is operating correctly, this number Manufacturer—Identifies the manufacturer of
changes as the valve strokes. the instrument.
Model—Identifies the instrument model.
View Number of Days Powered Up—Indicates Device Revision—The revision number of the
in hours or days the total elapsed time the instrument software for communication between the Field
has been powered up. Communicator and the instrument.
Firmware Revision—The revision number of the

Number of Power Ups—Indicates how many firmware in the instrument.
times the instrument has cycled power.
Hardware Revision—The revision number of the
electrical circuitry within the instrument printed wiring
Device Information board.
The Device Information menu is available to view Instrument Level—Indicates the instrument
information about the instrument. Follow the prompts level
on the Field Communicator display to view information AC—Auto Calibrate
in the following fields: HART Tag, Device ID, HC—HART Communicating
Manufacturer, Model, Device Revision, Firmware AD—Advanced Diagnostics
Revision, Hardware Revision, Instrument Level, and PD—Performance Diagnostics
HART Universal Revision. ODV—Optimized Digital Valve
Table 6-2 lists the functions available for each

instrument level.
Hart Tag—A HART tag is a unique name (up to
eight characters) that identifies the physical HART Universal Revision—The revision
instrument. number of the HART Universal Commands which are
used as the communications protocol for the
instrument.
Device ID—Each instrument has a unique DD Information
Device Identifier. The device ID provides additional
security to prevent this instrument from accepting Contains the device description in the Field
commands meant for other instruments. Communicator.
6-8 September 2013

Maintenance and Troubleshooting
7-7
Section 7 Maintenance and Troubleshooting

Module Base Maintenance
Removing the Module Base . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
Replacing the Module Base . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
Submodule Maintenance
I/P Converter
Removing the I/P Converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
Replacing the I/P Converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
Printed Wiring Board (PWB) Assembly
Removing the Printed Wiring Board Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
Replacing the Printed Wiring Board Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7
Setting the Printed Wiring Board Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7
Pneumatic Relay 7
Removing the Pneumatic Relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7
Replacing the Pneumatic Relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7
Gauges, Pipe Plugs or Tire Valves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7
Terminal Box
Removing the Terminal Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8
Replacing the Terminal Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8
Travel Sensor
Disassembly
DVC6010 Digital Valve Controller and DVC6015 Remote
Feedback Unit (Sliding-Stem) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9
Feedback Unit (Rotary) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9
Assembly
Feedback Unit (Sliding-Stem) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14
Checking Voltage Available . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14
Checking Loop Current . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15
September 2013 7-1

The DVC6000 digital valve controller enclosure is sure the actuator cannot suddenly open
rated NEMA 4X and IP66, therefore periodic cleaning or close the valve.
of internal components is not required. If the DVC6000 Use bypass valves or completely
is installed in an area where the exterior surfaces tend shut off the process to isolate the valve
to get heavily coated or layered with industrial or from process pressure. Relieve process
atmospheric contaminants, however, it is pressure from both sides of the valve.
recommended that the vent (key 52) be periodically
inspected to ensure it is fully open. If the vent appears Use lock-out procedures to be sure
to be clogged, the vent can be removed, cleaned and that the above measures stay in effect
replaced. Lightly brush the exterior of the vent to while you work on the equipment.
remove contaminant and run a mild water/detergent Check with your process or safety
solution through the vent to ensure it is fully open. engineer for any additional measures
that must be taken to protect against
process media.
WARNING
Vent the pneumatic actuator
loading pressure and relieve any
actuator spring precompression so the
can occur from cover failure due to
actuator is not applying force to the
overpressure. Ensure that the
valve stem; this will allow for the safe
housing vent opening is open and
removal of the stem connector.
free of debris to prevent pressure
buildup under the cover.
7 WARNING
WARNING When using natural gas as the supply

medium, or for explosion proof
To avoid static discharge from the applications, the following warnings
plastic cover when flammable gases also apply:
or dust are present, do not rub or
clean the cover with solvents. To do Remove electrical power before
so could result in a spark that may removing the housing cap. Personal
cause the flammable gases or dust to injury or property damage from fire or
explode, resulting in personal injury explosion may result if power is not
or property damage. Clean with a mild disconnected before removing the cap.
detergent and water only. Remove electrical power before
disconnecting any of the pneumatic
connections.
When disconnecting any of the
WARNING pneumatic connections or any
pressure retaining part, natural gas will
seep from the unit and any connected
Avoid personal injury or property equipment into the surrounding
damage from sudden release of atmosphere. Personal injury or
process pressure or bursting of parts. property damage may result from fire
Before performing any maintenance or explosion if natural gas is used as
procedures on the DVC6000 digital the supply medium and appropriate
valve controller: preventive measures are not taken.
Always wear protective clothing, Preventive measures may include, but
gloves, and eyewear. are not limited to, one or more of the
following: Remote venting of the unit,
Do not remove the actuator from
re-evaluating the hazardous area
the valve while the valve is still classification, ensuring adequate
pressurized. ventilation, and the removal of any
Disconnect any operating lines ignition sources. For information on
providing air pressure, electric power, remote venting of this controller, refer
or a control signal to the actuator. Be to page 2-22.
7-2 September 2013

Ensure that all caps and covers Tools Required
are correctly installed before putting
this unit back into service. Failure to Table 7-1 lists the tools required for maintaining the
do so could result in personal injury or DVC6000 digital valve controller.
property damage from fire or
explosion.
Table 7-1. Tools Required
Tool Size Component
Phillips Screwdriver Relay, printed wiring board
assembly, and cover screws
Hex key 5 mm Terminal box screw
Hex key 1.5 mm Terminal box cover screw
Hex key 2.5 mm I/P converter screws
Hex key 5 mm Travel sensor screws
CAUTION Hex key 6 mm Module base screws
Open-end wrench 1/2-inch Connector Arm screw (DVC6010)
When replacing components, use only Hex key 9/64-inch Feedback arm screw
components specified by the factory. Open-end wrench 7/16-inch DVC6010 mounting bolts
Always use proper component Hex key 3/16-inch DVC6020 mounting bolts
replacement techniques, as presented
in this manual. Improper techniques or
component selection may invalidate
the approvals and the product
specifications, as indicated in table
1-2. It may also impair operations and
Removing the Module Base
the intended function of the device. To remove the module base for DVC6010, DVC6020
and DVC6030 digital valve controllers, perform the 7
following steps. Refer to figures 8-2, 8-3 and 8-4,
respectively, for key number locations.
Note
If the feedback arm (key 79) or
WARNING
feedback arm assembly (key 84) is
To avoid personal injury or equipment
removed from the digital valve damage from bursting of parts, turn
controller, the travel sensor (key 77) off the supply pressure to the digital
must be recalibrated.
valve controller and bleed off any
excess supply pressure before
attempting to remove the module
Because of the diagnostic capability of the DVC6000, base assembly from the housing.
predictive maintenance is available through the use of
ValveLink software. Using the digital valve controller,
valve and instrument maintenance can be enhanced,
thus avoiding unnecessary maintenance. For 1. For sliding-stem applications only, a protective
information on using the ValveLink software, refer to shield for the feedback linkage is attached to the side
the ValveLink software online help. of the module base assembly (see figures 2-1
and 2-2). Remove this shield and keep for reuse on
the replacement module. The replacement module will
not have this protective shield.
2. Unscrew the four captive screws in the cover

(key 43) and remove the cover from the module
Module Base Maintenance base (key 2).
The digital valve controller contains a module base
consisting of the I/P converter, printed wiring board 3. Using a 6 mm hex socket wrench, loosen the
assembly, and pneumatic relay. The module base may three-socket head screws (key 38). These screws
be easily replaced in the field without disconnecting are captive in the module base by retaining rings
field wiring or tubing. (key 154).
September 2013 7-3

TERMINAL BOX
Note MODULE BASE

ASSEMBLY
The module base is linked to the
housing by two cable assemblies.
Disconnect these cable
assemblies after you pull the
module base out of the housing.
4. Pull the module base straight out of the housing

(key 1). Once clear of the housing, swing the module
base to the side of the housing to gain access to the HOUSING CABLE TO
PRINTED WIRING
cable assemblies. CABLE TO
TRAVEL SENSOR
BOARD ASSEMBLY
W8073 TERMINAL BOX
5. The digital valve controller has two cable
assemblies, shown in figure 7-1, which connect the
module base, via the printed wiring board assembly, to Figure 7-1. Printed Wiring Board Cable Connections
the travel sensor and the terminal box. Disconnect
these cable assemblies from the printed wiring board
7 assembly on the back of the module base.
Note
To avoid affecting performance of the
CAUTION instrument, inspect the guide surface
on the module and the corresponding
To avoid affecting performance of the seating area in the housing before
instrument, take care not to damage installing the module base assembly.
the module base seal or guide surface. These surfaces must be free of dust,
Do not bump or damage the bare dirt, scratches, and contamination.
connector pins on the PWB assembly.
Damaging either the module base or Ensure the module base seal is in
guide surface may result in material good condition. Do not reuse a
damage, which could compromise the damaged or worn seal.
instruments ability to maintain a
pressure seal.
1. Ensure the module base seal (key 237) is properly
installed in the housing (key 1). Ensure the O-ring
(key 12) is in place on the module base assembly.
2. Connect the terminal box connector to the PWB
assembly (key 50). Orientation of the connector is
required.
Replacing the Module Base 3. Connect the travel sensor connector to the PWB
To replace the module base, for DVC6010, DVC6020 assembly (key 50). Orientation of the connector is
and DVC6030 digital valve controllers, perform the required.
following steps. Refer to figures 8-2, 8-3 and 8-4, 4. Insert the module base (key 2) into the housing
respectively, for key number locations. (key 1).
7-4 September 2013

5. Install three socket head screws (key 38) in the
module base into the housing. If not already installed,
press three retaining rings (key 154) into the module
base. Evenly tighten the screws in a crisscross pattern
to a final torque of 16 Nm (138 lbfin).
WARNING
Personal injury, property damage, or
disruption of process control can
result if the cable assemblies/wiring
are damaged when attaching the
cover to the module base assembly.
Ensure that the cable assemblies/ O-RING LOCATED SCREEN (FILTER)
IN I/P CONVERTER
wiring are position in the cavity of the OUTPUT PORT
LOCATED IN I/P
CONVERTER
module base so they do not get W8072 SUPPLY PORT
compressed or damaged when
attaching the cover to the module
Figure 7-2. I/P Filter Location
base assembly in step 6.
I/P Converter
6. Attach the cover (key 43) to the module base
assembly. Refer to figures 8-2 through 8-9 for key number
7
locations. The I/P converter (key 41) is located on the
7. For sliding-stem applications only, install the front of the module base.
protective shield onto the side of the replacement
module base assembly (see figures 2-1 and 2-2).
Note
After I/P converter submodule
Submodule Maintenance replacement, calibrate the digital valve
The digital valve controller’s module base contains the controller to maintain accuracy
following submodules: I/P converter, PWB assembly, specifications.
and pneumatic relay. If problems occur, these
submodules may be removed from the module base
and replaced with new submodules. After replacing a
submodule, the module base may be put back into Replacing the I/P Filter
service. A screen in the supply port beneath the I/P converter
serves as a secondary filter for the supply medium. To
replace this filter, perform the following procedure:
CAUTION 1. Remove the I/P converter (key 41) and shroud
(key 169) as described in the Removing the I/P
Exercise care when performing Converter procedure.
maintenance on the module base. 2. Remove the screen (key 231) from the supply port.
Reinstall the cover to protect the I/P
converter and gauges when servicing 3. Install a new screen in the supply port as shown in
other submodules. figure 7-2.
In order to maintain accuracy 4. Inspect the O-ring (key 39) in the I/P output port. if
specifications, do not strike or drop necessary, replace it.
the I/P converter during submodule 5. Reinstall the I/P converter (key 41) and shroud
maintenance. (key 169) as described in the Replacing the I/P
Converter procedure.
September 2013 7-5

SHROUD BACK OF PWB ASSEMBLY
(KEY 169) SUB-MODULE
DIP SWITCH
I/P CONVERTER SOCKET-HEAD

(KEY 41) SCREWS (4)
(KEY 23) UP
DOWN
BOOTS
(KEY 210)
Figure 7-3. I/P Converter TERMINAL BOX TRAVEL SENSOR

W9328
CONNECTOR CONNECTOR
PINS REMOVED FOR CONNECTOR KEYING.
Figure 7-4. DIP Switch Location

Removing the I/P Converter
1. Remove the front cover (key 43), if not already
removed. 6. After replacing the I/P converter, calibrate travel or
perform touch-up calibration to maintain accuracy
7 2. Refer to figure 7-3. Using a 2.5 mm hex socket specifications.
wrench, remove the four socket-head screws (key 23)
that attach the shroud (key 169) and I/P converter
(key 41) to the module base (key 2). PWB (Printed Wiring Board) Assembly
Refer to figures 8-2 through 8-9 for key number
3. Remove the shroud (key 169); then pull the I/P locations. The PWB assembly (key 50) is located on
converter (key 41) straight out of the module base the back of the module base assembly (key 2).
(key 2). Be careful not to damage the two electrical
leads that come out of the base of the I/P converter.
4. Ensure that the O-ring (key 39) and screen
(key 231) stay in the module base and do not come
out with the I/P converter (key 41).
Note
If the PWB assembly submodule is
replaced, calibrate and configure
Replacing the I/P Converter the digital valve controller to
1. Refer to figure 7-2. Inspect the condition of the maintain accuracy specifications.
O-ring (key 39) and screen (key 231) in the module
base (key 2). Replace them, if necessary. Apply
silicone lubricant to the O-rings.
2. Ensure the two boots (key 210) shown in figure 7-3
are properly installed on the electrical leads. Removing the Printed Wiring Board
3. Install the I/P converter (key 41) straight into the Assembly
module base (key 2), taking care that the two electrical 1. Separate the module base from the housing by
leads feed into the guides in the module base. These performing the Removing the Module Base procedure.
guides route the leads to the printed wiring board
assembly submodule. 2. Remove three screws (key 33).
3. Lift the PWB assembly (key 50) straight out of the
4. Install the shroud (key 169) over the I/P converter module base (key 2).
(key 41).
4. Ensure that the O-rings (key 40) remain in the
5. Install the four socket-head screws (key 23) and pressure sensor bosses on the module base assembly
evenly tighten them in a crisscross pattern to a final (key 2) after the PWB assembly (key 50) has been
torque of 1.6 Nm (14 lbfin). removed.
7-6 September 2013

Table 7-2. DIP Switch Configuration(1)
Operational Mode Switch Position
Multidrop Loop
UP
Point-to-Point Loop
DOWN
1. Refer to figure 7-4 for switch location.
RELAY SEAL
Replacing the PWB Assembly and Setting W8074
Figure 7-5. Pneumatic Relay Assembly

the DIP Switch
1. Apply silicone lubricant to the pressure sensor
O-rings (key 40) and install them on the pressure
sensor bosses in the module base assembly.
2. Properly orient the PWB assembly (key 50) as you
Note
install it into the module base. The two electrical leads After relay submodule replacement,
from the I/P converter (key 41) must guide into their calibrate the digital valve controller
receptacles in the PWB assembly and the pressure to maintain accuracy specifications.
sensor bosses on the module base must fit into their
receptacles in the PWB assembly.
Removing the Pneumatic Relay
7
3. Push the PWB assembly (key 50) into its cavity in
the module base. 1. Loosen the four screws that attach the relay
(key 24) to the module base. These screws are
4. Install and tighten three screws (key 33) to a torque captive in the relay.
of 1 Nm (10.1 lbfin).
2. Remove the relay.
5. Set the DIP switch on the PWB assembly
according to table 7-2. Replacing the Pneumatic Relay
1. Visually inspect the holes in the module base to
ensure they are clean and free of obstructions. If
cleaning is necessary, do not enlarge the holes.
2. Apply silicone lubricant to the relay seal and
position it in the grooves on the bottom of the relay as
Note shown in figure 7-5. Press small seal retaining tabs
into retaining slots to hold relay seal in place.
For the digital valve controller to
operate with a 4 to 20 mA control 3. Position the relay (with shroud) on the module
signal, be sure the DIP switch is in the base. Tighten the four screws, in a crisscross pattern,
point-to-point loop position, i.e., to a final torque of 2 Nm (20.7 lbfin).
switch in down position. 4. Using the Field Communicator, verify that the value
for the parameter Relay matches the relay type
installed.
6. Reassemble the module base to the housing by 5. After replacing the relay and verifying the relay
performing the Replacing the Module Base procedure. type, calibrate travel or perform touch-up calibration to
maintain accuracy specifications
7. Setup and calibrate the digital valve controller.
Gauges, Pipe Plugs, or Tire Valves
Depending on the options ordered, the DVC6000 will
be equipped with either gauges (key 47), pipe plugs
Pneumatic Relay (key 66), or tire valves (key 67). Single-acting direct
Refer to figures 8-2 through 8-9 for key number instruments will also have a screen (key 236, figure
locations. The pneumatic relay (key 24) is located on 8-6). These are located on the top of the module base
the front of the module base. next to the relay.
September 2013 7-7

Perform the following procedure to replace the Removing the Terminal Box
gauges, tire valves, or pipe plugs. Refer to figures 8-5
through 8-6 for key number locations.
WARNING
1. Remove the front cover (key 43).
2. Remove the gauge, pipe plug, or tire valve as damage caused by fire or explosion,
follows: remove power to the instrument
before removing the terminal box
For gauges (key 47), the flats are on the gauge case. cover in an area which contains a
Use a wrench on the flats of the gauge to remove the potentially explosive atmosphere or
gauge from the module base. For double-acting has been classified as hazardous.
instruments, to remove the supply gauge remove one
of the output gauges.
1. Loosen the set screw (key 58) in the cap (key 4) so
For pipe plugs (key 66) and tire valves (key 67), that the cap can be unscrewed from the terminal box.
use a wrench to remove these from the module base. 2. After removing the cap (key 4), note the location of
field wiring connections and disconnect the field wiring
3. Apply sealant (key 64) to the threads of the from the terminal box.
replacement gauges, pipe plugs, or tire valves.
3. Separate the module base from the housing by
4. Using a wrench, screw the gauges, pipe plugs, or performing the Removing the Module Base procedure.
tire valves into the module base. 4. Remove the screw (key 72). Pull the terminal box
assembly straight out of the housing.
7 5. Remove two wire retainers (key 44), internal and
external to the terminal box.
Replacing the Terminal Box
Terminal Box
Note
WARNING Inspect all O-rings for wear and
replace as necessary.
Refer to the Maintenance WARNING at
the beginning of this section.
1. Install two wire retainers (key 44), internal and
external to the terminal box.
2. Apply silicone lubricant to the O-ring (key 35) and
Refer to figures 8-2 through 8-9 for key number install the O-ring over the stem of the terminal box.
locations.
3. Insert the terminal box assembly stem into the
The terminal box is located on the housing and housing until it bottoms out. Position the terminal box
contains the terminal strip assembly for field wiring assembly so that the hole for the screw (key 72) in the
connections. terminal box aligns with the threaded hole in the
housing. Install the screw (key 72).
4. Connect the terminal box connector to the PWB
assembly (key 50). Orientation of the connector is
required.
5. Reassemble the module base to the housing by
Note performing the Replacing the Module Base procedure.
6. Reconnect the field wiring as noted in step 2 in the
This procedure also applies to the Removing the Terminal Box procedure.
DVC6005 remote terminal box.
7. Apply silicone lubricant to the O-ring (key 36) and
install the O-ring over the 2-5/8 inch threads of the
7-8 September 2013

terminal box. Use of a tool is recommended to prevent DVC6010 Digital Valve Controller and
cutting the O-ring while installing it over the threads. DVC6015 Remote Feedback Unit
8. Apply lubricant (key 63) to the 2-5/8 inch threads Refer to figure 8-2 for DVC6010 and 8-7 for DVC6015
on the terminal box to prevent seizing or galling when key number locations.
the cap is installed.
1. Remove piping and fittings from the instrument.
9. Screw the cap (key 4) onto the terminal box. 2. Disconnect the adjustment arm from the connector
10. Install a set screw (key 58) into the cap (key 4). arm and the feedback arm (see figures 2-1 and 2-2).
Loosen the cap (not more than 1 turn) to align the set 3. Remove the instrument from the actuator.
screw over one of the recesses in the terminal box.
Tighten the set screw (key 58). 4. Loosen the screw (key 80) that secures the
feedback arm (key 79) to the travel sensor shaft.
11. Apply sealant (key 64) to the conduit entrance
plug (key 62) and install it into the unused conduit 5. Remove the feedback arm (key 79) from the travel
entry of the terminal box. sensor shaft.
If disassembling a DVC6010 digital valve controller,
use step 6a. If disassembling a DVC6015 remote
feedback unit, use step 6b.
6. a. Separate the module base from the housing by
Travel Sensor performing the Removing the Module Base procedure.
b. Disconnect the three potentiometer assembly
wires from the terminals.
WARNING
Refer to the Maintenance WARNING at
7. Remove the screw (key 72) that fastens the travel
sensor assembly to the housing.
7
the beginning of this section. 8. Pull the travel sensor assembly (key 223) straight
out of the housing.
Replacing the travel sensor requires removing the DVC6020 Digital Valve Controller and
digital valve controller from the actuator.
DVC6025 Remote Feedback Unit
Refer to figure 8-3 for DVC6020 and 8-8 for DVC6025
WARNING key number locations.
1. Remove piping and fittings from the instrument.
To avoid personal injury or property 2. Remove the digital valve controller from the
damage caused by fire or explosion,
actuator.
remove power to the instrument
before removing the potentiometer in 3. Disconnect the bias spring (key 82) from the
an area which contains a potentially feedback arm assembly (key 84) and the arm
explosive atmosphere or has been assembly (key 91). Remove the mounting bracket (key
classified as hazardous. 74) from the back of the digital controller. If the torsion
spring (key 93) needs to be replaced, ensure that the
shaft on which it is installed is smooth and free of
rough spots. Replace the entire feedback arm
assembly if necessary.
Disassembly 4. Loosen the screw (key 80) that secures the arm
assembly to the travel sensor shaft.
5. Remove the arm assembly (key 91) from the travel
sensor assembly (key 77) shaft.
Note If disassembling a DVC6020 digital valve controller,
If the feedback arm (key 79) or
feedback unit use step 6b.
feedback arm assembly (key 84) is
removed from the digital valve 6. a. Separate the module base from the housing by
controller, the travel sensor (key 77) performing the Removing the Module Base procedure.
must be recalibrated. b. Disconnect the three potentiometer assembly
September 2013 7-9

7. Remove the screw (key 72) that fastens the travel 2. a. Connect the travel sensor connector to the PWB
sensor assembly to the housing. as described in the Replacing the Module Base
procedure.
8. Pull the travel sensor assembly (key 223) straight
out of the housing. b. Connect the three travel sensor wires to the
terminals.
DVC6030 Digital Valve Controller and
DVC6035 Remote Feedback Unit
key number locations.
Note
1. Remove piping and fittings from the instrument. For the DVC6015 feedback unit,
connect the potentiometer assembly
2. Remove the digital valve controller from the (key 223) wires to the terminals as
actuator. Loosen the screw (key 80) that secures the follows:
feedback arm (key 79) to the travel sensor shaft. red terminal 1
Remove the feedback arm from the travel sensor white terminal 2
shaft. black terminal 3
If disassembling a DVC6030 digital valve controller
feedback unit use step 3b. 3. Loosely assemble the bias spring (key 78), screw
(key 80), plain washer (key 163), and nut (key 81) to
3. a. Separate the module base from the housing by the feedback arm (key 79), if not already installed.
performing the Removing the Module Base procedure.
7 4. Attach the feedback arm (key 79) to the travel
b. Disconnect the three potentiometer assembly sensor shaft.
Two methods are available for adjusting the travel
4. From within the housing, unscrew the travel sensor sensor. You can use a multimeter to measure the
assembly (key 223) from the housing. potentiometer resistance, or if you have a Field
Communicator, you can use the procedure in the
Calibration section. To use the multimeter, perform
Assembly steps 5 through 13. To use the Field Communicator,
skip to step 14.
Travel Sensor Adjustment with a Multimeter
5. Align the feedback arm (key 79) to the housing
Note (key 1) by inserting the alignment pin (key 46) through
the hole marked “A” on the feedback arm. Fully
If the feedback arm (key 79) or engage the alignment pin into the tapped hole in the
feedback arm assembly (key 84) is side of the housing. Position the feedback arm so that
removed from the digital valve the surface is flush with the end of the travel sensor
controller, the travel sensor (key 77) shaft.
must be recalibrated.
6. Connect a multimeter set to a resistance range of
50,000 ohms. Measure the resistance between pins 1
and 3 of the travel sensor connector. Refer to figure
7-6 for pin location. The resistance should be between
DVC6010 Digital Valve Controller and 40,000 and 50,000 ohms.
DVC6015 Remote Feedback Unit 7. Multiply the result in step 6 by 0.046 to get a
Refer to figure 8-2 for DVC6010 and 8-7 for DVC6015 calculated resistance. The calculated resistance
key number locations. should be in the range of 1840 to 2300 ohms.
1. Insert the travel sensor assembly (key 223) into the 8. Re-range the multimeter to a resistance of 3000
housing (key 1). Secure the travel sensor assembly ohms between pins 2 and 3 of the travel sensor
with screw (key 72). connector. Refer to figure 7-6 for pin location.
If assembling a DVC6010 digital valve controller, use 9. Adjust the travel sensor shaft to obtain the
step 2a. If assembling a DVC6015 remote feedback calculated resistance determined in step 7, $100
unit, use step 2b. ohms.
7-10 September 2013

PIN 2
PIN 3
KEYED
TRAVEL SENSOR WIRES,

REMOTE MOUNT FEEDBACK UNITS
(DVC6015, DVC6025 AND DVC6035)
19B6835-B
7
TRAVEL SENSOR CONNECTOR 3
1
(DVC6010, DVC6020 AND DVC6030) CW
A6481/IL
NOTE:
1 THE POTENTIOMETER RESISTANCE BETWEEN PINS 2 AND 3 CAN BE
MEASURED AT THE CONNECTOR. INSERT TWO SHORT LENGTHS OF
22 AWG WIRE INTO THE PIN 2 AND 3 RECEPTACLES IN THE CONNECTOR.
CLIP ON LEADS FROM A DVM (DIGITAL VOLTMETER) TO MEASURE THE
RESISTANCE.
Figure 7-6. Potentiometer Resistance Measurement
12. For the DVC6010, connect the travel sensor

connector to the PWB as described in Replacing the
Note Module Base.
13. Travel sensor replacement is complete. Install the
In the next step, be sure the feedback
digital valve controller on the actuator.
arm surface remains flush with the end
of the travel sensor shaft.
Travel Sensor Adjustment with the Field
Communicator
10. While observing the resistance, tighten the screw
(key 80) to secure the feedback arm to the travel The next two steps do not apply if you used a
sensor shaft. Be sure the resistance reading remains multimeter to adjust the travel sensor. Perform these
at the calculated resistance determined in step 7, steps only if you elected to adjust the travel sensor
$100 ohms. Paint the screw to discourage tampering using the Field Communicator.
with the connection.
14. For the DVC6010, connect the travel sensor
11. Disconnect the multimeter from the travel sensor connector to the PWB as described in Replacing the
connector. Module Base.
September 2013 7-11

15. For both the DVC6010 and the DVC6015, perform
the appropriate Travel Sensor Adjust procedure in the BIAS SPRING
Calibration section. (KEY 82)
FEEDBACK
DVC6020 Digital Valve Controller and ARM
ASSEMBLY
DVC6025 Remote Feedback Unit (KEY 84)

key number locations.
1. Insert the travel sensor assembly (key 223) into the

ARM ASSEMBLY
housing. Secure the travel sensor assembly with (KEY 91)
screw (key 72).
If assembling a DVC6020 digital valve controller, use

step 2a. If assembling a DVC6025 remote feedback
unit, use step 2b. NOTE:
INSTALL BIAS SPRING WITH SMALLER DIAMETER HOOK
CONNECTED TO ARM ASSEMBLY (KEY 91) AND WITH BOTH HOOK
2. a. Connect the travel sensor connector to the PWB OPENINGS TOWARD CENTER OF BRACKET.
as described in Replacing the Module Base.
Figure 7-7. FIELDVUE DVC6020 digital Valve Controller,
b. Connect the three travel sensor wires to the
7 terminals.
Bias Spring (key 82) Installation
Travel Sensor Adjustment with a Multimeter

5. Connect a multimeter set to a resistance range of
and 3 of the travel sensor connector. Refer to figure
Note 7-6 for pin location. The resistance should be between
40,000 and 50,000 ohms.
For the DVC6025 feedback unit, 6. Multiply the result in step 5 by 0.142 to get a
connect the potentiometer assembly calculated resistance. The calculated resistance
(key 223) wires to the terminals as should be in the range of 5680 to 7100 ohms.
follows:
7. Re-range the multimeter to a resistance of 7000
red terminal 1
ohms between pins 2 and 3 of the travel sensor
white terminal 2
connector. Refer to figure 7-6 for pin location.
black terminal 3
8. Hold the arm assembly (key 91) in a fixed position
so that the arm is parallel to the housing back plane
and pointing toward the terminal box. Position the arm
assembly so that the outer surface is flush with the
3. Loosely assemble the screw (key 80), plain washer end of the travel sensor shaft.
(key 163), and nut (key 81) to the arm assembly 9. Adjust the travel sensor shaft to obtain the
(key 91), if not already installed.
calculated resistance determined in step 6, $100
ohms.
4. Attach the arm assembly (key 91) to the travel
sensor assembly (key 223) shaft.
Two methods are available for adjusting the travel

sensor. You can use a multimeter to measure the Note
potentiometer resistance, or if you have a Field
Communicator, you can use the procedure in the In the next step, be sure the arm
Calibration section. To use the multimeter, perform assembly outer surface remains flush
steps 5 through 17. To use the Field Communicator, with the end of the travel sensor shaft.
skip to step 18.
7-12 September 2013

10. While observing the resistance, tighten the screw 3. a. Connect the travel sensor connector to the PWB
(key 80) to secure the feedback arm to the travel as described in the Replacing the Module Base
sensor shaft. Be sure the resistance reading remains procedure.
at the calculated resistance determined in step 6,
b. Connect the three travel sensor wires to the
$100 ohms. Paint the screw to discourage tampering terminals.
with the connection.
11. Disconnect the multimeter from the travel sensor
connector.
12. Apply anti-seize (key 64) to the pin portion of the Note
arm assembly (key 91).
For the DVC6035 feedback unit,
13. Position the mounting bracket over the back of the connect the potentiometer assembly
digital valve controller. Push the feedback arm (key 223) wires to the terminals as
assembly (key 84) toward the housing and engage follows:
the pin of the arm assembly into the slot in the red terminal 1
feedback arm. white terminal 2
black terminal 3
14. Install the mounting bracket (key 74).
15. Install the bias spring (key 82) as shown in
figure 7-7. 4. Loosely assemble the bias spring (key 78), screw
(key 80), plain washer (key 163), and nut (key 81) to
16. For the DVC6020 only, connect the travel sensor the feedback arm (key 79), if not already installed.
Module Base. 5. Attach the feedback arm (key 79) to the travel
7
sensor shaft.
17. Travel sensor replacement is complete. Install the Two methods are available for adjusting the travel
digital valve controller on the actuator. sensor. You can use a multimeter to measure the
potentiometer resistance, or if you have a Field
Travel Sensor Adjustment with the Field Communicator, you can use the procedure in the
Communicator Calibration section. To use the multimeter, perform
steps 6 through 14. To use the Field Communicator,
The next two steps do not apply if you used a skip to step 15.
multimeter to adjust the travel sensor. Perform these
steps only if you elected to adjust the travel sensor Travel Sensor Adjustment with a Multimeter
using the Field Communicator.
6. Align the feedback arm (key 79) to the housing
18. For the DVC6020 only, connect the travel sensor (key 1) by inserting the alignment pin (key 46) through
connector to the PWB as described in Replacing the the hole marked “A” on the feedback arm. Fully
Module Base. engage the alignment pin into the tapped hole in the
housing. Position the feedback arm so that the outer
19. For both the DVC6020 and the DVC6025, perform surface is flush with the end of the travel sensor shaft.
the appropriate Travel Sensor Adjust procedure in the
Calibration section. 7. Connect a multimeter set to a resistance range of
DVC6030 Digital Valve Controller and and 3 of the travel sensor connector. Refer to figure
DVC6035 Remote Feedback Unit 7-6 for pin location. The resistance should be between
Refer to figure 8-4 for DVC6030 and 8-9 for DVC6035 40,000 and 50,000 ohms.
key number locations. 8. Multiply the result in step 7 by 0.042 to get a
calculated resistance. The calculated resistance
1. Apply lubricant (key 63) to the travel sensor should be in the range of 1680 to 2100 ohms.
assembly threads.
9. Re-range the multimeter to a resistance of 3000
2. Screw the travel sensor assembly (key 223) into ohms between pins 2 and 3 of the travel sensor
the housing until it is tight. connector. Refer to figure 7-6 for pin location.
If assembling a DVC6030 digital valve controller, use 10. Adjust the travel sensor shaft to obtain the
step 3a. If assembling a DVC6035 remote feedback calculated resistance determined in step 8, $100
unit, use step 3b. ohms.
September 2013 7-13

Troubleshooting
If communication or output difficulties are experienced
Note with the instrument, refer to the troubleshooting chart
in table 7-3. Also see the DVC6000 Troubleshooting
In the next step, be sure the feedback Checklist on page 7-18.
arm outer surface remains flush with
the end of the travel sensor shaft.
Checking Voltage Available

11. While observing the resistance, tighten the screw
(key 80) to secure the feedback arm to the travel WARNING
sensor shaft. Be sure the resistance reading remains
at the calculated resistance determined in step 8, Personal injury or property damage
$100 ohms. Paint the screw to discourage tampering caused by fire or explosion may occur
with the connection. if this test is attempted in an area
which contains a potentially explosive
12. Disconnect the multimeter from the travel sensor atmosphere or has been classified as
connector. hazardous.
13. For the DVC6030 only, connect the travel sensor
Module Base. To check the Voltage Available at the instrument,
perform the following:
14. Travel sensor replacement is complete. Install the
7 digital valve controller on the actuator as described in
1. Connect the equipment in figure 2-26 to the field
wiring in place of the FIELDVUE instrument.
the Installation section.
2. Set the control system to provide maximum output
Travel Sensor Adjustment with the Field current.
Communicator 3. Set the resistance of the 1 kilohm potentiometer
shown in figure 2-26 to zero.
The next two steps do not apply if you used a
4. Record the current shown on the milliammeter.
multimeter to adjust the travel sensor. Perform these
steps only if you elected to adjust the travel sensor 5. Adjust the resistance of the 1 kilohm potentiometer
using the Field Communicator. until the voltage read on the voltmeter is 11.0 volts.
15. For the DVC6030 only, connect the travel sensor 6. Record the current shown on the milliammeter.
connector to the PWB as described in Replacing the 7. If the current recorded in step 6 is the same as that
Module Base. recorded in step 4 (± 0.08 mA), the voltage available is
adequate.
16. For both the DVC6030 and the DVC6035, perform
the appropriate Travel Sensor Adjust procedure in the 8. If the voltage available is inadequate, refer to
Calibration section. Wiring Practices in the Installation section.
7-14 September 2013

0.020
LOOP + / TEST +
MULTIMETER
(SEE NOTES TEST −
BELOW)
LOOP + / TEST +
LOOP −
− +
4−20mA
CURRENT TEST −
SOURCE
LOOP + / TEST +
DCS SYSTEM (OR OTHER

CURRENT SOURCE) DVC6000 DIGITAL VALVE
CONTROLLER TERMINAL BOX
NOTES:
1. MULTIMETER MEASURING 0.000 TO 1.0000 VDC
7
2. TYPICAL READINGS 0.004 VDC TO 0.020 VDC
3. OHM’S LAW—V = I x R, WHERE R = PRECISION 1 OHM RESISTOR, V = I x 1, SO V= I
Figure 7-8. Check the Loop Current using the TEST Terminals
Checking the Loop Current Without

Disturbing the Loop Wiring
To check the loop current without disturbing the loop
wiring perform the following procedure.
WARNING 1. With the FIELDVUE instrument connected to a
current source connect a digital multimeter reading
Volts DC ( 0 to 1 VDC or mV scale) to the TEST
terminals as shown in figure 7-8.
if this test is attempted in an area
which contains a potentially explosive 2. The reading at the test terminals is proportional to
atmosphere or has been classified as the loop current [0.004 V = 0.004 A (4 MA)] mA of
hazardous. loop current). Refer to Specifications, table 1-2, to
determine if the current is sufficient.
September 2013 7-15

Table 7-3. Instrument Troubleshooting
Symptom Possible Cause Action
1. Analog input reading at 1a. Control mode not Analog. 1a. Check the control mode using the Field Communicator. If
instrument does not match in the Digital or Test mode, the instrument receives its set
actual current provided. point as a digital signal. Control is not based on input current.
Change Control Mode to Analog.
1b. Low control system compliance voltage. 1b. Check system compliance voltage (see Wiring Practices
in the Installation section.
1c. Instrument shutdown due to self test failure. 1c. Check instrument status using the Field Communicator
(see Viewing Instrument Status in the Viewing Device
Information section).
1d. Analog input sensor not calibrated. 1d. Calibrate the analog input sensor (see Analog Input
Calibration in the Calibration section).
1e. Current leakage. 1e. Excessive moisture in the terminal box can cause current
leakage. Typically the current will vary randomly if this is the
case. Allow the inside of the terminal box to dry, then retest.
2. Instrument will not 2a. Insufficient Voltage Available. 2a. Calculate Voltage Available (see Wiring Practices in the
communicate. Installation section). Voltage Available should be greater than
or equal to 11 VDC.
2b. Controller output Impedance too low. 2b. Install a HART filter after reviewing Control System
Compliance Voltage requirements (see Wiring Practices in the
Installation section).
2c. Cable capacitance too high. 2c. Review maximum cable capacitance limits (see Wiring
Practices in the Installation section).
2d. HART filter improperly adjusted. 2d. Check filter adjustment (see the appropriate HART filter
instruction manual).
7 2e. Improper field wiring. 2e. Check polarity of wiring and integrity of connections. Make
sure cable shield is grounded only at the control system.
2f. Controller output providing less than 4 mA to loop. 2f. Check control system minimum output setting, which
should not be less than 3.8 mA.
2g. Disconnected loop wiring cable at PWB. 2g. Verify connectors are plugged in correctly.
2h. PWB DIP switch not set properly. 2h. Check for incorrect setting or broken DIP switch on the
back of the PWB. Reset switch or replace PWB, if switch is
broken. See table 7-2 for switch setting information
2j. PWB failure. 2j. Use a 4−20 mA current source to apply power to the
instrument. Terminal voltage across the LOOP+ and LOOP−
terminals should be 9 to 10.5 VDC. If the terminal voltage is
not 9 to 10.5 VDC, replace the PWB.
2k. Polling address incorrect. 2k. Use the Field Communicator to set the polling address
(refer to the Detailed Setup section). From the Utility menu,
select Configure Communicator and Polling. Select Always
Poll. Set the instrument polling address to 0.
2l. Defective terminal box. 2l. Check continuity from each screw terminal to the
corresponding PWB connector pin. If necessary, replace the
terminal box assembly.
2m. Defective Field Communicator or ValveLink 2m. If necessary, repair or replace cable.
modem cable.
2n. ValveLink modem defective or not compatible 2n. Replace ValveLink modem.
with PC.
2p. ValveLink hardlock defective or not programmed. 2p. Replace if defective or return to factory for programming.
3. Instrument will not 3a. Travel sensor seized, will not turn. 3a. Rotate feedback arm to ensure it moves freely. If not,
calibrate, has sluggish replace the pot/bushing assy.
performance or oscillates. 3b. Broken travel sensor wire(s). 3b. Inspect wires for broken solder joint at pot or broken wire.
Replace pot/bushing assy.
3c. Travel sensor misadjusted. 3c. Perform Travel Sensor Adjust procedure in the Calibration
section.
3d. Open travel sensor. 3d. Check for continuity in electrical travel range. If necessary,
replace pot/bushing assy.
3e. Cables not plugged into PWB correctly. 3e. Inspect connections and correct.
3f. Feedback arm loose on pot. 3f. Perform Travel Sensor Adjust procedure in the Calibration
section.
3g. Feedback arm bent/damaged or bias spring 3g. Replace feedback arm and bias spring.
missing/damaged.
7-16 September 2013

Table 7-3. Instrument Troubleshooting (Continued)
Symptom Possible Cause Action
3. Instrument will not 3h. Configuration errors. 3h. Verify configuration:
calibrate, has sluggish If necessary, set protection to None.
performance or oscillates. If Out of Service, place In Service.
Check:
Travel Sensor Motion
Tuning set
Zero control signal
Feedback Connection
Control mode (should be Analog)
Restart control mode (should be Analog)
3j. Restricted pneumatic passages in I/P converter. 3j. Check screen in I/P converter supply port of the module
base. Replace if necessary. If passages in I/P converter
restricted, replace I/P converter.
3k. O-ring(s) between I/P converter ass’y missing or hard 3k. Replace O-ring(s).
and flattened losing seal.
3l. I/P converter ass’y damaged/corroded/clogged. 3l. Check for bent flapper, open coil (continuity),
contamination, staining, or dirty air supply. Coil resistance
should be between 1680 - 1860 ohms. Replace I/P assy if
damaged, corroded, clogged, or open coil.
3m. I/P converter ass’y out of spec. 3m. I/P converter ass’y nozzle may have been adjusted. Verify
drive signal (55 to 80% for double-acting; 60 to 85% for
single-acting) with the valve off the stops. Replace I/P
converter ass’y if drive signal is continuously high or low.
3n. Defective module base seal. 3n. Check module base seal for condition and position. If
necessary, replace seal.
3p. Defective relay. 3p. Depress relay beam at adjustment location in shroud, look 7
for increase in output pressure. Remove relay, inspect relay
seal. Replace relay seal or relay if I/P converter ass’y good
and air passages not blocked. Check relay adjustment.
3q. Defective 67CFR regulator, supply pressure gauge 3q. Replace 67CFR regulator.
jumps around.
4. ValveLink diagnostic tests 4a. Bent or defective pressure sensor. 4a. Replace PWB.
provide erroneous results. 4b. Pressure sensor O-ring missing. 4b. Replace O-ring.
5. Field Communicator does 5a. Battery pack not charged. 5a. Charge battery pack.
not turn on. Note: Battery pack can be charged while attached to the Field
communicator or separately. The Field Communicator is fully
operable while the battery pack is charging. Do not attempt to
charge the battery pack in a hazardous area.
September 2013 7-17

DVC6000 Troubleshooting Checklist
1. Instrument serial number as read from nameplate ________________________________________________

2. Is the digital valve controller responding to the control signal? Yes _________ No _________
If not, describe ___________________________________________________________________________

3. Measure the voltage across the “Loop −” and Loop +” terminal box screws when the commanded current is
4.0 mA and 20.0 mA: __________V @ 4.0 mA __________V @ 20.0 mA.
(For a DVC6000 pwb built prior to 2003, these values should be around 9.4 V @ 4.0 mA. For a DVC6000 pwb
built after 2003, these values should be around 9.6 V @ 4.0 mA and 10.3 V @ 20 mA.
4. Is it possible to communicate via HART to the digital valve controller? Yes _________ No _________
5. What is the Diagnostic Tier of the digital valve controller? AC ____ HC ____ AD ____ PD ____ ODV____
6. What is the firmware version of the digital valve controller? ______________
7. What is the hardware version of the digital valve controller? ______________
8. Is the digital valve controller’s Instrument Mode “In Service”? Yes _________ No _________
9. Is the digital valve controller’s Control Mode set to “Analog”? Yes _________ No _________
10. Is it on Travel or Pressure control?
11. What are the following parameter readings?
7
Input Signal _________ Drive Signal _________%
Supply Pressure _________ Pressure A _________ Pressure B _________
Travel Target _________% Travel _________%

12. What are the following alert readings?
Fail alerts _______________________________________________________________________________
Valve alerts _____________________________________________________________________________
Operational status ________________________________________________________________________
Alert event record entries __________________________________________________________________

13. Export ValveLink data (if available) for the device (Status Monitor, Detailed Setup, etc.).
Mounting
1. Which DVC6000 do you have? DVC6010 ____ DVC6020 ____ DVC6030 ____ Remote Mount? ____
2. What Make, Brand, Style, Size, etc. actuator is the DVC6000 mounted on? ________________________
3. What is the full travel of the valve? ____________________________________________________________
4. What is the Mounting Kit part number? _________________________________________________________
5. If mounting kits are made by LBP/Customer, please provide pictures of installation.
6. Is the Mounting kit installed per the instructions? Yes _________ No _________
7. What is the safe position of the valve? Fail closed _________ Fail open _________
8. For a DVC6010 or DVC6030: During full travel of the actuator, does the DVC6000 feedback arm move below
the “A” or above the “B” alignment positions? (It should not) Yes _________ No _________
7-18 September 2013

Parts
8-8
Section 8 Replaceable Parts

Parts Ordering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
Parts Kits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
Parts List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3

Housing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
Common Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
Module Base . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
I/P Converter Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
Relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
Terminal Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
Feedback Connections Terminal Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
PWB Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
8
Pressure Gauges, Pipe Plugs, or Tire Valve Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
Feedback / Remote Travel Sensor Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
HART Filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
September 2013 8-1

Key Description Part Number
Parts Ordering
Whenever corresponding with your Emerson Process 4 Conversion Kit (to convert a DVC6020 to DVC6010 or
Management sales office about this equipment, a DVC6025 to DVC6015) 14B5072X112
always mention the controller serial number. When
5 Feedback Arm Kit (contains feedback arm assembly, qty. 5,
ordering replacement parts, refer to the 11−character
to convert a 2052 size 2 and 3 DVC6020 to a
part number of each required part as found in the 2051 size 1 DVC6020) GE44419X012
following parts list. Parts which do not show part
numbers are not orderable. 6 Alignment Pin Kit
[kit contains 15 alignment pins (key 46)] 14B5072X092
WARNING 7 Pipe-Away Bracket Kit (DVC6020) [kit contains

mounting bracket (key 74) and O−ring (key 75)]
Use only genuine Fisher replacement Standard 19B5404X012
parts. Components that are not Extreme Temperature option
supplied by Emerson Process (fluorosilicone elastomers) 19B5404X022
Management should not, under any
8* Seal Screen Kit
circumstances, be used in any Fisher [kit contains 25 seal screens (key 231)
instrument. Use of components not and 25 O−rings (key 39)]
supplied by Emerson Process Standard and Extreme Temperature option 14B5072X182
Management may void your warranty, (fluorosilicone elastomers)
might adversely affect the
performance of the instrument, and 9 Terminal Box Kit, aluminum
Standard 19B5401X012
could cause personal injury and
Standard, Natural Gas approved 19B5401X072
property damage.
Extreme Temperature option (fluorosilicone
elastomers) 19B5401X022
Extreme Temperature option (fluorosilicone
8 Note elastomers) Natural Gas Approved 19B5401X082
Stainless Steel, Natural Gas Approved 19B5401X092

All part numbers are for both Stainless Steel, Extreme Temperature option
aluminum and stainless steel (fluorosilicone elastomers), Natural Gas
constructions, unless otherwise approved 19B5401X112
indicated.
10* I/P Converter Kit
For Extreme Temperature option
Parts Kits (fluorosilicone elastomers) 38B6041X132
Kit Description Part Number
11 Adjustment Arm Kit
(includes washer, nut and adjustment arm) 14B5072X132
1* Elastomer Spare Parts Kit (kit contains parts to
service one digital valve controller)
12* PTFE Sleeve Kit
[For pot bushing assembly (kit includes 10 sleeves and
Extreme Temperature option
Lubricant)]
(fluorosilicone elastomers) 19B5402X022
DVC6010 and DVC6020 GE08726X012
DVC6030 GE08727X012
2* Small Hardware Spare Parts Kit (kit contains parts
to service one digital valve controller) 19B5403X012
13* Spare Module Base Assembly Kit
[kit contains module base (key 2); drive screws, qty. 2,
3 Conversion Kit (To convert a DVC6010 to DVC6020 or
(key 11); shield/label (key 19); hex socket cap screw, qty. 3,
a DVC6015 to DVC6025)
(key 38); self tapping screw, qty. 2 (key 49); pipe plug, qty. 3
Also see note below 19B5405X012
(key 61); retaining ring, qty. 3 (key 154); screen (key 236);
Note and flame arrestors, qty. 3 (key 243)]
When converting a DVC6010 to a DVC6020 for Aluminum GE18654X012
pipe−away construction, also order pipe−away bracket Stainless Steel GE18654X022
kit, item 7.
*Recommended spare
8-2 September 2013

Parts
Kit Description Part Number Kit Description Part Number
25 Kit, Spring
14* Spare Housing Assembly Kit, DVC6010 0.25 to 2 inch travel [kit contains 10 bias
[kit contains housing (key 1); drive screw, qty. 2 (key 11); springs w/tungsten carbon coating] GE37413X012
shield (key 20); and screen (key 271)] DVC6010 2 to 4 inch travel, [kit contains 10 bias
Aluminum springs w/tungsten carbon coating] GE37414X012
DVC6010/DVC6020 GE18652X012
DVC6030 GE18653X012
Stainless Steel
DVC6010/DVC6020 GE18652X022 Parts List
DVC6030 GE18653X022
Parts which do not show part numbers are not
15 DVC6020 Cam Adjustment Tool GE12742X012 orderable as individual parts. In most cases, they are
16* Spare Shroud Kit GE29183X012 available in one of the parts kits listed under Parts
17 Travel Sensor with Feedback Arm Assembly Kits.
and PTFE Sleeve Kit
DVC6010 GG09947X012
DVC6015 GG09948X012
DVC6020 GG09949X012
DVC6025
Remote Mount Kits
GG09950X012
Note
18 Remote Terminal Box Kit Parts with footnote numbers shown
Standard GE00418X012 are available in parts kits. Also see
19 Feedback Unit footnote information at the bottom of
DVC6015 49B7986X012
the page.
DVC6025 long arm 49B7987X012
DVC6025 Short Arm 49B7987X022
DVC6035 49B7988X012
DVC6035 (for GX actuator) 49B7988X022 Key Description
20 Remote Mount Retrofit Kit 8

Note Housing
This kit converts an existing DVC6000 in the remote DVC6010, DVC6020, DVC6030, DVC6005
mounted version. Note that the DVC6030 cannot be (see figures 8-2, 8-3, 8-4, and 8-5)
converted to the DVC6035. 1 Housing(14)
11 Drive Screw(14) (2 req’d)
DVC6010 to DVC6005/DVC6015 DVC6015RMTR 20 Shield(14)
DVC6010 to DVC6005/DVC6035 DVC6035RMTR 52 Vent, plastic(2) DVC6010, DVC6030, and DVC6005 only
DVC6020 to DVC6005/DVC6025 (short arm DVC6025RMSA 74 Mounting Bracket
DVC6020 to DVC6005/DVC6025 (long arm) DVC6025RMLA DVC6020 Std(3) or pipe−away(7), and DVC6005(22)
75* O−Ring(7), DVC6020 only
21 Feedback Unit Termination Strip Kit GE00419X012 245 Pipe Plug, pl stl(7), DVC6020 Vent−away only
22 Pipestand/Wall Mounting Kit GE00420X012 248 Screw, hex head(22) (4 req’d), (DVC6005 only)
Severe Service Linkage Kits 249 Screw, hex head(22) (4 req’d), (DVC6005 only)
250 Spacer(22) (4 req’d), (DVC6005 only)
Note 267 Standoff(22) (2 req’d), ( (DVC6005 only)
All metallic parts (except coil springs) in the corrosion 271 Screen(14)
kit and parts that experience rubbing or wear in the
wear kit are coated with a proprietary tungsten carbon Common Parts
coating. DVC6010, DVC6020, DVC6030, DVC6005
23 Corrosion Kit (see figures 8-2, 8-3, 8-4, and 8-5)
DVC6010 0.25 to 2 Inch travel GE22667X012 16* O−ring(1) (3 req’d)
DVC6010 2 to 4 Inch travel GE22668X012 29 Warning label, for use only with LCIE hazardous area
DVC6020 short arm GE22670X012 classifications
DVC6020 long arm GE22671X012 33 Mach Screw, pan hd, SST(2) (3 req’d)
DVC6030 rotary GE22672X012 38 Cap Screw, hex socket, SST(2,13) (3 req’d)
DVC6030 linear GE22673X012
24 Wear Kit
DVC6010 0.25 to 2 Inch travel GE22674X012
DVC6010 2 to 4 Inch travel GE22675X012 *Recommended spare
DVC6020 short arm GE22676X012 1. Available in the Elastomer Spare Parts Kit
2. Available in the Small Hardware Spare Parts Kit
DVC6020 long arm GE22677X012 3. Available in the DVC6010 to DVC6020 Conversion Kit
DVC6030 rotary GE22678X012 7. Available in the Pipe−Away Bracket Kit
DVC6030 linear GE22679X012 13. Available in the Spare Module Base Assembly Kit
14. Available in the Spare Housing Assembly Kit
22. Available in the Pipestand/Wall Mounting Kit
September 2013 8-3

43* Cover Assembly (includes cover screws)
Extreme temperature option (fluorosilicone elastomers)
Aluminum Construction 38B9580X032
Stainless Steel Construction 38B9580X042
48 Nameplate
49 Screw, self tapping (2 req’d)(13)
63 Lithium grease (not furnished with the instrument)
64 Anti−seize compound (not furnished with the instrument)
65 Lubricant, silicone sealant (not furnished with the instrument)
154 Retaining Ring(2) (3 req’d)
237 Module Base Seal(1) GAS−BLOCKING
PRESS−FIT ADAPTOR
Module Base
WIRING CONNECTOR
DVC6010, DVC6020, DVC6030, DVC6005
(see figures 8-2, 8-3, 8-4, 8-5, and 8-6)
2 Module Base(13)
11 Drive Screw(13) (2 req’d) W9528
12 O−ring(1)
19 Label, Shield Assembly(13)
Figure 8-1. Terminal Box of Natural Gas Certified
61 Pipe Plug, hex socket(13) (3 req’d)
236 Screen, for single−acting direct units only(13)
243 Flame Arrestor Assy(13) (3 req’d)
I/P Converter Assembly Terminal Box

8 DVC6010, DVC6020, DVC6030, DVC6005 DVC6010, DVC6020, DVC6030, DVC6005
(see figures 8-2, 8-3, 8-4, and 8-5) (see figures 8-1, 8-2, 8-3, 8-4, and 8-5)
23 Cap Screw, hex socket, SST(2,16) (4 req’d) 4 Terminal Box Cap(18)
39* O−ring (1,10) 34* O−ring(1,9,18)
41 I/P Converter(10) 36* O−ring(1,9,18)
169 Shroud(10,16) 44 Wire Retainer, pl stl(2) (6 req’d) (not shown)
210* Boot, nitrile(1,10) (2 req’d) (also see figure 7-3) 58 Set Screw, hex socket, SST(2,18)
231* Seal Screen(1,8,10) 72 Cap Screw, hex socket, SST(2,18)
164 Terminal Box Assembly(9)
Relay Feedback Connections Terminal Box

DVC6010, DVC6020, DVC6030, DVC6005 DVC6005 (see figure 8-5)
(see figures 8-2, 8-3, 8-4, and 8-5) 4 Terminal Box Cap(18)
24* Relay Assembly, (includes shroud, relay seal, mounting screws) 34* O−ring(1,9,18)
Standard 36* O−ring(1,9,18)
Single−acting direct (relay C) 38B5786X132 44 Wire Retainer, pl stl(2,19) (5 req’d) (not shown)
Double−acting (relay A) 38B5786X052 58 Set Screw, hex socket, SST(2,18)
Single−acting reverse (relay B) 38B5786X092 62 Pipe Plug, hex hd, SST(18)
Low Bleed 72 Cap Screw, hex socket, SST(2,18) (3 req’d)
Single−acting direct (relay C) 38B5786X152 262 Adapter(18)
Double−acting (relay A) 38B5786X072 263* O−ring(18)
Single−acting reverse (relay B) 38B5786X112 Standard 1F463606992
Extreme Temperature option (fluorosilicone elastomers) Extreme temperature option, (fluorosilicone) 1F4636X0092
Standard Bleed 264 Terminal Box Assembly, remote(18)
Single−acting direct (relay C) 38B5786X142
Double−acting (relay A) 38B5786X032
Single−acting reverse (relay B) 38B5786X102 *Recommended spare
Low Bleed 1. Available in the Elastomer Spare Parts Kit
Single−acting direct (relay C) 38B5786X162 2. Available in the Small Hardware Spare Parts Kit
8. Available in the Seal Screen Kit
Double−acting (relay A) 38B5786X082 9. Available in the Terminal Box Kit
Single−acting reverse (relay B) 38B5786X122 10. Available in the I/P Converter Kit
13. Available in the Spare Module Base Assembly Kit
16. Available in the Spare Shroud Kit
18. Available in the Remote Terminal Box Kit
19. Available in Feedback Unit Kit
8-4 September 2013

Parts
Key Description Part Number Key Description Part Number
79 Feedback Arm
PWB Assembly for DVC6010, DVC6015, DVC6030 and DVC6035
80 Cap Screw, hex socket, SST(2,19)
DVC6010, DVC6020, DVC6030, DVC6005
81 Square Nut, SST(2,19)
(see figures 8-2, 8-3, 8-4, and 8-5) 104 Cap Screw, hex hd(19) (4 req’d)
Note Aluminum Construction
DVC6010 and DVC6015
Contact your Emerson Process Management sales
Not for mounting on 1250 and 1250R actuators.
office for PWB Assembly FS numbers.
Mounting parts for 1250 and 1250R actuators are
50* PWB Assembly included in the mounting kit for these actuators.
Standard
For instrument level AC 107 Mounting Bracket(4,19), DVC6010 and DVC6015 only
For instrument level HC Not for mounting on 1250 and 1250R actuators.
For instrument level AD Mounting parts for 1250 and 1250R actuators are
For instrument level PD included in the mounting kit for these actuators.
For instrument level ODV − − − Feedback Linkage Shield, see figures 2-1 and 2-2
Up to 50.4 mm (2 inch) travel
Extreme Temperature option (fluorosilicone elastomers) All sliding−stem actuators except 585C size 60 39B2268X012
For instrument level AC 50.4 mm (2 inch) to 104mm (4 inch) travel
For instrument level HC All sliding−stem actuators except 585C size 60 49B2267X012
For instrument level AD 585C size 60, 19 mm (0.75 inch) to
For instrument level PD 104 mm (4 inch) travel 49B3844X012
For instrument level ODV 163 Plain Washer, SST(2,19)
223* Potentiometer/Bushing Assy
Pressure Gauges, Pipe Plugs, or Tire Standard Elastomers
Valve Assemblies (see figure 8-6) DVC6010, DVC6020 GE31447X012
DVC6030 GE31448X012
47* Pressure Gauge, nickel−plated brass case, brass connection Extreme Temperature option
Double−acting (3 req’d); Single−acting (2 req’d) (fluorosilicone elastomers)
DVC6010 and DVC6020 GE31450X012
PSI/MPA Gauge Scale
To 60 PSI, 0.4 MPa 18B7713X042 DVC6030 GE31451X012 8
To 160 PSI, 1.1 MPa 18B7713X022 DVC6015 and DVC6025(19) GE31453X012
PSI/bar Gauge Scale DVC6035(19) GE31454X012
To 60 PSI, 4 bar 18B7713X032
To 160 PSI, 11 bar 18B7713X012 DVC6020 and DVC6025
PSI/KG/CM2 Gauge Scale (see figures 8-3 and 8-8)
To 60 PSI, 4 KG/CM2 18B7713X072
74 Mounting Bracket, DVC6025 only
To 160 PSI, 11 KG/CM2 18B7713X082
(also in Housing parts for DVC6020)
66 Pipe Plug, hex hd
82 Bias Spring, SST(3)
For double−acting and single acting direct w/gauges
83 Bearing Flange, PTFE−based(3) (2 req’d)
(none req’d)
84 Feedback Arm Assy, SST(3)
For Single−acting reverse w/gauges (1 req’d)
85 E−ring, pl stl(3) (2 req’d)
For all units w/o gauges (3 req’d)
86 Plain Washer, pl stl(3) (2 req’d)
87 Follower Post, SST(3)
67 Tire Valve Assembly (3 req’d)
Stainless Steel Construction
88 Roller, SST/PTFE(3)
DVC6010 (oversized) (4 req’d)
89 Spring Lock Washer, pl stl(3)
Not for mounting on 1250 and 1250R actuators.
90 Hex Nut, pl stl(3)
Feedback / Remote Travel Sensor Parts 91
92
Arm Assy, SST
Cap Screw, hex socket(3) (4 req’d)
Common Feedback Parts 93 Torsion Spring, Feedback Arm(3)
DVC6010, DVC6020, DVC6030, DVC6015, DVC6025,
and DVC6035 (see figures 8-2, 8-3, 8-4, 8-7, 8-8,
DVC6015, DVC6025, and DVC6035
and 8-9)
(see figures 8-7, 8-8, and 8-9)
46 Alignment Pin(6,19) 23 Cap Screw, hex socket(19,21) (2 req’d)
for DVC6010, DVC6030, DVC6015 and DVC6035 44 Wire Retainer, pl stl(19,21) (9 req’d)
64 Anti−seize compound (not furnished with the instrument) 49 Screw, self tapping (2 req’d)
65 Lubricant, silicone sealant (not furnished with the instrument) 58 Set Screw, hex socket(19)
72 Cap Screw, hex socket(2,19) (2 req’d) 62 Pipe Plug, hex hd, SST(19)
for DVC6010, DVC6020, DVC6015, and DVC6025
78 Bias Spring, SST(2,19) *Recommended spare
for DVC6010, DVC6030, DVC6015 and DVC6035 2. Available in the Small Hardware Spare Parts Kit
3. Available in the DVC6010 to DVC6020 Conversion Kit
4. Available in the DVC6020 to DVC6010 Conversion Kit
6. Available in Alignment Pin Kit
21. Available in Feedback Unit Termination Strip Kit
September 2013 8-5

A 11
20
11
19
OUTPUT A
SECTION A-A
243
64
8 SECTION C-C
61
271
OUTPUT B
E E
49 SUPPLY
SECTION E-E SECTION D-D

APPLY LUB, SEALANT
NOTES:
1 SEE FIGURE 8-6 FOR GAUGE CONFIGURATIONS
2. APPLY LUBRICANT KEY 65 TO ALL O−RINGS UNLESS OTHERWISE
SPECIFIED
48B7710−K SHT 1 & 2 / DOC
Figure 8-2. FIELDVUE DVC6010 Digital Valve Controller Assembly
Key Description Part Number Key Description Part Number

131 Retainer Wire 261 Nameplate
251 Feedback housing(19) 265 Plug(19) (DVC6015 and DVC6035 only)
252 Assembly Plate Shield(19) (DVC6015 only)
253 Terminal bracket(19,21)
254 Terminal Strip(19,21)
255 Terminal Cap(19) HART Filters
256 O−ring, fluorosilicone(19)
HF340, DIN rail mount 39B5411X022
257 Machine Screw, pan head(19) (2 req’d) (DVC6015 only)
HF341, DIN rail Mount, pass through (no filter) 39B5412X012
258 Label, cover(19)
260 Hex Nut, SST (2 req’d)
*Recommended spare
21. Available in Feedback Unit Termination Strip Kit
8-6 September 2013

Parts
B
H
D D
B C C E E
A
SECTION A-A
SECTION H-H
SECTION B-B
SECTION C-C
SECTION D-D
SECTION E-E
APPLY LUB, SEALANT
1. APPLY LUBRICANT KEY 65 TO ALL O−RINGS UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED
48B9596−K/IL SHT 1 & 2 / DOC
September 2013 8-7

61
64
APPLY LUB, SEALANT
NOTES:
2. APPLY LUBRICANT KEY 65 TO ALL O-RINGS UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED
48B9596-K SHT 3 / DOC
Figure 8-3. FIELDVUE DVC6020 Digital Valve Controller Assembly (continued)
8-8 September 2013

Parts
11
243 20
SECTION B-B
19
11 OUTPUT A
271
SUPPLY
64
D D
61
B A
B
49 OUTPUT B
SECTION A-A
8
C C
SECTION C-C
SECTION D-D
APPLY LUB, SEALANT, THREAD LOCK

NOTES:
SPECIFIED
48B9597−K SHT 1 & 2 / DOC
September 2013 8-9

SECTION A-A
SECTION C-C
SECTION B-B
APPLY LUB, SEALANT

NOTES:
SPECIFIED
49B3261−C SHT 1 & 2
Figure 8-5. FIELDVUE DVC6005 Base Unit
8-10 September 2013

Parts
E E
SECTION E-E
OUTPUT A
8
OUTPUT A
OUTPUT B OUTPUT B
SUPPLY SUPPLY
WALL MOUNTING PIPESTAND MOUNTING
APPLY LUB, SEALANT

NOTES:
SPECIFIED
49B3261−C SHT 2 & 3 / DOC
Figure 8-5. FIELDVUE DVC6005 Base Unit (continued)
September 2013 8-11

DOUBLE−ACTING
SINGLE−ACTING DIRECT SINGLE−ACTING REVERSE
APPLY LUB, SEALANT
NOTE:
1 FOR SINGLE−ACTING DIRECT, OUTPUT B IS PLUGGED.
2 FOR SINGLE−ACTING REVERSE, OUTPUT A IS PLUGGED.
48B7710−K SHT 2 / DOC
Figure 8-6. Typical FIELDVUE DVC6000 Digital Valve Controller Gauge Configuration
SECTION C-C
SECTION B-B
SECTION A-A SECTION D-D

APPLY LUB, SEALANT
NOTE:
49B7986−A
8-12 September 2013

Parts
SECTION B-B
8
SECTION A-A

NOTE:
49B7987−A/IL
September 2013 8-13

SECTION C-C
SECTION B-B
8
NOTE:
1. APPLY LUBRICANT KEY 65 TO ALL O−RINGS SECTION A-A
UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED
49B7988−A
8-14 September 2013

Principle of Operation
A-A-
Appendix A Principle of Operation

HART Communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-2
DVC6000 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-2
September 2013 A-1

+0.5 V CONTROL SYSTEM
0
ANALOG
SIGNAL
−0.5V HART
MODEM
1200 Hz 2200 Hz
“1” “0”
AVERAGE CURRENT CHANGE DURING COMMUNICATION = 0

A6174/IL
Figure A-1. HART Frequency Shift Keying Technique

FIELD
TERM.
HART Communication
The HART (Highway Addressable Remote
Transducer) protocol gives field devices the capability
of communicating instrument and process data
digitally. This digital communication occurs over the
same two-wire loop that provides the 4-20 mA process A6761 / IL
control signal, without disrupting the process signal. In

Figure A-2. Typical FIELDVUE Instrument to Personal
this way, the analog process signal, with its faster
Computer Connections for ValveLink Software
update rate, can be used for control. At the same time,
the HART protocol allows access to digital diagnostic,
maintenance, and additional process data. The
protocol provides total system integration via a host
device. following submodules: I/P converter, printed wiring
The HART protocol uses frequency shift keying (FSK). board (pwb) assembly, and pneumatic relay. The relay
Two individual frequencies of 1200 and 2200 Hz are position is detected by sensing the magnet on the
superimposed over the 4-20 mA current signal. These relay beam via a detector on the printed wiring board.
This sensor is used for the minor loop feedback
A frequencies represent the digits 1 and 0 (see figure
A-1). By superimposing a frequency signal over the (MLFB) reading. The module base can be rebuilt by
4–20 mA current, digital communication is attained. replacing the submodules. See figures A-3 and A-4.
The average value of the HART signal is zero, DVC6000 digital valve controllers are loop-powered
therefore no dc value is added to the 4-20 mA signal. instruments that provide a control valve position
Thus, true simultaneous communication is achieved proportional to an input signal from the control room.
without interrupting the process signal. The following describes a double-acting DVC6010
The HART protocol allows the capability of digital valve controller mounted on a piston actuator.
multidropping, i.e., networking several devices to a
The input signal is routed into the terminal box through
single communications line. This process is well suited
a single twisted pair of wires and then to the printed
for monitoring remote applications such as pipelines,
wiring board assembly submodule where it is read by
custody transfer sites, and tank farms. See table 7-2
the microprocessor, processed by a digital algorithm,
for instructions on changing the printed wiring board
and converted into an analog I/P drive signal.
DIP switch configuration to multidrop.
As the input signal increases, the drive signal to the
I/P converter increases, increasing the I/P output
pressure. The I/P output pressure is routed to the
DVC6000 Operation pneumatic relay submodule. The relay is also
The DVC6000 digital valve controller housing contains connected to supply pressure and amplifies the small
the travel sensor, terminal box, pneumatic input and pneumatic signal from the I/P converter. The relay
output connections and a module base that may be accepts the amplified pneumatic signal and provides
easily replaced in the field without disconnecting field two output pressures. With increasing input (4 to 20
wiring or tubing. The module base contains the mA signal), the output A pressure always increases
A-2 September 2013

Principle of Operation
4−20 mA
INPUT SIGNAL
+
HART
AUXILIARY
TERMINALS
TERMINAL BOX
VALVE TRAVEL
PRINTED FEEDBACK
WIRING BOARD
DRIVE
SIGNAL
OUTPUT A
I/P
CONVERTER
SUPPLY
PNEUMATIC PRESSURE
RELAY
OUTPUT B
VALVE AND ACTUATOR
E0408 / IL
Figure A-3. FIELDVUE DVC6000 Digital Valve Controller Block Diagram

and the output B pressure decreases. The output A the I/P drive signal. This positions the flapper to
pressure is used for double-acting and single-acting prevent any further increase in nozzle pressure.
direct applications. The output B pressure is used for
double-acting and single-acting reverse applications. As the input signal decreases, the drive signal to the
As shown in figure A-3 the increased output A I/P converter submodule decreases, decreasing the
pressure causes the actuator stem to move I/P output pressure. The pneumatic relay decreases A
downward. Stem position is sensed through the the output A pressure and increases the output B
feedback linkage by the travel sensor which is pressure. The stem moves upward until the correct
electrically connected to the printed wiring board position is attained. At this point the printed wiring
assembly submodule. The stem continues to move board assembly stabilizes the I/P drive signal. This
downward until the correct stem position is attained. At positions the flapper to prevent any further decrease in
this point the printed wiring board assembly stabilizes nozzle pressure.
September 2013 A-3

TERMINAL BOX
TERMINAL BOX COVER
HOUSING
PNEUMATIC RELAY
GAUGES
COVER
TRAVEL SENSOR
PRINTED WIRING BOARD ASSEMBLY
W9329
MODULE BASE ASSEMBLY I/P CONVERTER
Figure A-4. FIELDVUE DVC6000 Digital Valve Controller Assembly
A-4 September 2013

Loop Schematics/Nameplates
B-B-
Appendix B Loop Schematics/Nameplates
September 2013 B-1

This section includes loop schematics required for
wiring of intrinsically safe installations. It also contains
the approvals nameplates. If you have any questions,
contact your Emerson Process Management sales
office.
HAZARDOUS LOCATION NON-HAZARDOUS LOCATION
CLASS I, DIV 1, GROUPS A,B,C,D

CLASS II, DIV 1, GROUPS E,F,G
CLASS III
DVC6010, DVC6020, DVC6030

DVC6010S, DVC6020S, DV6030S
Vmax = 30 VDC
Imax = 226 mA CSA APPROVED BARRIER
Ci = 5 nF
Li = 0.55 mH
Pi = 1.4 W
1 NOTE 1, 3, 4, 5, 6
T CODE T (amb)
1 NOTE 7
T5 ≤ 80_C
T6 ≤ 75_C
1 SEE NOTES IN FIGURE B-4
GE42818 sheet 2, Rev. E
Figure B-1. CSA Loop Schematic for FIELDVUE DVC6010, DVC6020, and DVC6030
Figure B-2. Typical CSA/FM Nameplate for FIELDVUE DVC6010, DVC6020, DVC6030, and DVC6005
B-2 September 2013

1
1
GE42818 sheet 5, Rev. E
Figure B-3. CSA Loop Schematic for FIELDVUE DVC6005 with DVC6015, DVC6025, and DVC6035
THE ENTITY CONCEPT ALLOWS INTERCONNECTION OF INTRINSICALLY SAFE APPARATUS TO ASSOCIATED APPARATUS NOT
SPECIFICALLY EXAMINED IN SUCH COMBINATION. THE CRITERIA FOR INTERCONNECTION IS THAT THE VOLTAGE (Vmax or Ui), THE
CURRENT (Imax or Ii), AND THE POWER (Pmax or Pi) OF THE INTRINSICALLY SAFE APPARATUS MUST BE EQUAL TO OR GREATER THAN
THE VOLTAGE (Voc or Uo), AND THE CURRENT (Isc or Io), AND THE POWER(Po) DEFINED BY THE ASSOCIATED APPARATUS. IN
ADDITION, THE SUM OF THE MAX UNPROTECTED CAPACITANCE (Ci) AND MAX UNPROTECTED INDUCTANCE (Li), INCLUDING THE
INTERCONNECTING CABLING CAPACITANCE (Ccable) AND CABLING INDUCTANCE (Lcable) MUST BE LESS THAN THE ALLOWABLE
CAPACITANCE (Ca) AND INDUCTANCE (La) DEFINED BY THE ASSOCIATED APPARATUS. IF THE ABOVE CRITERIA IS MET, THEN THE
COMBINATION MAY BE CONNECTED.
Vmax or Ui Voc or Uo Imax or Ii Isc or Io Pmax or Pi Po Ci + Ccable ≤ Ca Li + Lcable ≤ La
INSTALLATION MUST BE IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE CANADIAN ELECTRICAL CODE (CEC) AND ANSI/ISA RP12.6.
MAXIMUM SAFE AREA VOLTAGE SHOULD NOT EXCEED 250 Vrms.
RESISTANCE BETWEEN INTRINSICALLY SAFE GROUND AND EARTH GROUND MUST BE LESS THAN ONE OHM
B
LOOPS MUST BE CONNECTED ACCORDING TO THE BARRIER MANUFACTURER’S INSTRUCTIONS.
IF HAND-HELD COMMUNICATOR OR MULTIPLEXER IS USED, IT MUST BE CSA APPROVED WITH ENTITY PARAMETERS AND
INSTALLED PER THE MANUFACTURER’S CONTROL DRAWINGS.
GE42818, Sheet 8
Figure B-4. Notes for CSA Loop Schematics
Figure B-5. Typical CSA Nameplate for FIELDVUE DVC6015, DVC6025, and DVC6035
September 2013 B-3

HAZARDOUS LOCATION NON-HAZARDOUS LOCATION
I.S. CLASS I,II,III, DIV 1, GROUPS A,B,C,D,E,F,G

N.I. CLASS I, DIV 2, GROUPS A,B,C,D
DVC6010, DVC6020, DVC6030
DVC6010S, DVC6020S,
DV6030S
Vmax = 30 VDC
Imax = 226 mA FM APPROVED BARRIER
Ci = 5 nF
Li = 0.55 mH
Pi = 1. 4W
1 NOTE 1, 3, 4, 5, 6
1 NOTE 7
T CODE T (amb)
T5 ≤ 80_C
T6 ≤ 75_C

GE42819 Sheet 2, Rev. D
Figure B-6. FM Loop Schematic for FIELDVUE DVC6010, DVC6020, and DVC6030
1
1
B 1

Figure B-7. FM Loop Schematic for FIELDVUE DVC6005 with DVC6015, DVC6025, and DVC6035
B-4 September 2013

CURRENT (Imax or Ii), AND THE POWER (Pmax or Pi) OF THE INTRINSICALLY SAFE APPARATUS MUST BE EQUAL TO OR GREATER
THAN THE VOLTAGE (Voc or Uo), AND THE CURRENT (Isc or Io), AND THE POWER (Po) DEFINED BY THE ASSOCIATED APPARATUS. IN
INSTALLATION MUST BE IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE (NEC) NFPA70 AND ANSI/ISA RP12.6.01
MAXIMUM SAFE AREA VOLTAGE SHOULD NOT EXCEED 250 Vrms.
RESISTANCE BETWEEN INTRINSICALLY SAFE GROUND AND EARTH GROUND MUST BE LESS THAN ONE OHM
LOOPS MUST BE CONNECTED ACCORDING TO THE BARRIER MANUFACTURER’S INSTRUCTION
IF HAND-HELD COMMUNICATOR OR MULTIPLEXER IS USED IT MUST BE FM APPROVED WITH ENTITY PARAMETERS AND
INSTALLED PER THE MANUFACTURER’S CONTROL DRAWING
GE42819 Sheet 8, Rev. E
Figure B-8. Notes for FM Loop Schematics
Figure B-9. Typical FM Nameplate for FIELDVUE DVC6015, DVC6025, and DVC6035
September 2013 B-5


GE60771 sheet 3, Rev. B
Figure B-10. ATEX Loop Schematic For FIELDVUE DVC6010, DVC6020, and DVC6030
DVC6010, DVC6020, DVC6030, DVC6005
DVC6015, DVC6025, DVC6035
Figure B-11. Typical ATEX Nameplates; Intrinsically Safe
B-6 September 2013

1
1

GE60771 sheet 6, Rev. B
Figure B-12. ATEX Loop Schematic for DVC6005 with DVC6015, DVC6025, and DVC6035
B
CURRENT (Imax or Ii), AND THE POWER (Pmax or Pi) OF THE INTRINSICALLY SAFE APPARATUS MUST BE EQUAL TO OR GREATER THAN
THE VOLTAGE (Voc or Uo), AND THE CURRENT (Isc or Io), AND THE POWER(Po) DEFINED BY THE ASSOCIATED APPARATUS. IN ADDITION,
THE SUM OF THE MAX UNPROTECTED CAPACITANCE (Ci) AND MAX UNPROTECTED INDUCTANCE (Li), INCLUDING THE INTERCONNECTING
CABLING CAPACITANCE (Ccable) AND CABLING INDUCTANCE (Lcable) MUST BE LESS THAN THE ALLOWABLE CAPACITANCE (Ca) AND
INDUCTANCE (La) DEFINED BY THE ASSOCIATED APPARATUS. IF THE ABOVE CRITERIA IS MET, THEN THE COMBINATION MAY BE
CONNECTED.
INSTALLATION MUST BE IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE NATIONAL WIRING PRACTICES OF THE COUNTRY IN USE.
LOOPS MUST BE CONNECTED ACCORDING TO THE BARRIER MANUFACTURER’S INSTRUCTIONS.
IF HAND-HELD COMMUNICATOR OR MULTIPLEXER IS USED, IT MUST BE ATEX APPROVED WITH ENTITY PARAMETERS AND INSTALLED
PER THE MANUFACTURER’S CONTROL DRAWINGS.
GE60771, Sheet 2
Figure B-13. Notes for ATEX Schematics
September 2013 B-7

DVC6010, DVC6020, DVC6030, DVC6005
DVC6015, DVC6025, DVC6035
Figure B-14. Typical ATEX Nameplates; Flameproof
B DVC6010, DVC6020, DVC6030, DVC6005
DVC6015, DVC6025, DVC6035
Figure B-15. Typical ATEX Nameplates; Type n
B-8 September 2013


GE42990 Sheet 2, Rev. E
Figure B-16. IECEx Loop Schematic for FIELDVUE DVC6010, DVC6020, and DVC6030
B
1
1

Figure B-17. IECEx Loop Schematic for FIELDVUE DVC6005 with DVC6015, DVC6025, and DVC6035
September 2013 B-9

CURRENT (Imax or Ii), AND THE POWER (Pmax or Pi) OF THE INTRINSICALLY SAFE APPARATUS MUST BE EQUAL TO OR GREATER
THAN THE VOLTAGE (Voc OR Uo), AND THE CURRENT (Isc or Io), AND THE POWER (Po) DEFINED BY THE ASSOCIATED APPARATUS. IN
INSTALLATION MUST BE IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE NATIONAL WIRING PRACTICES OF THE COUNTRY IN USE
LOOPS MUST BE CONNECTED ACCORDING TO THE BARRIER MANUFACTURER’S INSTRUCTIONS
IF HAND-HELD COMMUNICATOR OR MULTIPLEXER IS USED IT MUST BE IECEx APPROVED WITH ENTITY PARAMETERS AND
INSTALLED PER THE MANUFACTURERS CONTROL DRAWING
GE42990 Sheet 8
Figure B-18. Notes for IECEx Schematics
Figure B-19. Typical IECEx Nameplate for FIELDVUE DVC6010, DVC6020, DVC6030, and DVC6005
B Figure B-20. Typical IECEx Nameplate for DVC6015, DVC6025, and DVC6035
B-10 September 2013

Glossary
C-C-
Glossary
Alert Point Byte
An adjustable value that, when exceeded, A unit of binary digits (bits). A byte consists of
activates an alert. eight bits.
Algorithm Calibration Location

A set of logical steps to solve a problem or Where the instrument was last calibrated; either
accomplish a task. A computer program contains in the factory or in the field.
one or more algorithms.
Configuration
Alphanumeric Stored instructions and operating parameters for
Consisting of letters and numbers. a FIELDVUE Instrument.
Analog Input Units Control Loop

Units in which the analog input is displayed and An arrangement of physical and electronic
maintained in the instrument. components for process control. The electronic
components of the loop continuously measure
one or more aspects of the process, then alter
ANSI (acronym) those aspects as necessary to achieve a desired
The acronym ANSI stands for the American process condition. A simple control loop
National Standards Institute measures only one variable. More sophisticated
control loops measure many variables and
maintain specified relationships among those
ANSI Class variables.
Valve pressure/temperature rating.
B
Control Mode
Auxiliary Input Alert Defines where the instrument reads its set point. Glossary
Checks the status of the auxiliary input; a discrete The following control modes are available for a
input. When enabled, the Auxiliary Input Alert is FIELDVUE Instrument:
active when the auxiliary input terminals are open Analog The instrument receives its travel set
or closed (shorted), depending upon the selection point over the 4-20 mA loop.
for Auxiliary Input Alert State. Digital The instrument receives its set point
digitally, via the HART communications link.
Test This is not a user-selectable mode. The
Auxiliary Terminal (Indicator) Field Communicator or ValveLink software places
Indicates whether auxiliary wiring terminals are the instrument in this mode whenever it needs to
open or closed (such as by an external switch move the valve, such as for calibration or
contact). diagnostic tests.
Bench Set Control Mode, Restart

Pressure, supplied to an actuator, required to Determines the instrument control mode after a
drive the actuator through rated valve travel. restart. See Control Mode for the available
Expressed in pounds per square inch. restart control modes.
September 2013 Glossary-1

Controller Device ID
A device that operates automatically to regulate a Unique identifier embedded in the instrument at
controlled variable. the factory.
Device Revision
Crossover Point Revision number of the interface software that
The point at which the feedback pin is closest to permits communication between the Field
the axis of rotation of the travel sensor. A visual Communicator and the instrument.
indication of the crossover point is found when
the slot in the instrument feedback arm forms a
Drive Signal
90-degree angle with the valve stem.
The signal to the I/P converter from the printed
wiring board. It is the percentage of the total
microprocessor effort needed to drive the valve
Current-to-Pressure (I/P) Converter fully open.
An electronic component or device that converts
a milliamp signal to a proportional pneumatic
pressure output signal. Drive Signal Alert
Checks the drive signal and calibrated travel. If
one of the following conditions exists for more
Cycle Counter than 20 seconds, the Drive Signal Alert is active.
The capability of a FIELDVUE instrument to If none of the conditions exist, the alert is cleared.
record the number of times the travel changes If Zero Power Condition = Closed
direction. The change in direction must occur The alert is active when:
after the deadband has been exceeded before it drive signal <10% and calibrated travel >3%
can be counted as a cycle.
drive signal >90% and calibrated travel <97%
If Zero Power Condition = Open
Cycle Counter Alert The alert is active when:
Checks the difference between the Cycle Counter
and the Cycle Counter Alert Point. Cycle Counter drive signal <10% and calibrated travel <97%
Alert is active when the cycle counter value drive signal >90% and calibrated travel >3%
exceeds the Cycle Counter Alert Point. It clears
after you reset the Cycle Counter to a value less Equal Percentage
than the alert point. A valve flow characteristic where equal
increments of valve stem travel produce equal
B Cycle Counter Alert Point
percentage changes in existing flow. One of the
input characteristics available for a FIELDVUE
An adjustable value which, when exceeded, Instrument. See also, Linear and Quick Opening.
Glossary
activates the Cycle Counter Alert. Valid entries
are 0 to 4 billion cycles.
Feedback Arm
The mechanical connection between the valve
stem linkage and the FIELDVUE Instrument
Cycle Counter Deadband travel sensor.
Region around the travel reference point, in
percent of ranged travel, established at the last
increment of the Cycle Counter. The deadband Feedback Connection
must be exceeded before a change in travel can Identifies the type of feedback linkage: rotary,
be counted as a cycle. Valid entries are 0% to sliding-stem roller or sliding-stem standard.
100%. Typical value is between 2% and 5%.
Feedback Signal
Indicates to the instrument the actual position of
Deviation the valve. The travel sensor provides the
Usually, the difference between set point and feedback signal to the instrument printed wiring
process variable. More generally, any departure board assembly. A mechanical linkage connects
from a desired or expected value or pattern. the travel sensor to the valve stem or shaft.
Glossary-2 September 2013

Glossary
Firmware Revision Input Range
The revision number of the instrument firmware. The analog input signal range that corresponds to
Firmware is a program that is entered into the the travel range.
instrument at time of manufacture and cannot be
changed by the user.
Input Signal
The current signal from the control system. The
Free Time input signal can be displayed in milliamperes or in
Percent of time that the microprocessor is idle. A percent of ranged input.
typical value is 25%. The actual value depends
on the number of functions in the instrument that
are enabled and on the amount of communication Instrument Level
currently in progress. Determines the functions available for the
instrument. See table 6-2, page 6-8.
Full Ranged Travel
Current, in mA, that corresponds with the point Instrument Mode
where ranged travel is maximum, i.e., limited by Determines if the instrument responds to its
the mechanical travel stops. analog input signal. There are two instrument
modes:
In Service: For a fully functioning instrument, the
Gain instrument output changes in response to analog
The ratio of output change to input change. input changes. Typically changes to setup or
calibration cannot be made when the instrument
mode is In Service.
Hardware Revision
Out of Service: The instrument output does not
Revision number of the Fisher Controls
change in response to analog input changes
instrument hardware. The physical components
when the instrument mode is Out of Service.
of the instrument are defined as the hardware.
Some setup parameters can be changed only
when the instrument mode is Out of Service.
HART (acronym)
The acronym HART stands for Highway
Addressable Remote Transducer.
Instrument Protection
Determines if commands from a HART device
can calibrate and/or configure certain parameters
HART Tag in the instrument. There are two types of
An eight-character name that identifies the instrument protection: B
physical instrument. Configuration and Calibration: Prohibits
changing protected setup parameters; prohibits Glossary
calibration.
HART Universal Revision None: Permits both configuration and calibration.
Revision number of the HART Universal The instrument is ”unprotected.”
Commands which are the communications
protocol for the instrument.
Instrument Serial Number
The serial number assigned to the printed wiring
Input Characteristic board by the factory but can be changed during
The relationship between the ranged travel and setup. The instrument serial number should
ranged input. Possible values include: linear, match the serial number on the instrument
equal percentage, and quick opening. nameplate.
Input Current Leak Class

The current signal from the control system that Defines the allowable leakage by a valve when it
serves as the analog input to the instrument. See is closed. Leak class numbers are listed in two
also Input Signal. standards: ANSI/FCI 70-2 and IEC 534-4.

Linear Parallel
A valve flow characteristic where changes in flow Simultaneous: said of data transmission on two or
rate are directly proportional to changes in valve more channels at the same time.
stem travel. One of the input characteristics
available for a FIELDVUE Instrument. See also,
Equal Percentage and Quick Opening.
Polling Address
Address of the instrument. If the digital valve
controller is used in a point-to-point configuration,
Linearity, dynamic set the polling address to 0. If it is used in a
Linearity (independent) is the maximum deviation multidrop configuration, or split range application,
from a straight line best fit to the opening and set the polling address to a value from 0 to 15.
closing curves and a line representing the
average value of those curves. Pressure Sensor
A FIELDVUE instrument internal device that
senses pneumatic pressure. DVC6000 digital
Memory valve controllers have three pressure sensors:
A type of semiconductor used for storing one to sense supply pressure and two to sense
programs or data. FIELDVUE instruments use the output pressures.
three types of memory: Random Access Memory
(RAM), Read Only Memory (ROM), and
Non-Volatile Memory (NVM). See also these Primary Master
listings in this glossary. Masters are communicating devices. A primary
master is a communicating device permanently
wired to a field instrument. Typically, a
Menu HART-compatible control system or a computer
A list of programs, commands, or other activities running ValveLink software is the primary master.
that you select by using the arrow keys to In contrast, a secondary master is not often
highlight the item then pressing ENTER, or by permanently wired to a field instrument. The Field
entering the numeric value of the menu item. Communicator or a computer running ValveLink
software communicating through a HART modem
could be considered a secondary master.
Minimum Closing Time
Minimum time, in seconds, for the travel to Note: If one type of master takes an instrument
decrease through the entire ranged travel. This Out Of Service, the same type must put it In
rate is applied to any travel decrease. Valid Service. For example, if a device set up as a
entries are 0 to 400 seconds. Deactivate by primary master takes an instrument Out Of
B entering a value of 0 seconds. Service, a device set up as a primary master
must be used to place the instrument In Service.
Glossary
Minimum Opening Time Quick Opening
Minimum time, in seconds, for the travel to A valve flow characteristic where most of the
increase through the entire ranged travel. This change in flow rate takes place for small amounts
rate is applied to any travel increase. Because of of stem travel from the closed position. The flow
friction, actual valve travel may not respond in characteristic curve is basically linear through the
exactly the same time frame. Valid entries are 0 first 40 percent of stem travel. One of the input
to 400 seconds. Deactivate by entering a value of characteristics available for a FIELDVUE
0 seconds. Instrument. See also, Equal Percentage and
Linear.
Non-Volatile Memory (NVM)
A type of semiconductor memory that retains its Random Access Memory (RAM)
contents even though power is disconnected. A type of semiconductor memory that is normally
NVM contents can be changed during used by the microprocessor during normal
configuration unlike ROM which can be changed operation that permits rapid retrieval and storage
only at time of instrument manufacture. NVM of programs and data. See also Read Only
stores configuration restart data. Memory (ROM) and Non-Volatile Memory (NVM).

Glossary
Rate Travel Accumulator Alert
Amount of change in output proportional to the Checks the difference between the Travel
rate of change in input. Accumulator value and the Travel Accumulator
Alert Point. The Travel Accumulator Alert is active
when the Travel Accumulator value exceeds the
Read-Only Memory (ROM) Travel Accumulator Alert Point. It clears after you
A memory in which information is stored at the reset the Travel Accumulator to a value less than
time of instrument manufacture. You can the alert point.
examine but not change ROM contents.
Travel Accumulator Alert Point
An adjustable value which, when exceeded,
Seat Load activates the Travel Accumulator Alert. Valid
Force exerted on the valve seat, typically entries are 0% to 4 billion %.
expressed in pounds force per lineal inch of port
circumference. Seat load is determined by shutoff Travel Accumulator Deadband
requirements. Region around the travel reference point
established at the last increment of the
accumulator. This region must be exceeded
Set Point Filter Time before a change in travel can be accumulated.
The time constant, in seconds, for the first-order Valid entries are 0% to 100%.
input filter.
Travel Alert
Checks the ranged travel against the travel high
Software and low alert points. The travel alert is active if
Microprocessor or computer programs and either the high or low point is exceeded. Once a
routines that reside in alterable memory (usually high or low point is exceeded, the ranged travel
RAM), as opposed to firmware, which consists of must clear that point by the Travel Alert
programs and routines that are programmed into Deadband before the alert clears. Four travel
memory (usually ROM) when the instrument is alerts are available: Travel Alert Hi, Travel Alert
manufactured. Software can be manipulated Lo, Travel Alert Hi Hi, and Travel Alert Lo Lo.
during normal operation, firmware cannot.
Travel Alert Deadband
Stroking Time Travel, in percent of ranged travel, required to
clear a travel alert, once it is active. Valid entries
The time, in seconds, required to move the valve
are −25% to 125%.
from its fully open position to fully closed, or vice
versa.
Travel Alert High Point B
Value of the travel, in percent of ranged travel,
Glossary
Temperature Sensor which, when exceeded, sets the Travel Alert Hi
A device within the FIELDVUE instrument that alert. Valid entries are −25% to 125%.
measures the instrument’s internal temperature.
Travel Alert High High Point
Travel which, when exceeded, sets the Travel Alert Hi Hi
Movement of the valve stem or shaft which alert. Valid entries are −25% to 125%.
changes the amount the valve is open or closed.
Travel Alert Low Point
Travel Accumulator which, when exceeded, sets the Travel Alert Lo
The capability of a FIELDVUE instrument to alert. Valid entries are −25% to 125%.
record total change in travel. The value of the
Travel Accumulator increments when the Travel Alert Low Low Point
magnitude of the change exceeds the Travel Value of the travel, in percent of ranged travel,
Accumulator Deadband. To reset the Travel which, when exceeded, sets the Travel Alert Lo
Accumulator, set it to zero. Lo alert. Valid entries are −25% to 125%.

Travel Cutoff Travel Sensor
Defines the cutoff point for the travel, in percent A device within the FIELDVUE instrument that
of ranged travel. There are two travel cutoffs: senses valve stem or shaft movement. The travel
high and low. Once travel exceeds the cutoff, the sensor is mechanically connected to the valve
drive signal is set to either maximum or minimum, stem or shaft.
depending on the Zero Control Signal and if the
cutoff is high or low. Minimum opening time or
minimum closing time are not in effect while the Travel Sensor Motion
travel is beyond the cutoff. Use the travel cutoff to Establishes motion of the travel sensor. While
obtain the desired seat load or to be sure the viewing the end of the travel sensor shaft, if
valve is fully open. increasing air pressure to the actuator causes the
shaft to rotate clockwise, travel sensor motion is
CW. If increasing air pressure causes the shaft to
Travel Deviation rotate counterclockwise, travel sensor motion is
The difference between the analog input signal (in CCW.
percent of ranged input), the “target” travel, and
the actual “ranged” travel.
Tuning
Travel Deviation Alert The adjustment of control terms or parameter
Checks the difference between the target and the values to produce a desired control effect.
ranged travel. If the difference exceeds the Travel
Deviation Alert Point for more than the Travel
Deviation Time, the Travel Deviation Alert is Tuning Set
active. It remains active until the difference is less Preset values that identify gain settings for a
than the Travel Deviation Alert Point. FIELDVUE instrument. The tuning set and supply
pressure together determine an instrument’s
response to input signal changes.
Travel Deviation Alert Point
An adjustable value for the target travel and the
ranged travel difference, expressed in percent, Watch Dog Timer
When this value is exceeded by the travel A timer that the microprocessor must rearm
deviation for more than the Travel Deviation periodically. If the microprocessor is unable to
Time, the Travel Deviation Alert is active. Valid rearm the timer, the instrument goes through
entries are 0% to 100%. Typically this is set to reset.
5%.
B Travel Deviation Time Zero Power Condition

The time, in seconds. that the travel deviation The position of the valve (open or closed) when
Glossary
must exceed the Travel Deviation Alert Point the electrical power to the instrument is removed.
before the alert is active. Valid entries are 1 to 60 Zero Power Condition (ZPC) is determined by
seconds. relay and actuator action as follows:
Single Acting Direct (Relay C) Upon loss of
Travel Limit power instrument goes to zero air output at port
A. On loss of pneumatic supply failure direction is
A setup parameter that defines the maximum
per the actuator fail mode.
allowable travel (in percent of ranged travel) for
the valve. During operation, the travel target will Double Acting (Relay A) Upon loss of power
not exceed this limit. There are two travel limits: instrument goes to full supply air output at port B.
high and low. Typically the travel limit low will be A goes to zero air output. The failure direction
used to keep the valve from going completely upon loss of pneumatic supply cannot be
closed. determined.
Single Acting Reverse (Relay B) Upon loss of
Travel Range power instrument goes to full supply air output at
Travel, in percent of calibrated travel, that Port B. On loss of pneumatic supply failure
corresponds to the input range. direction is per the actuator fail mode.

Index
D-D-
Index
Travel Limit Cutoff Alerts, 4-14
A Travel Limit Hi/Lo Alerts, 4-14
Travel History, 4-15
A Minus B, 6-7
Cycle Count, 4-15
AC, (Auto Calibrate), 6-8 Cycle Count/Tvl Accum Deadband, 4-15
Travel Accumulator, 4-15
Actuator Style, 4-19
Analog Calibration Adjust, 5-4
AD, (Advanced Diagnostics), 6-8
Analog Input
Advanced Diagnostics, (AD), 6-8 Displaying Value, 6-7
Alert Conditions, 6-2 Units, 4-18
Alert Record, 6-4 Analog Input Calibration, 5-10
Electronics, 6-2 Analog Input Range, 4-18
Environment, 6-3 Assembly Specification Sheet, 4-19
Sensor, 6-2
SIS, 6-3 ATEX
Travel, 6-3 Hazardous Area Classifications, 1-6, 1-10,
1-11
Travel History, 6-3
Loop Schematic, B-6, B-7
Alert Groups, 4-16 Nameplates, B-6, B-8
Failure Alerts, 4-16 Special Conditions for Safe Use, 2-4, 2-5
Miscellaneous, 4-16 Auto Calibrate, (AC), 6-8
Valve Alerts, 4-16
Auto Calibrate Travel, 5-2
Alert Record, 4-16 Error Messages, 5-3, 5-4
Alert Records Auxiliary Input, Displaying Status, 6-7
Clear, 4-16 Auxiliary Terminal, Wiring Length Guidelines,
View, 4-16 6-5
Alert Setup, 4-12 Auxiliary Terminal Action, 4-4, 4-18
Alerts
Alert Record, 4-16 B
Alert Groups, 4-16
Basic Setup, 3-2 Index
Enabling Alert Groups, 4-16
configuring, 4-12 bias spring, 2-14
Electronic, 4-12 Burst Command, 4-3
Drive Signal Alert, 4-12 Change, 4-3
Processor Impaired Alerts, 4-12 Burst Enable, Change, 4-3
Environment, 4-13
Burst Mode, 4-3
Environmental
Commands, 2-34, 4-3
Auxiliary Terminal Alerts, 4-13
Enabling, 4-3
Supply Press Lo Alert, 4-13
Sensor, 4-13 Burst Operation, 2-34
SIS, 4-15
G
Travel, 4-13
Deviation Alert, 4-13
C
Limit Alerts, 4-13 Calibration
September 2013 Index-1

Analog Input, 5-10 Custom Characterization, 4-11
Auto Calibrate Travel, 5-2 Define , 4-11
Error Messages, 5-4 Cutoff Hi
Manual Calibrate Travel, 5-4 Travel Limit/Cutoff Alerts, 4-14
Pressure Sensors, 5-6 Travel/Pressure Control, 4-9
Relay Adjustment, 5-10
Cutoff Lo
Sensor Calibration, 5-6
Travel Limit/Cutoff Alerts, 4-14
Pressure Sensors, 5-6
Travel/Pressure Control, 4-9
Touch−Up Travel, 5-6
Travel Cutoffs and Limits, Travel/Pressure Control,
Auto, 5-2 4-9
Manual, 5-4 Cycle Counter, 4-15
Analog Calibration Adjust, 5-4 Alert Point, 4-15
Digital Calibration Adjust, 5-5 Displaying Value, 6-7
Travel Sensor, 5-7 Enabling Alert, 4-15
Travel Sensor Adjust, 5-7 Resetting, 4-15
Calibration , Travel, 5-2 Cycle Counter Deadband, 4-15
Calibration and Diagnostics, 4-17

Calibration Status and Location, 4-18 D
Change Cutoffs Date, 4-17, 4-18
Travel Limit/Cutoff Alerts, 4-14 DD Information, 6-8
Define Custom Characterization, 4-11
Change Travel Limits, Travel Limit/Cutoff Description, DVC6000 Series, 1-3
Alerts, 4-15
Descriptor, 4-17
Classifications/Certifications, 1-6
Detailed Setup, 4-2
Clear ALL Records, 4-16 Device Information, 6-8
Command 3, 4-3 Device Record, 6-4
Communication Cable Capacitance, 2-33 Device Revision, 6-8
Connections Digital Calibration Adjust, 5-5
Electrical DIP Switch, Setting, 7-7
4 to 20 mA Loop, 2-24 Drive Signal, Displaying Value, 6-7
Communication, 2-29
Test, 2-29 Dynamic Response, 4-11
Pneumatic
Index
Output, 2-21
to support solenoid testing, 2-22
E
Supply, 2-19 Educational Services, 1-4
Vent, 2-22
Electrical Classification, Hazardous Area, 1-6
Control Mode, 4-3 Electromagnetic Compatibility, 1-5
Control System Requirements End Point Pressure Control, 4-9, 4-10
Compliance Voltage, 2-32 EPPC Saturation Time, 4-10
HART Filter, 2-30
Voltage Available, 2-31 EPPC Setup Point, 4-10
Error Messages, Auto Calibrate Travel, 5-4
CSA
G Hazardous Area Classifications, 1-6, 1-8
Loop Schematic, B-3
Loop Schematics, B-2
F
Nameplates, B-2, B-3 Factory Default Settings, Initial Setup, 3-3
Index-2 September 2013

Index
Factory Settings, Restoring, 5-11 Instrument Clock, Setting, 4-16, 4-18
Failure Group Enable, 4-16 Instrument Date and Time, 4-18
Feedback Connection, 4-19 Instrument Level, 6-8
capabilities, 1-2
Firmware Revision, 6-8
Instrument Mode, 3-2, 4-2
FM
Hazardous Area Classifications, 1-6, 1-9 Instrument Serial Number, 4-17
Loop Schematic, B-4 Instrument Status, 6-4
Nameplates, B-5 Viewing, 6-4
Special Conditions of Safe Use, 2-4
Instrument Time , 4-16
Free Time, Self Test Failure, enabling to
cause instrument shutdown, 4-12 Integral Action, Enable Integral Settings, 4-6
Integral Dead Zone, 4-17
Integral Enable
G Pressure, 4-8
Travel, 4-6
Gauges, Tire Valves, & Pipe Plugs
Parts List, 8-5 Integral Gain
Replacing, 7-7 Pressure, 4-8
Travel, 4-6
Integral Limit, 4-7, 4-17
H Integral Settings, 4-7
Integrator Saturation, Status, 4-17
Hardware Revision, 6-8
Internal Temperature, Displaying Value, 6-7
HART Communicating, (HC), 6-8
HART Filter, Part Numbers, 8-6
HART Tag, 4-17 L
HART Tri−Loop, Configuring DVC6000 for use Lag Time, 4-11
with, 2-33
Lead/Lag, 4-11
Hazardous Area Approvals, 2-4 typical filter settings, 4-12
HC, (HART Communicating), 6-8 Lead/Lag Set Point Filter, 4-11
Loop Current, checking, 7-15
I Loop Schematic
ATEX, B-6, B-7
I/P Converter CSA, B-3
Index
Parts List, 8-4 FM, B-4
Removing, 7-6 IECEx, B-9
Replacing, 7-6 Loop Schematics, CSA, B-2
Replacing Filter, 7-5
IECEx
Conditions of Certification, 2-5 M
Hazardous Area Classifications, 1-6, 1-11
Loop Schematic, B-9 Manual Calibrate Travel, 5-4
Nameplates, B-10 Manual Conventions, 1-2
Input Characterization, 4-10 Manufacturer, 4-18 G
Input Range, 4-18 Maximum Output Capacity, 1-5
Installation, 2-3 maximum supply pressure, 4-18

Message, 4-17
P
Minimum Closing Time, 4-11
Parameters, Factory Default, Detailed Setup,
Minimum Opening Time, 4-11 4-2
Miscellaneous Group Enable, 4-16 Partial Stroke, 4-19
Module Base Partial Stroke Test, 6-5
Removal, 7-3 Configuring
Replacing, 7-4 Partial Stroke Pressure Limit, 4-20
Partial Stroke Tvl, 4-20
Module Base, Parts List, 8-4 Pause Time, 4-20
Module Base Maintenance, 7-3 Stroke Speed, 4-20
initiating, 6-5
Mounting, 2-6 Device (Digital Valve Controller), 6-5
67CFR, 2-18 Field Communicator, 6-6
DVC6005 base unit, 2-13 Remote Push Button, 6-5
Pipestand, 2-13 Local DI, 6-5
Wall, 2-13 Local Push Button, 6-5
DVC6010, 2-6 Parts
DVC6015, 2-13 Common Parts, 8-3
DVC6020, 2-8 Feedback Parts, 8-5
DVC6025, 2-15 Gauges, Tire Valves, & Pipe Plugs, 8-5
DVC6030, 2-10 HART Filters, 8-6
DVC6035, 2-16 I/P Converter Assembly, 8-4
Kits, 8-2
Module Base, 8-4
Ordering, 8-2
N Printed Wiring Board Assembly, 8-5
Relay, 8-4
Nameplates Terminal Box, 8-4
ATEX, B-6, B-8
PD, (Performance Diagnostics), 6-8
CSA, B-2, B-3
FM, B-5 Performance Diagnostics, (PD), 6-8
IECEx, B-10
Performance Tuner, 3-4, 4-7
natural gas, as supply medium, 7-2 Pneumatic Relay
Natural Gas Certified, Single Seal device, Adjusting, 5-10
2-20 Parts List, 8-4
Removing, 7-7
Index Number of Power Ups, Displaying Status, 6-8 Replacing, 7-7
Polling Address, 4-17
Press Set Point, 4-10
O Pressure A, 6-7
ODV, (Optimized Digital Valve), 6-8 Pressure Control, 4-9
Operational, 4-17 Pressure Range Hi, 4-9
Status, 4-17 Pressure Range Lo, 4-9
Optimized Digital Valve, (ODV), 6-8
G Pressure Sensor Calibration, 5-6
Output Pressure, Displaying Value, 6-7 Pressure Tuning Sets, Gain Values, 4-7
Overview, 6-7 Pressure Units, 4-17

Index
Principle of Operation Set Point Filter Time, 4-11
DVC6000, A-2 Set Point Rate Close, 4-11
HART Communication, A-2
Set Point Rate Open, 4-11
Printed Wiring Board Assembly
Parts List, 8-5 Setpoint, 6-7
Removing, 7-6 Setup Wizard, 3-2
Replacing, 7-7
Setting DIP Switch, 7-7 SIS, Pressure Mode Enable, 4-10
SIS Alerts, 4-15
Protection, 3-2, 4-3
Solenoid Valve Testing, 2-22
PST Press Limit, double acting actuators,
4-20 special application, 2-22
Special Instructions for Safe Use and
Installations in Hazardous Locations, 2-4
R ATEX Flameproof, 2-5
ATEX Intrinsic Safety, 2-4
Raw Travel Input, Displaying Status, 6-8 ATEX Type n, 2-5
Related Documents, 1-3 CSA, 2-4
FM, 2-4
Relay IECEx Intrinsic Safety, Type n, Flameproof,
Double−Acting, 5-10 2-5
Single−Acting Direct, 5-11
Specifications, 1-3
Single−Acting Reverse, 5-11
Stabilize/Optimize, 3-4, 4-6
Relay A, 5-10
Status, 4-16, 6-4
Relay Adjustment, 5-10
Calibration & Diagnostics, 4-17
Double−Acting, 5-10
Instrument Time, 4-16
Relay B, 5-11 Integrator, 4-17
Relay C, 5-11 Integrator Saturation, 4-17
Operational, 4-17
Relay Type, 4-18
Steady−State Air Consumption, 1-5
Remote Travel Sensor Connections, 2-25
Stroke Valve, 6-4
Using a 10 kOhm External Potentiometer
as, 2-25 Stroking the Output, with Field Communicator,
Using a Two−Resistor Series as, 2-27 6-4
Using the DVC6015, DVC6025 and Supply Pressure, 1-5
DVC6035 Feedback unit as, 2-25 Displaying Value, 6-7
reset, 4-8
Restart Control Mode, 4-3
Revision Information, DVC6000
T Index
Device, 6-8 Temperature

Firmware, 6-8 Maximum Recorded, Displaying Value, 6-7
Hardware, 6-8 Minimum Recorded, Displaying Value, 6-7
HART Universal, 6-8 Units, 4-17
Terminal Box
Parts List, 8-4
S Removing, 7-8
Replacing, 7-8
Serial Number
Instrument, 4-17 TEST Terminals, 7-15 G
Valve, 4-17, 4-18 Third−Party Approvals, 2-4
Service Tools, 6-2 Touch−Up Travel Calibration, 5-6

Travel, Displaying Value, 6-7 Travel Sensor Motion, 4-19
Travel / Pressure Control, 4-9 Travel Target, Displaying Value, 6-7
End Point Pressure Control, 4-9 Travel Tuning Sets, Gain Values, 4-4
Pressure Control, 4-9
Troubleshooting, Instrument, 7-14
Travel Accumulation Alert Enable, 4-15
Tuning, 4-4
Travel Accumulator Pressure, 4-7
Displaying Value, 6-7 Travel, 4-4
Enabling Alert, 4-15
Resetting, 4-15 Tuning Sets
Pressure, 4-7
Travel Accumulator Alerts, 4-15 Gain Values, 4-7
Travel, 4-4
Travel Cutoffs, 4-9
Gain Values, 4-4
Travel Deviation Alert, 4-13
Travel History Alerts, 4-15
travel indicator, 2-11
U
Upper Operating Pressure, 4-10
Travel Limit Lo, Travel/Pressure Control, 4-9
Travel Limit/Cutoff Alerts, 4-14
Travel Limits V
Change, 4-9, 4-15
Setting, 4-9 Valve Group Enable, 4-16
Travel Limit Hi Valve Serial Number, 4-17, 4-18

Travel Limit/Cutoff Alerts, 4-14 Valve Style, 4-19
View Alert Records, 4-16
Travel Sensor
View Number of Days Powered Up, 6-8
Adjusting
DVC6010, 5-7 Voltage Available
DVC6015, 5-7 Calculating, 2-31
DVC6020, 5-8 Checking, 7-14
DVC6025, 5-8
DVC6030, 5-7
DVC6035, 5-7
Parts List, 8-5
W
Removing Wiring Length Guidelines, Auxiliary Terminal ,
Index DVC6010, 7-9 6-5
DVC6015, 7-9
DVC6020, 7-9 Wiring Practices
DVC6025, 7-9 Communication Cable Capacitance, 2-33
DVC6030, 7-10 Control System Requirements, 2-30
DVC6035, 7-10 Compliance Voltage, 2-32
Replacing HART Filter, 2-30
DVC6010, 7-10 Voltage Available, 2-31
DVC6015, 7-10
DVC6020, 7-12
DVC6025, 7-12 Z
G DVC6030, 7-13
DVC6035, 7-13 Zero Control Signal, 4-18
Travel Sensor Adjust, 5-7 Zero Power Condition, 4-18

Neither Emerson, Emerson Process Management, nor any of their affiliated entities assumes responsibility for the selection, use or
maintenance of any product. Responsibility for proper selection, use, and maintenance of any product remains solely with the
purchaser and end user.
Fisher, FIELDVUE, ValveLink, PlantWeb, PROVOX, Rosemount, Tri-Loop, DeltaV, RS3 and THUM are marks owned by one of the companies in
the Emerson Process Management business unit of Emerson Electric Co. Emerson Process Management, Emerson, and the Emerson logo are
trademarks and service marks of Emerson Electric Co. HART is a mark owned by the HART Comunication Foundation. All other marks are the
property of their respective owners.
The contents of this publication are presented for informational purposes only, and while every effort has been made to ensure their accuracy,
they are not to be construed as warranties or guarantees, express or implied, regarding the products or services described herein or their use or
applicability. All sales are governed by our terms and conditions, which are available upon request. We reserve the right to modify or improve the
designs or specifications of such products at any time without notice.
Emerson Process Management

Marshalltown, Iowa 50158 USA
Sorocaba, 18087 Brazil
Chatham, Kent ME4 4QZ UK
Dubai, United Arab Emirates
Singapore 128461 Singapore
www.Fisher.com
2001, 2013 Fisher Controls International LLC. All rights reserved.

Fisher R FIELDVUE™ DVC6000 Digital Valve Controllers Instruction Manual (Supported)

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Fisher R FIELDVUE™ DVC6000 Digital Valve Controllers Instruction Manual (Supported)

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Fisher R FIELDVUE™ DVC6000 Digital Valve Controllers Instruction Manual (Supported)

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Supported Product DVC6000 Digital Valve Controllers

D102794X012 October 2013

Fisherr FIELDVUE™ DVC6000 Digital Valve

E 2013 Fisher Controls International LLC. All rights reserved.

Fisherr FIELDVUEt DVC6000

Refer to Related Documents on page 1-3 for other documents containing

1 Basic Setup 1 Analog In Units 1‐2‐3‐2‐1

1‐1‐1 indicates fast‐key sequence to reach menu

FIELDVUE DVC6000 Digital Valve Controller

Conventions Used in this Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2

Related Documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3

Educational Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4

September 2013 1-1

Some of the procedures also contain the sequence of

1-2 September 2013

Figure 1-2. Rotary Control Valve with

September 2013 1-3

Using FIELDVUE Instruments with the Smart

HART Field Device Specification − Supplement

1-4 September 2013

Available Configurations Maximum: 10 bar (145 psig) or maximum pressure

September 2013 1-5

Vibration Testing Method Electrical Housing:

1-6 September 2013

Stem/Shaft Travel Cover: Thermoplastic polyester

Rotary Actuators with rated travel between 50 Options

Construction Materials However, the product may bear the CE marking to

Table 1-3. EMC Summary Results—Immunity

September 2013 1-7

T5(Tamb ≤ 80C) Type 4X, IP66

1-8 September 2013

September 2013 1-9

1-10 September 2013

September 2013 1-11

1-12 September 2013

September 2013 2-1

2 Maximum Cable Capacitance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-33

Installation in Conjunction with a Rosemount

2-2 September 2013

September 2013 2-3

2-4 September 2013

September 2013 2-5

CAP SCREW, FLANGED

2-6 September 2013

MACHINE SCREW, FLAT

September 2013 2-7

2-8 September 2013

CAM/ROLLER POSITION MARK LOCK WASHER

September 2013 2-9

ARM ASSEMBLY PIN

CAP SCREW FEEDBACK

Figure 2-7. Locating Adjustment Arm Pin in Feedback Arm of a

DVC6030 on Quarter-Turn Actuators

If required, a mounting adaptor is included in the

2-10 September 2013

TRAVEL INDICATOR PIN

4. If required, attach the spacer to the actuator shaft.

Refer to figures 2-9 and 2-10. The travel indicator

September 2013 2-11